How Big Business Uses Big Government to Rape You (And Why You Love It)

How Big Business Uses Big Government to Rape You (And Why You Love It)

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
September 2, 2023

 



Watch on Archive / BitChute / Odysee / Rokfin / Rumble

FROM 2016: You’ve probably heard all about Upton Sinclair’s 1906 expose of the turn-of-the-century American meatpacking industry and the Chicago stockyards…but everything you’ve heard about it is wrong. The book wasn’t an expose of the meatpackers, the legislation it inspired served to help the industry it sought to punish, and Sinclair himself hated the end result of his book, which aimed for the heart and hit the stomach by accident.

Join us for this month’s edition of the Film, Literature and the New World Order as we learn not to trust what’s on the label of mainline history.

FLASHBACK SHOW NOTES:

Big Government Has Come for This Small-Town Amish Farmer. Here’s How He’s Fighting Back.

Episode 227 – The Regulation Trap

Interview 1382 – The Social Media Regulation Psyop

Upton Sinclair’s “The Jungle” – FLNWO #35

EPISODE SHOW NOTES:

The Jungle (Free Audiobook)

Upton Sinclair – Spartacus Schoolnet

History Brief: Teddy’s Food and Drug Regulation

Horse Meat, Hanford Leak, Obama’s Oscar

Genetic Fallacy: How Monsanto Silences Scientific Dissent

Why Government Regulation is a Lie (and what you can do about it)

Excuse Me, Professor: Challenging the Myths of Progressivism

Meat Packers Rape You – And You Love It

Meat Packing – Mises Wiki

How the Wholesome Meat Act Gives Us Less Wholesome Meat

 

Connect with The Corbett Report

Cover image credit: Angela_Yuriko_Smith




The Maui ‘Build Back Better’ Script

The Maui ‘Build Back Better’ Script 

by Rosanne Lindsay, Nature of Healing
August 31, 2023

 

Can the government take control of the land after a natural disaster and then deem it off limits? Is government capable of creating the “natural” disaster?

Land Grab?
“I’m already thinking about ways for the state to acquire that land so that we can put it into Workforce Housing and to put it back into the families or to make it open spaces in perpetuity as a memorial.”

– Gov. Josh Green interview with Michael Henessey, Snowflake news, Green Wants State to Own Lahaina, August 15, 2023, [13:00 minute mark].

The new governor of Hawaii, Josh Green M.D., a licensed medical doctor, resident of Hawaii, but not a Hawaiian, became governor in December of 2022 and took office in January of  2023. In similar fashion, Maui also elected a new mayor, Richard Bissen, at the same time. But where was the mayor during the disaster? And why is he now facing calls to resign?

“I’m not sure who was in charge.”

– Maui Mayor Richard Bissen

Was the unspeakable Maui disaster the result of incompetence or was it orchestrated by design?

According to an article in the California Globe, Josh Green has been a puppet for the United Nations and a spokesperson for the Build Back Better (bbb) 2030 agenda, which seeks to create “Stack-N-Pack” housing in Smart™ Cities all over the world by 2030.

According to the July 13, 2020 World Economic Forum Playbook, the “bbb” agenda includes: “destruction,” “green recover,” “reset and reinvent,” disasters,” based on “Climate Change.”

In Hawaii, the BBB created the Build Beyond Barriers Working Group empowered to approve and streamline housing construction projects, scheduled for a 5-year build-out based on the U.N. Sustainable Cities and human Settlements. In other words, no more single family homes.

“The 2030 Agenda Sustainable Development Goal 11, “make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable.”

– Build Beyond Barriers Working Group (BBBWG), August 11, 2023,Office of the Governor

The UN document details “Sustainable Human Settlements” under 6) promoting human settlements planning and management in disaster-prone areas.” 

Green is not the only politician promoting the U.N.’s Build Back Better Agenda, the largest effort to “combat climate change.” On October, 28, 2021, President Biden announced the Build Back Better Framework for the U.S.

The buildup to the Maui fires began when Gov. Green issued an emergency housing proclamation three weeks prior. Along with Hawaii’s robust emergency siren warning system, everything should have been ready to flush out any wayward spark. So why did the warning sirens sit silent during the deadly fires?

Agenda Timeline to Fires

Thanks to Peggy Hall for her “Peggy-isms” and her historical reporting featured in her “Maui Fires” Playlist

One month before the Maui fires …(July 12, 2023), Governor Green issued a press release highlighting a commitment to the United Nations (U.N.) 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) under the narrative of uniformity.

We cannot put off changing things any longer. We refuse to stand idle when 2030 looms closer and closer… We only have one Island Earth, let us do our best to take care of it and each other. We are one species, with one planet, one chance.”

– Gov. Josh Green, July 12, 2023

Three weeks before the Maui fires… (July 18 2023), Governor Green issued a controversial Emergency Housing Proclamation titled, Emergency Proclamation relating to Housing” related to natural disasters or Covid. The proclamation not only suspends the laws of Hawaii to gives the Governor broad powers over any emergency, but also removes barriers to building new homes.

The laws suspended include provisions related to historic preservation, county zoning and the state Land Use Commission, which functions as a state-level zoning authority. The order also suspends Hawaii’s environmental review law, which requires in-depth environmental impact statements for projects determined to have a significant impact on natural and cultural resources.

The fast-tracked environmental review process will largely be conducted by the working group and housing officer. While Green promised the group and officer will work transparently, the working group will not be subject to Hawaii’s Sunshine Law, which among things requires decision-making agencies to hold their meetings in public.

One week before the fires… Governor Green spoke at the UN Sustainability Forum:

“We have done some things. One is The Aloha Plus Challenge, which is a data-driven approach… to track the SDGs to make sure that we embed them in all of our policies.”

– Governor Josh Green speaks at Sustainability Forum, United Nations, Source: Green Wants State to Own Lahaina, August 15, ,2023 [minute mark 19:00].

After the fires… Gov. Green took the spotlight several times. Did he make any contradictory statements?

“This is going to be a multi-year recovery. It’s going to take essentially years to rebuild Lahaina which was destroyed. But we will build it back better……We will find a way to make sure there is more housing…”  

Source: KTIV interview  August 11, 2023,  5:11 minute mark


“It was so hot that even metal contorted.”

– Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News


“When you see mostly fatalities and very few injuries, that tells you it was a natural disaster.”

– In response to “You would still call this a natural disaster and not man-made? Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News


“I would call this a natural disaster because the winds were moving any fire between 60 and 80 miles per hour, that’s a mile a minute.”

– Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News


“If you put a fire truck in the way of the flames that were coming through at a thousand miles per hour, the fire truck would have been incinerated in addition to the people.”

– Gov. Josh Green, August 14, 2023 CBS Morning News


*I’m already thinking about ways for the state to acquire that land so that we can put it into Workforce Housing and to put it back into the families or to make it open spaces in perpetuity as a memorial.”

– Gov. Josh Green interview with Michael Henessey, Snowflake news, Source: Green Wants State to Own Lahaina, August 15, 2023,


“That level of destruction in a fire hurricane, something new to us in this age of global warming, was the ultimate reason that so many people perished.”

– Josh Green KITV News, Source Global Warming Caused Deaths says Gov. Josh Green, August 16, 2023


“There are going to be fires months in and months out for decades to come.”

– Josh Green, local news update KITV, Source: Not Sounding the Sirens Was Intentional. August 17, 2023

Things Don’t Add Up

One of the few objective investigators connecting the dots, and highlighting the odd behavior of Governor Green, is Peggy Hall.

Peggy raises concerns that everyone should be raising about the dramatic changes happening behind the devastating scenes of Lahaina, Hawaii.

“Why did the emergency alert not go out to the population?”

Things Don’t Add Up, August 11, 2023


“How is it that my NAV System in my car can know exactly to the minute when I’m going to arrive, but it [technology] can’t predict these weather events?”

Things Don’t Add Up, August 11, 2023


“Why was there no water in the pumps?

– Global Warming Caused Deaths says Gov. Josh Green, August 16, 2023


“Because Maui is now in a state of emergency, he [Josh Green] can suspend any law he wants… he can take people’s private property. He can take control of the public property. He can prevent people from moving in or out. And then, he wants to prevent people from having their own will to sell their property.”

– GLOBAL WARMING CAUSED DEATHS Says Gov. Josh GREEN  August 16, 2023


“It was not a ‘wild fire.’ It was an urban fire.”

 (More) Weird Comments from Josh Green, August 17, 2023


“How did the fire get put out? Who put the fire out? There was no water. The fire fighters fled the scene in a police car… Why was the fire chief not even on the island?”

Maui Fire Chief Missing, August 22, 2023


“Am I the only one bothered by the phrase ‘human settlements?'”

– Emergency Declared 3 Weeks Before Maui Fire. August 23, 2023


“There is no legal authority for this governor to do what they are doing.”

Proof Of Lahaina Land Grab, August 29, 2023


“The suspension of laws will work? We are are a nation that is supposed to follow laws, not suspend them.”

Proof Of Lahaina Land Grab, August 29, 2023

These “holes in the narrative” strengthen the premise for a land grab. Some of  the biggest holes include 1) the fires were instigated by a “hurricane-fire” that blew in from hurricane winds too far away from the island to spread any natural flames, and 2) The flames spread at a speed of” 60-85 mph, “or even “1000 mph,” both speeds suggested by Governor Green in the same interview.

Directed Energy Weapons

How did the fire begin? Some say power lines. Some say a brush fire near the site. Some say ‘a ‘compound disaster’ and climate change. Army Major General Kenneth Hara, the man in charge of the Hawaii National Guard says, “We don’t know what actually caused the wildfires in Hawaii.”

The U.S. Government admits to manipulating hurricanes. The history of Project Cirrus describes the extent to which corporations and government work together to manipulate the weather. [See Peggy’s take].

The nature of the Maui fires cause some to compare Maui to Paradise, California that burned in a similar pattern in November of 2018 where homes and cars burned while trees were left standing.

If “metal contorted” and bodies turned to ash in Lahaina, Peggy Hall reminds viewers that metal melts at 250oº F for a sustained amount of time, whereas normal fires bun at 1400º F. Is the Maui devastation proof of a natural fire fed by grass, as the narrative goes, or directed microwave energy?

Companies that contract with the Department of Defense include the Air Force and companies such as Northrop Grumman which have used unmanned aerial systems, including directed energy laser technology for the last 50 years. Is it a coincidence that the AMOS site is located on Maui, Hawaii?

“The sodium laser excites sodium atoms in the upper atmosphere to create a source of light or beacon 90 kilometers (55 miles) above the Earth.”

–  AFRL at the Maui, Hawaii Site, part of the Space Electro-Optics Division.

Reinventing Capitalism

The Build-Back-Better Agenda is part of the World Economic Forum script, tied to reinventing Capitalism that reads as follows:

Thanks to the ongoing pandemic, the world is off-balance – and it will remain so for years to come. Far from settling into a ‘new normal’, we should expect a COVID-19 domino effect, triggering further disruptions – positive as well as negative ­– over the decade ahead….

A true recovery from COVID-19 will not be about putting things back together the way they were: we need to ‘build back better’, to ‘reset’, if we are to address the deep systemic vulnerabilities the pandemic has exposed.

Increasingly, comprehensive and integrated risk assessments will be essential for companies to fulfil their fiduciary obligations and maintain their social license to operate.

The U.S. version of the Build Back Better script can be read here.

The questions left to ponder are: were the fires set intentionally? Were they accelerated? Augmented?  If so, where will the next one be? What will the new restrictions on freedom look like? Did the 1976 Eagles song, The Last Resort, from the album Hotel California, foretell the events in Paradise and Lahaina? [see verses 4, 6, & 8].



Will you agree to the new U.N. terms?

Thank you to the amazing Peggy Hall for compiling the dots!

 

Related Articles

 

Connect with Rosanne Lindsay

Cover image credit: State Farm under Creative Commons License

 


TCTL editor’s note:

In the article above, Rosanne shared links to The Last Resort by The Eagles. “Did the 1976 Eagles song, The Last Resort, from the album Hotel California, foretell the events in Paradise and Lahaina?”

Here are the lyrics:

She came from Providence
One in Rhode Island
Where the old world shadows hang
Heavy in the air
She packed her hopes and dreams
Like a refugee
Just as her father came
Across the sea

She heard about a place
People were smilin’
They spoke about the red man’s way
How they loved the land
They came from everywhere
To the Great Divide
Seeking a place to stand
Or a place to hide

Down in the crowded bars
Out for a good time
Can’t wait to tell you all
What it’s like up there
They called it paradise
I don’t know why
Somebody laid the mountains low
While the town got high

Then the chilly winds blew down
Across the desert
Through the canyons of the coast
To the Malibu
Where the pretty people play
Hungry for power
To light their neon way
Give them things to do

Some rich men came and raped the land
Nobody caught ’em
Put up a bunch of ugly boxes
And Jesus people bought ’em
They called it paradise
The place to be
They watched the hazy sun
Sinking in the sea

We can leave it all behind and sail to Lahaina
Just like the missionaries did so many years ago
They even brought a neon sign said, “Jesus is coming.”
Brought the white man’s burden down
Brought the white man’s reign

Who will provide the grand design?
What is yours and what is mine?
‘Cause there is no more new frontier
We have got to make it here

We satisfy our endless needs
And justify our bloody deeds
In the name of destiny
And in the name of God

And you can see them there
On Sunday morning
They stand up and sing about
What it’s like up there
They call it paradise
I don’t know why
You call someplace paradise
Kiss it goodbye




Doug Casey on Argentina’s Javier Milei, Anarcho-Capitalist Front-Runner in the Presidential Primaries

Doug Casey on Argentina’s Javier Milei, Anarcho-Capitalist Front-Runner in the Presidential Primaries

 

 

Doug Casey on the World’s First Anarcho-Capitalist President

by Doug Casey, International Man
August 30, 2023

 

International Man: Anarcho-capitalist Javier Milei recently won Argentina’s presidential primary. He is now the undisputed front-runner in the upcoming elections.

The outcome took many by surprise. Milei is an outsider who bested the country’s two entrenched establishment parties.

How did this happen, and why should anyone outside of Argentina care?

Doug Casey: It could be the most dramatic thing that’s happened politically since at least World War II. Anywhere. Why? Because he’s an AnCap libertarian who’d like to abolish the State—or come as close as possible. If he’s elected in October, he’ll make every move possible to eliminate—not just reduce—as many government departments as possible as quickly as possible. And most people seem oblivious to it.

Milei was in first place in the primary. Historically, in Argentina, the person who wins the primary wins the general election. There’s only been one exception to that rule. Even more encouraging is his ratings have gone up from 30% to 40% since the primary. It appears his campaign is not just a flash in the pan but a trend that’s building momentum.

Argentina was one of the most prosperous countries in the world a hundred years ago when it was about as free as any country economically. Before Peron, the Argentine GDP equaled the rest of the continent put together. But since the accession of Juan Peron in 1946, it’s consistently gone downhill every year.

Why might that be?

Peron was an overt fan of Mussolini and fascism. Fascism—a word coined by Mussolini—is defined as the complete subordination of corporations and business to the State. After WW2, the word “fascism” was a no-no, so the system was rechristened “Peronism” in Argentina. It’s not a consistent philosophy; it has many mutations. It’s all about businessmen and politicians using each other, through the State, to get rich. The lower classes are made dependent, and the middle class is impoverished. Fascism has little to do with militarism and jackboots; it’s an economic system. Almost every country in the world is fascist today—including the US, the EU, China, and Russia.

Despite the triumph of Peronism, Argentina still has the most classically liberal traditions in all of Latin America. It’s always been the most outward-looking country in Latin America. I’ve always believed it was the most fertile ground for a pro-individual liberty revolution in Latin America. Now, that may be happening.

If we divide Argentine society into a ruling, a lower, and a middle class, it’s clear that for the last 80 years, the ruling class has used welfare schemes and lies to get the lower classes to vote against their own interests. The middle class has paid for it with immense taxes and regulations. Inflation has basically destroyed the lower and middle classes; high inflation has made it impossible for them to save and build capital.

Milei could totally overturn all of this. The average Argentine is fed up with being ripped off. Milei’s support is greatest among the young and what’s left of the middle class. Estimates are that half the country is hard-pressed to feed themselves. They desperately and enthusiastically want radical change, and only the most stupid can’t see what fascism, socialism, and other varieties of statism have done. The main supporters of the status quo are the unions and welfare mooches. Everyone else hates them.

International Man: Milei has called central banking and fiat currency a historical fraud. He has vowed to “burn down the central bank” and replace the peso with the dollar and whatever commodity the free market would choose as money. He is favorable to precious metals and Bitcoin.

He has called taxation theft and seeks to drastically reduce—and eventually eliminate—many taxes.

Milei also wants to radically cut down the size of the government and eliminate numerous departments.

He also rejects the climate change hoax and was critical of the Covid mass hysteria.

Doug, you are a prominent anarcho-capitalist. What is your take on the soundness of Milei’s platform?

Doug Casey: I am totally in favor of Milei. In fact, he’s more radical (using radical in the proper sense of getting to the root of the problem) than Ron Paul was in his US campaigns. He’s as radical and sincere as my old friend Harry Browne, who ran for the US presidency in 1996 and 2000.

Milei is extremely outspoken and vibrant. He realizes that, since the average person doesn’t understand economics and has no interest in philosophy, politics is 90% entertainment. I urge everybody reading this to go to YouTube and tune into several videos of Milei (herehere, and here).

Milei is totally sound from an economic, political, and a philosophical point of view. But—and this is critically important—he’s sound from a moral point of view.

He deals in basic concepts of good and evil, right and wrong. That’s something that no politician anywhere discusses, certainly not in South America. It’s the equivalent of hitting a donkey between the eyes with a two-by-four to get his attention. Everyone intuitively understands that the political class is essentially criminal—but only Milei is brave enough to say it. The average guy wants to do the right thing, the moral thing. That’s what Milei is pointing out to people and why they like him. He doesn’t use doubletalk, brook compromise, or support half measures.

That’s why, in the US, I actually respect the Democrats more than the Republicans.

How can I say that?

Every idea the Democrats have is wrong and rotten to its core, but at least they’re not hypocrites. They say what they want to do. They actually believe in something, even though it’s stupid and evil.

The Republicans, on the other hand, don’t have any real core beliefs. They don’t disagree with the moral premises of the Democrats. They just say that the Democrats are going too far, too fast.

Milei, on the other hand, wants to overturn the moral structure that politics is built on.

International Man: The global mainstream media has synchronized their talking points on Milei.

It’s almost impossible to find an article about Milei—in any language—that doesn’t preface him with some kind of meaningless pejorative, labeling him a “far-right populist,” an “ultra-rightist,” or something to that effect.

Why is the Davos class so afraid of Milei? Can he overcome their opposition?

Doug Casey: This is further proof of how worthless the mainstream media is. They call Milei a Donald Trump lookalike, or ultra-right wing, in an attempt to scare Boobus argentinus. These people don’t deal in issues and factual programs but fear-mongering. Everywhere in the world, the chattering classes are only malevolent mouthpieces of the ruling class.

Milei is not “ultra-right.” He’s a libertarian who believes in free minds and free markets. In fact, he’s more than a libertarian; he’s an AnCap—an anarcho-capitalist. He doesn’t believe the State serves a useful purpose. He believes that society, certainly in an advanced industrial country, can live without a government. I’ve discussed this philosophy here and here.

His plan is to reduce the size of the government by 50% this year, 50% the next year, and so on, until it’s as near zero as possible. The horrible people in Davos hate him because he’s attacking their very essence. He doesn’t intend just to make a few changes around the edges but to transform Argentina into the freest and most prosperous country on the planet.

In some ways, he’s symptomatic of what’s going on in the world at large today. The United States itself, in my opinion, is on the ragged edge of a civil war. Freedom and personal liberty have been retreating at an accelerating rate for years. People in the US are just as fed up as the Argentines; we just don’t have a proper firebrand. Trump is as close as we get, but he’s just a traditionalist, not a libertarian.

Milei is cause for optimism in the world at large.

International Man: President Nayib Bukele dramatically transformed El Salvador at lightning speed—drastically reducing crime, making Bitcoin legal money, and initiating reforms to bring business and productive people to the country.

Although Argentina is much bigger than El Salvador, does Bukele’s example suggest that enormous positive change is possible in Argentina?

Doug Casey: Bukele is another symptom of a possible major turnaround in the world.

The statists and collectivists may finally have overplayed their hand. They’re just clever criminals with large followings, like Hitler in Germany and Mao in China. Only the brain-dead buy their themes. “You’ll own nothing, and you’ll be happy.” The world is ending because of climate change. Vaccinate or die. 15-minute cities. Restricted travel. No eating meat. ESG. DEI. No fossil fuels. It’s a long litany. They can destroy civilization itself.

People with a brain are looking for a lightning rod to catalyze change.

In El Salvador that may be Bukele. He definitely has libertarian instincts, indicated by the fact his main economic advisor is Safedean Ammous, an AnCap. He’s one of the most important economists in the world today, along with Walter Block and Hans-Hermann Hoppe. I urge you to listen to the interview he did with me last month on AnCap principles (link).

El Salvador is the last country in the hemisphere—with the exception of Haiti—I would have picked to turn around. It’s the most overpopulated country in the hemisphere. It’s crime-ridden, which is why he’s locked up 65,000 gang members. It had a nasty civil war from 1979-1982. It has no exports except for coffee, bananas, and poor people. Who could have guessed?

Bukele already made Bitcoin legal tender. It’s possible that he’ll reform El Salvador in the same way as Milei will try to reform Argentina.

International Man: What are the investment or speculative implications of Milei’s rise for Argentine assets?

What are the lifestyle and other international diversification implications?

Doug Casey: Right now, Argentina is the cheapest, nice country in the world. Certainly the cheapest country in the Western world.

That’s especially amazing in view of the immense tax burden that the Argentine economy has to bear, paying huge numbers of useless mouths who detract from prosperity.

If Milei is elected, he’ll radically reduce taxes, which means that costs of production will drop radically. As the country dollarizes, the currency will stabilize, and gold could come next. Real prices could drop further, but not because of a collapsing currency. The economy should boom economically as investment pours in. People will go back to work, start saving, and rebuild domestic capital. Argentina could quickly become, again, one of the world’s richest countries.

What could go wrong with the scenario? The parasites now living off the State don’t want their rice bowls broken. Even though Milei has huge support from people across the social spectrum—including the lower classes who are fed up with being kept like pets by the people in the Deep State. The Deep State will undoubtedly fight Milei’s reforms viciously. I hope he has plenty of competent bodyguards around him because these people are genuinely evil, just like the Deep State in the US.

If he’s elected, both the lifestyle and investment implications could be huge.

Argentina has always been one of my favorite countries in the world, bar none. But if they go to sound banking, a sound currency, and disregard the rules laid down by the US, the IMF, the World Bank, and the World Economic Forum—it could really be one of the best places in the world to live.

You ought to keep in mind that citizenship is available with only two years of residency. And even during those two years of residency, it’s only necessary to spend half of the year in the country. Culturally, Argentina is more European than some countries in Europe.

If Milei manages to wash away the socialist immorality and criminality that has corrupted Argentina for so many years, I won’t just live down there half of the year, but all of the year.

 

Connect with International Man

Cover image credit: VOX España

 




Revisiting Paradise California – Where Are the Chimneys?

Revisiting Paradise California – Where Are the Chimneys?

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 29, 2023

 

In the pictures below, we find that the houses in Paradise, California destroyed during the alleged wildfire on November 8, 2018. Notice that unburned trees surround the houses razed to the ground.

How could the houses be destroyed by a wildfire fed by burning trees when none of the trees in the forest surrounding the homes burned? The answer is disturbing, but it is the only logical answer: the buildings were immolated through directed energy weapons.

The unburned trees are a clue that directed energy weapons were used. One of the two principal directed energy weapons uses microwaves. Microwaves have little effect on wood and paper because they absorb little of the microwaves. It is similar to putting a paper plate in a microwave oven. It will not burn. But putting aluminum foil into that same microwave oven will spark and catch fire. Another directed energy weapon developed by the military uses lasers, which are able to burn wood and other combustible materials.

Another clue that directed energy weapons were used is the absence of fireplaces or chimneys in the remnants of the immolated houses. Ordinarily, a chimney and fireplace will remain standing after a house is burned down. That is because the fireplaces and chimneys are designed to withstand the heat of fires. But directed energy weapons work on a different principle. They are a form of electromagnetic energy that affects material at the molecular level. Heat results in the process of destruction, and often there will be fire. But the microwave directed energy weapons destroy material by affecting the molecular bonds. Thus, the directed energy weapons can destroy chimneys and fireplaces, where those same chimneys and fireplaces would withstand the heat of an ordinary fire. The absence of chimneys and fireplaces is evidence that directed energy weapons were used to raze the houses to the ground.

Above and below are some of the homes that were destroyed during the alleged November 8, 2018, wildfire in Paradise, California. The problem is that the trees that are supposed to have caused the immolation of the houses are still standing and show no sign of any fire damage.

One notable feature of the house that have been completely razed to the ground is that most houses have no remaining chimneys or fireplaces. In an ordinary house fire, the fireplace and chimney typically remain because they are designed to withstand the heat from a fire.

There is only one way to cause the kind of selective destruction where fireplaces and chimneys are destroyed but combustible trees remain: directed energy weapons. There are two principal kinds of directed energy weapons, microwave and laser. Microwave directed energy weapons affect dense materials causing destruction at the molecular level, but will not burn tree. Laser directed energy weapons will ignite wood and trees.

Above are the remains of the Brennan House in Wellfleet, Massachusetts, which was believed to have been destroyed by an arsonist in 2017. Notice that the chimney and concrete foundation remained. It is typical in a house fire to find the chimney and fireplace remaining because they are designed to withstand the heat of fires. Compare that to the houses in Paradise, California, that were allegedly razed to the ground by wildfires. But there are no remaining chimneys on any of the immolated homes.

 

 

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

The Dog That Didn’t Bark

Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

Police Blocked Roads To Prevent Residents From Fleeing the Immolation of Lahaina

Telltale Evidence That Lahaina Was Destroyed By Directed Energy Weapons

More Evidence That Directed Energy Weapons Were Used to Immolate Lahaina

 

Connect with Great Mountain Publishing

Cover image credit: Test Subject 51




Was Weaponized GIS Used in Lahaina?

Was Weaponized GIS Used in Lahaina?
Click-and-destroy program for “sustainable redevelopment” 

by Sasha Latypova, Due Diligence & Art
August 28, 2023

 

This information is from an anonymous contributor. It describes the evidence from the GIS (Geographic Information System) of extreme precision and selectivity of the Lahaina fire. It also points to the plans of potentially moving all low-income residents off their properties and into a concentration camp, ahem, a 15-minute city.

GIS system is a computer system for capturing, storing, checking, and displaying data related to positions on Earth’s surface. GIS can show many different kinds of data on one map, such as streets, buildings, and vegetation. This enables people to more easily see, analyze, and understand patterns and relationships. US Government has all these data layers in extreme detail for all developed areas in the country.

As of today (Aug 25, 2023) if you navigate your web browser to Google Maps, select “satellite view”, then select “globe view”. It appears that the aerial imagery was recently updated to reflect the damage from the recent “event”, that took place in Lahaina Hawaii earlier this August. Out of curiosity I also looked at GIS information on Lahaina, (link below) and wanted to see if there is correlation between damaged structures and particular zoning. I found some interesting things here.

GISLink: https://qpublic.schneidercorp.com/Application.aspx

Starting at the North end of Lahaina, I see the Fire Station, Courthouse, Civic center, Police Station where all spared from fire damage despite very clear fire damage to surrounding undeveloped land around these buildings.

What I found interesting is the surrounding undeveloped land with extensive fire damage, are parcels owned by “Department of Hawaiian Homelands”, “Housing Finance and Dev Corp”, which both appear to be the same and fall under Hawaii’s HUD authority. HUD appears own property running south from the civic center down to the Lahaina Bypass.

Everything west of HUD owned parcels are hundreds of small residential lots which where all destroyed seemingly from fires on originating from that HUD land.

Only a small home community was spared and appears intact between Leiali Pkwy and Kaniau Road. Interesting thing about this community is it appears to fall
Under HUD authority as well!

Large inland parcels south of the Lahaina Bypass are owned by large developers and trusts, and everything west of these parcels were hundreds of small residential lots which were all destroyed as well.

What’s most interesting about looking at the aerial imagery, is that amongst the destruction are various structures still standing with green grass & green trees, nearly right up to edge or property line. Looking at GIS data & street view some don’t make sense, as a few have all wood construction! In other cases, condo complexes that appear to be of concrete construction, completely destroyed.

The large commercial area in the center of Lahaina appears to be untouched, the schools on eastern end of Lahaina also appear untouched. This could also very well be due to the construction of these buildings.

A standout of precise destruction is a cluster of what appear to be recently constructed townhomes and condominiums, called “Kahoma Village”. The entire community appears intact, intact homes, green grass. Yet four of the buildings in the center completely destroyed, with cars in the adjacent parking areas looking untouched.

Overall if you’re in a residential zone, commercial mixed use, industrial, hotel zone, damage or destruction is heavy. It appears the government is assigning a “Destroyed 823” code to a lot of these parcels as well.

I can’t help but notice the destruction of buildings is almost following the property lines, even extents of building exteriors. It would be akin to clicking a parcel or structure in GIS and selecting the “terminate” option.

I was looking at this more last night and discovered some drone footage uploaded earlier this week. 18 min of drone footage taken the day after:



Footage is mainly the southern end of Lahaina:

-At 2:05 you can see the Komoha Village I referenced. 4 buildings burned to the ground, yet no evidence of surrounding damage to remaining buildings fully intact. Buildings to the right don’t even have soot on the roof or burned shingles! I’m guessing this complex was being built sometime after March 2020 based on parcel data.

-At 2:18 he flies drone south over front street apartments, according to GIS these are low-income homes completely destroyed.

-At 2:32 he’s flying east, structure on the left in foreground was formally a 4-story condo complex. On the top left of the screen on background you see new homes being constructed, this is on HUD owned land according to parcel map.

-At 4:42 he’s now flying south; you see the fully intact Lahaina Shores beach resort. Directly north to this resort was formally a bunch of small businesses in two story structures you can see on street view. Appears the only thing remaining is the elevator shaft. What’s interesting about this is according to GIS, Lahaina Shores also owned this but had their parcel subdivided into hotel & historic. The structure sat on historic, yet the hotel is fine. Still, I see no smoke damage, heat damage, nor soot on the hotel.

I was looking more at GIS map as well. Looks like there is a right of way cutout for the Lahaina bypass to continue north at some point. In addition, the road adjacent to the gov building is called Lelali Pkwy and looks designed to handle high traffic. If I continue on GIS map north into Kaanapali, parcels owned by private developers appear the have a right of way for a roadway that could connected to Lahaina bypass.

What’s unique about this is the infrastructure of this town is intact. The gov buildings are fine, all roadways are fine and usable. Bridges are intact. The water treatment plant on top of the hill adjacent to school (east end of Lahaina) is fine. School is intact. The substation and solar farm next to school are intact.  The commercial area and new low-income homes being built off Lahaina bypass are fine. Wastewater treatment plant appears to be north of Lahaina in Kaanapali is intact. Essentially, it’s a turnkey community ready to be “redeveloped”. I call it weaponized GIS, because to me it looks like parcels and buildings were clicked and destroyed in a GUI program (much like they would be in my CAD programs).

My 2 cents: government signs emergency order to rezone the agri land owned by HUD on northeast end of Lahaina, all the displaced indigenous and low-income residents are put there. The is all expediated due to urgent need for homes. All the land west of them adjacent to the water is redeveloped into condos to pay for the project. Residents are hit with some kind of “hazardous environment fee” to financially prevent them from rebuilding their property. The other partially destroyed condo complexes file massive insurance claims for damaged buildings. New structures will also have to conform to some kind of environmental sustainability regulations which will also be cost prohibitive to low-income native residents. Aside from the water, the community has two main points to enter and exit, residents have their very own new 15-minute city.

 

Connect with Sasha Latypova

Cover image credit: happyskrappy




Hawaiian Electric Soars After Statement: Power Lines “De-Energized” When Fire Started

Hawaiian Electric Soars After Statement: Power Lines “De-Energized” When Fire Started

by Tyler Durden, ZeroHedge
August 28, 2023

 

Hawaiian Electric Industries Inc. surged as much as 43% in premarket trading in New York after the utility released a statement: their power lines were de-energized for more than six hours in Lahaina when the “Afternoon Fire” broke out on Aug. 8 that ultimately leveled the resort town in West Maui.

Just last week, Maui County slapped Hawaiian Electric with a lawsuit, accusing the utility of negligence that sparked the devastating wildfire that leveled Lahaina and killed more than 100 people, with hundreds still missing.

“We were surprised and disappointed that the County of Maui rushed to court even before completing its own investigation,” said Shelee Kimura, president and CEO of Hawaiian Electric.

Kimura said, “We believe the complaint is factually and legally irresponsible. It is inconsistent with the path that we believe we should pursue as a resilient community committed and accountable to each other as well as to Hawaiʻi’s future. We continue to stand ready to work to that end with our communities and others. Unfortunately, the county’s lawsuit may leave us no choice in the legal system but to show its responsibility for what happened that day.”

Shares of Hawaiian Electric surged as much as 43% in premarket trading.

But still well down from the start of the fire…

Hawaiian Electric outlines important facts about what happened on Aug. 8:

  • A fire at 6:30 a.m. (the “Morning Fire”) appears to have been caused by power lines that fell in high winds.
  • The Maui County Fire Department responded to this fire, reported it was “100% contained,” left the scene and later declared it had been “extinguished.”
  • At about 3 p.m., a time when all of Hawaiian Electric’s power lines in West Maui had been de-energized for more than six hours, a second fire (the “Afternoon Fire”) began in the same area.
  • The cause of the devastating Afternoon Fire has not been determined.

The utility provided more details about the fire:

  • The records conclusively establish that Hawaiian Electric power lines to Lahaina were not energized when the Afternoon Fire broke out shortly before 3 p.m. on Aug. 8, in a field near Lahaina Intermediate School. Power had been out for more than six hours by that time. There was no electricity flowing through the wires in the area or anywhere else on the West Maui coast. Hawaiian Electric has informed ATF investigators of the availability of records that demonstrate these facts.
  • The small Morning Fire, seen in videos taken by local residents, began more than eight hours earlier. Those videos show that power lines had fallen to the ground in high winds near the intersection of Lahainaluna Road and Hoʻokahua Street at approximately 6:30 a.m. A small fire that can be seen by the downed lines spread into the field across the street from the Intermediate School.
  • The Maui County Fire Department responded promptly to the Morning Fire. According to the Department’s public statement that morning, by 9 a.m. the Morning Fire was “100% contained.” The Maui County fire chief subsequently reported that the Fire Department had determined that the Morning Fire was “extinguished,” and the Fire Department left the scene by 2 p.m.
  • Once the fire was out, Hawaiian Electric emergency crews arrived at Lahainaluna Road in the afternoon of Aug. 8 to make repairs; they saw no fire or smoke or embers. All lines to Lahaina remained de-energized and all power in the area remained off.
  • Shortly before 3 p.m., while the power remained off, our crew members saw a small fire about 75 yards away from Lahainaluna Road in the field near the Intermediate School. They immediately called 911 and reported that fire.
  • By the time the Maui County Fire Department arrived back on the scene, it was not able to contain the Afternoon Fire and it spread out of control toward Lahaina.

“The county’s lawsuit distracts from the important work that needs to be done for the people of Lahaina and Maui,” said Scott Seu, president and CEO of Hawaiian Electric.

What distraction could that be?

Here are the following eight questions that we should all be asking about the fires in Hawaii right now…

#1 How did the fires start?  Governor Green is convinced that they were caused by a confluence of factors.  Do you buy his explanation?

Echoing wildfire experts, Gov. Green said Friday that he believes a confluence of weather conditions contributed to the ignition and spread of the blazes.

“It is a product, in my estimation, of certainly global warming combined with drought, combined with a super storm, where we had a hurricane offshore several hundred miles, still generating large winds,” Green told CNN.

#2 How did the fires spread so rapidly?  According to multiple news reports, people were literally jumping into the ocean to escape because the fires were moving so rapidly…

With fires raging on Maui, two men felt there was nowhere to escape the flames – except for the ocean.

The two men live in Lahaina, a historic part of Maui loved by tourists, which appears to be heavily damaged by this week’s raging fire. They described a terrifying scene as they evacuated from Prison Street, right in the heart of Lahaina.

“I saw a couple people just running, I heard screams out of hell … explosions. It felt like we were in hell, it really was. It was just indescribable,” one of the men told Nexstar’s KHON.

#3 How did a fire that was supposedly “out” end up causing the most damage of all?  According to  Governor Green, the Lahaina fire was supposedly given new energy “by far-off Hurricane Dora”

After first erupting early Tuesday, the fire was initially deemed to be out, but winds whipped up by far-off Hurricane Dora that reached up to 81 mph fanned the flames and spurred the blaze to travel about 1 mile every minute, Green said.

#4 According to U.S. Representative Jill Tokuda, the alarm system that is supposed to warn residents that a disaster is happening appears to have failed.  How is that possible?…

We know everybody who’s ever lived in Hawaii knows the warning sirens. It goes off once a month at the beginning of the month at 12 noon, and it blares and if it doesn’t, it gets fixed, because that is our first line of defense. Unfortunately, in this situation, sadly, tragically in this situation, those sirens likely did not go off. The warning signals that were on cell phones, we had no cell coverage or electricity in some of these areas. And the reality is with those warning signs, it tells all of us to turn on the television or look at our phones or turn on the radio. The reality is was how fast this burn was. And you could see it in the videos that survivors were showing me. You could see it in the wreckage. If you turned on your phone, you turned on a radio, if you even could. Remember things were out at that particular point, you would not know what the crisis was.

#5 Why are emergency supplies not getting to the people that desperately need them?  It is being reported that a “telecommunications blackout” has been one of the factors that has been hampering relief efforts…

But an enduring telecommunications blackout hampered government and grassroots efforts to distribute those supplies in the worst-affected neighborhoods, especially for an unknown number of survivors waiting out the aftermath in the few buildings still standing in the historic town of Lahaina and neighborhoods on the outskirts.

With their vehicles burned to a crisp, some sheltering at home have no way to drive to distribution centers miles away, or their cars have run out of gas. Others simply don’t know where to go for help. Toxic fumes and downed power lines with live wires make venturing outdoors dangerous.

#6 Why are people that have just had their homes burned down in the fires already being bombarded with calls with offers to purchase their properties?

The vultures are circling, and it appears that there are some people out there that are extremely interested in scooping up land inexpensively.

#7 Why has the FBI moved a “mobile refrigerated morgue” into Lahaina?…

A mobile refrigerated morgue has been brought to the devastated town of Lahaina as Maui officials continue their search for victims of the worst U.S. wildfire in 100 years.

The death toll on Sunday rose to 96, but Hawaii officials said it was likely to rise significantly.

John Pelletier, the Maui police chief, said only three percent of Lahaina – home to more than 9,000 people – had been searched so far.

#8 Why is Joe Biden lounging on the beach while all of this is happening?…

Outraged Americans blasting President @JoeBiden after he said ‘no comment’ when asked about the catastrophic Maui wildfire, now the deadliest US blaze in over a century. Despite the death toll climbing to about 100, Americans were outraged that Biden remained sunbathing on a beach near his Delaware home.

Before the fire, locals feared billionaires would transform their town into a “Satellite City” for elites. How the elites would acquire the land remained a mystery, but now not so much.

 

Connect with ZeroHedge

Cover image credit: State Farm


TCTL editor’s note: Below you will find two videos where locals examine cars that were burned at temperatures so high that some metals were liquified and glass was melted.

 




Police Blocked Roads to Prevent Residents From Fleeing the Immolation of Lahaina

Police Blocked Roads to Prevent Residents From Fleeing the Immolation of Lahaina

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 24, 2023

 

An eyewitness reveals that police blocked traffic to prevent residents from fleeing the immolation of Lahaina.

There was no logical reason for the police to block cars fleeing the destruction of the city other than to ensure as many people died as possible.

The witness describes the actions of the police as “a combination of stupid and evil.”

Remnants of destroyed cars on Front Street that were caught in the traffic jam caused by a police blockade. The reporter states that the passengers fled their cars. But did they? How does he know? A directed energy weapon could have caught the passengers by surprise. If they were struck with a directed energy weapon, they would have been immolated as they sat in their cars.

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui
The Dog That Didn’t BarkLahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

 

Connect with Great Mountain Publishing

Cover image credit: US National Guard




Ramiro Romani With James Corbett: Take Back Our Tech

Ramiro Romani With James Corbett: Take Back Our Tech

 

“So there’s so many things coming at once. There’s essentially four freedoms that technology has allowed. But then also there are powers — we all know these organizations that are also very scared of us having these freedoms.

“So those are the freedom to travel, the freedom to exchange (which has been bolstered by things like cryptocurrency), the freedom of speech and the freedom of privacy.

“And these four things make it really easy to interact in a way that is in alignment, right, that is voluntary with what you would like.

“And now you see pretty much a law in most Western countries that are coming after these exact freedoms…

“It’s almost like the simulation itself is making it so — it’s forcing us to leave these bigger platforms and into smaller, decentralized community-based groups.

“So throughout things we’ve seen over the past few years — we’ve seen technology being used to try and track and trace every single one of our movements.

“COVID-19 was a perfect example of this. And an article I’m working on talks specifically about contact tracing, which, if people didn’t know, most phones have the ability through Google and Apple for them to install an app on their phone and actually activate it. And they did that en masse to millions of people at once…

“We see technology and we are throwing it out. We’re not going to use it…

“You’re cutting yourself off. You’re doing your own thing, which I completely support your right to live a life free of technology. That’s absolutely your right…

“Ignoring it is not going to make it go away. It’s not going to make these people stop their plans. Understanding it, working with it, changing it — which you absolutely have the possibility to change it. That is the way you can make it better for everyone.”

~ Ramiro Romani

 

Take Back Our Tech

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
August 23, 2023

 

Ramiro Romani of TakeBackOurTech.org and AbovePhone.com joins us today to discuss technology: what it is, how it works, and how we can make it work for us.

We discuss how governments and big tech corporations are collaborating to undermine our rights to privacy, free expression and even freedom of travel and how we can remove the Big Brother surveillance and controls from our devices.



Watch on Archive / BitChute / Odysee / Rokfin / Rumble / Substack

Show Notes:

TakeBackOurTech.org

Building a digital army: UN peacekeepers fight deadly disinformation

AbovePhone.com

Who Can We Call On? How Our Phones Are Tracked By Big Tech, Telecom, and Government

Electromagnetic Radiation – Shield & Educate Yourself, Save a Life

 

Connect with The Corbett Report




The Dog That Didn’t Bark: On Why Lahaina’s Disaster Warning Alarms Did Not Sound

The Dog That Didn’t Bark: On Why Lahaina’s Disaster Warning Alarms Did Not Sound

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 21, 2023

 

In my August 11, 2023, article, I explained the evidence that a directed energy weapon was used to destroy Lahaina, a city on the Island of Maui in Hawaii. The only culprit who could possibly have used such a weapon is the U.S. Military. The cover story for the destruction of Lahaina was that out-of-control wildfires caused it.

On August 20, 23, I revealed in an article that within 40 miles of Lahaina on the Island of Maui is located the Air Force Maui Optical and Supercomputing (AMOS) site, which is part of the AFLR Directed Energy Directorate. The AFLR states “the Directorate develops and transitions technologies in four core technical competencies: laser systems, high power electromagnetics, weapons modeling and simulation, and directed energy and electro-optics for space superiority.”

The disaster warning alarms did not sound to warn that alleged fires were about to engulf the Maui city of Lahaina. The silent sirens on Maui now speak loudly about who was behind the destruction of Lahaina. In one of Arthur Conan Doyle’s Sherlock Holmes stories, “Silver Blaze,” the famous fictional detective deduced the murderer’s identity because a guard dog failed to bark at the time of the murder. Sherlock Holmes deduced that the murderer must have been the dog’s master. It is the same with the sirens not sounding in Lahaina. The sirens did not sound because the perpetrators had complete control of the sirens.

Hawaii Governor Josh Green first claimed that the sirens did not sound because they were immobilized due to the intense heat. If there was an approaching fire as claimed, the very loud 121-decibel sirens would have sounded at the first sign of fire before it would ever reach the sirens which were located along Lahaina’s coast. And so the story by the governor was not believed by anyone. The sirens are tested each month and had just been tested on August 1, 2023, one week before the disaster.

The emergency sirens may have been destroyed, but not in the way the governor claimed. The destruction would not be from fires, as alleged by the governor, but from directed energy weapons. The sirens were along the coast, far from the alleged path of the fire coming from the inland area. Thus, the fire could not have destroyed them. But a sudden burst from a directed energy weapon certainly could have done the trick.

It was eventually claimed that the alarms did not sound because nobody from either the state or county government activated the alarms. Could it be that it was because they knew that the directed energy weapons had disabled the sirens? Now they had a problem on their hands. They now claim that the sirens were purposely not sounded. And so they had to devise a good reason for not doing so. They had to conceal the use of directed energy. They trotted out The Administrator of the Maui Emergency Management Agency, Herman Andaya, who claimed that the sirens were purposely not sounded because they are primarily used for tsunamis. His concern was that people would hear the sirens and run toward the mountains to flee an imagined tsunami. In doing that, he claimed that the people would have run toward the alleged source of the fires.

When asked, Anday stated that he does not regret not sounding the alarms. He said:

The public is trained to seek higher ground in the event that the siren is sounded. Had we sounded the siren that night, we’re afraid that people would have gone mauka [meaning inland, or toward the mountainside]. And if that was the case, then they would have gone into the fire.

That statement is false. CNN reported:

Before Andaya’s resignation was announced, state Sen. Angus McKelvey – who represents Lahaina and lost his own home in the fires – blasted Andaya’s response as “insulting.”

“I’ve heard the line that ‘people would have panicked and ran up to the mountains because it’s a tsunami siren.’ … It’s insulting to think that people would be that clueless, that they wouldn’t know that sirens blasting was because of the fire,” McKelvey told CNN on Thursday.

“These are not tsunami sirens. They’re disaster sirens.”

There’s more! The Deputy Chief, Telecommunications Branch, State of Hawaii Emergency Management Agency, Ryan Hirae, during an interview on or about September 2020, stated the following:

In the state of Hawaii we have a statewide alert and warning system, which we also call SAWS. That involves not only the siren warning system, but as well as IPAWS. IPAWS is the integrated public alerts and warning system provided by FEMA. And that has the Emergency Alert System, also known as EAS. It also has Wireless Emergency Alerts, which are known as WEA. We also use sirens for hurricanes, brush fires, flooding, lava, hazmat conditions, or even a terrorist event. We have over 400 Sirens spread out through four counties. Our Sirens have a rating of 121 decibels. We have to visit each siren minimally once a year for preventive maintenance. Our role in the state of Hawaii in Emergency Management, especially telecommunications, is to prevent loss of life and to minimize property damage.

The State of Hawaii Emergency Management Agency website indicates that the sirens are part of a warning system for:

Hurricane
Flooding
Wildland Fire
Tsunami
Earthquake
Volcanic

So we now know that the sirens are, in fact, used to warn of fires. Andaya lied about why the sirens were not used. Indeed, every reason given by government officials for the sirens not sounding has been proven false. Why would government officials lie about such a thing? Because the real reason the alarms were not sounded was that government officials were behind the disaster. They owned the dog that didn’t bark.

The destruction of the city was planned to kill people in a single fell swoop using directed energy weapons. The sirens were not even considered by the perpetrators in planning their attack because there was no slow lumbering fire dancing from house to house for the sirens to warn people about. They activated the directed energy weapon, and the immolation of the city and the sirens immediately ensued. Most of the people were hit by surprise and killed instantly in their houses by the directed energy weapon. Notably, while 114 people have been confirmed dead, 1,000 people are still unaccounted for as of August 19, 2023, eleven days after the disaster. The dog didn’t bark because the master was the murderer.

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

 

Connect with Edward Hendrie

Cover image credit: web3525




The Global Uprising Against CBDCs Has Begun!

The Global Uprising Against CBDCs Has Begun!

by James Corbett, The Corbett Report
August 20, 2023

 

Stop the presses! Here’s my hot take for the day: CBDCs are a bad thing.

OK, maybe that take is not so hot. After all, I don’t even need to spell out “Central Bank Digital Currencies” for my well-informed, switched-on readers to know what I’m talking about when I refer to CBDCs. And the idea that a digital form of programmable money with a central banker’s on/off switch is a bad thing? Come on! Even the normiest of the normies can sense that.

But here’s the hot part of my hot take: CBDCs are deeply unpopular with the general public and we have a chance of stopping them in their tracks.

At first glance, you might not think this is such a controversial statement, but really think about it for a minute.

If you listen to the stenographers and presstitutes of the establishment dinosaur media, you’ll believe that CBDCs not only represent an exciting opportunity to bring our outdated paper money system into the digital age, but that they’ll be bestowed on us by the benevolent central banker technocrats in the next year or two (if we’re lucky!).

If you listen to the pundits in the alternative media, however, you’ll believe that CBDCs not only represent the greatest threat to human freedom in our lifetime, but that they’ll be forced upon us by the evil central bankster overlords in the next year or two (no matter what we do to fend them off).

Do you see the similarities in these two “competing” narratives? In both cases, you and your opinion about CBDCs are utterly irrelevant. It’s a fait accompli. You can love ’em or hate ’em, embrace them or recoil from them, but whatever your position, you will be forced to use them.

But this just isn’t true. In fact, we’re already seeing a massive global pushback against the CBDC agenda. And this pushback is already causing the banksters to panic and to pull back on their grand plan for world domination.

Of course you’re not hearing about this CBDC pushback in the establishment media. Why would they tout their masters’ failures, after all?

But, weirdly enough, you’re not hearing much about this pushback in the alt media either.

Let’s correct that today, shall we?

Global Pushback

As we all know, when globalists are looking for a population to test out their latest technology of enslavement, they turn to Africa. From genetic manipulation to vaccine experiments to agricultural “revolution,” there is no shortage of examples of pathocrats disguising their experiments in technocratic tyranny as philanthropic concern for the poor, beleaguered people of that continent. It’s hardly surprising, then, that Africa is once again serving as a laboratory for the latest globalist technocrat pet project: digital money.

Accordingly, Nigeria became one of the first nation’s in the world to adopt an official, national central bank digital currency when the Central Bank of Nigeria (CBN) launched the eNaira amid much fanfare in October 2021. Promoted with the slogan “Same Naira, more possibilities!” the bankster class collectively held its breath as it watched this trial run of digital money unfold before their eyes.

The early results of this experiment, however, were not promising for the money manipulators. Despite a massive push of the eNaira by the government and breathless coverage of its rollout in the establishment media, it was revealed one year after the digital currency’s launch that a mere 0.5% of the population—one in every 200 people—had actually used it.

Not to be dissuaded, the CBN imposed new banking regulations last December, limiting cash withdrawals from ATMs to just ₦20,000 ($45) per day in a bid to increase adoption of the nation’s CBDC.

The result? Again, utter failure. In fact, worse than utter failure. An actual uprising!

Nigerians took to the streets in February of this year to protest the cash restrictions and even attempted to storm the central bank.

CBN officials are now rearranging the deck chairs on the Titanic, upgrading the eNaira app to allow contactless payments, as if that was what was keeping people from using the banksters’ new digital enslavement tokens. But, try as they might to cover it up, the results of this experiment in monetary manipulation are now clearly visible for all to see. The eNaira is a failure of such gargantuan proportions that it now serves as a cautionary tale to central bankers around the world about how pear-shaped things can get when a digital currency is shoved down an unwilling public’s throat.

But it isn’t just Nigeria where people are saying “no, thanks” to the banksters’ digital money agenda.

In the European Union, protesters are already marching against the European Central Bank’s (ECB) proposed “digital euro.” In Croatia, for example, activists are warning that their government’s adoption of the euro “will be followed by the introduction of a digital euro, and then you will have to kiss all the freedoms you know goodbye.” In the Netherlands, meanwhile, demonstrators have staged rallies warning about the coming European CBDC and the ECB’s plan “to control the spending habits of the population.”

In Russia, too—where Putin has just signed the Central Bank of Russia’s “digital Ruble” into law as an official national currency—people are already threatening to go Nigerian on their government. Recent polls show that a mere 6% of Russians are actually excited about their opportunity to use the new CBDC. This widespread distrust of the digital Ruble is reflected in the coverage of the currency in the nation’s alternative news websites, which are filled with articles decrying the technocratic tyranny. One such article sums up the situation by noting that “we can only say that if citizens actively use non-cash transactions, then they themselves will enter the electronic banking concentration camp, seemingly completely voluntarily.”

And how about in the bastion of liberty, the beacon on the hill, the good ol’ US of A? Well, the grandstanding politicians—always eager to get in front of a parade and pretend they’re leading it—are already introducing (and even passing) legislation to ensure CBDCs never sees the light of day in America.

Of course, readers of this column will know that these political promises aren’t worth the paper they’re written on. Nevertheless, the proposed legislation is important because it reflects two underlying realities. Firstly, it demonstrates that the American public is not on board with the CBDC agenda. And secondly, it signals to the Fed and other central banksters that they risk upsetting their whole rigged monetary system if they push this agenda too far and too fast.

Banksters Running Scared

Yes, it’s safe to say that, on the CBDC issue at least, the momentum is not in the banksters’ favour. In fact, things are so bad that the establishment is now beginning to contemplate whether the mad dash toward CBDCs might just wake up the public to the whole monetary scam.

In a revealing op-ed in The Financial Times last month, Brookings Senior Fellow Eswar Prasad warned, “Central banks must not be blind to the threats posed by CBDCs.” After dutifully detailing all of the nifty features of programmable money that would-be world controllers can take advantage of (“imposing negative nominal interest rates to disincentivise saving,” for example), he then cautions the central banksters that their pretense of “political neutrality” might be exposed for the self-evident sham that it is if central banks start meddling in people’s everyday transactions.

Central banks could be viewed as political agents if their visibility into payment transactions is used for law enforcement or surveillance purposes. [. . .] Central banks already face threats to their independence, credibility and legitimacy. The more extensive the functionality of the money they issue, the greater the political pressures they will be exposed to. At a minimum, such innovations pose risks to the integrity of central bank money.

Oh, won’t somebody think of the central banksters’ credibility!?

And—wouldn’t ya know it?!—just as Prasad and others are beginning to warn that the banksters might be pushing too far and too fast with this whole “programmable money” idea, it looks like the monetary mafia are now stepping back from the CBDC brink . . . at least publicly.

Just this past week, the Central Bank of Colombia issued a white paper on the “Expected Macroeconomic Effects of Issuing a Retail CBDC,” which admits that if central banks push the cashless agenda too far and the situation “reaches a point where the use of cash is about to disappear, central bank money could lose its role as a monetary anchor for deposits and other forms of private money.” Also this past week, the Bank of Canada issued a report on “Unmet Payment Needs and a Central Bank Digital Currency,” which acknowledges that “consumers face few payment gaps or frictions and therefore might have relatively weak incentives to adopt and — especially — to use CBDC at scale.”

In other words, central bankers are quietly admitting there are no real advantages to retail CBDCs and there are even potential downsides to their introduction.

Of course, as my astute readers will already know, this does not mean that the issue is settled, that the bankers have given up, and that the CBDC dream is officially done. No, it just means that they have to change tack and try to find other ways to cajole the public into the digital gulag. Perhaps this is why the central banking minions are now openly strategizing about how best to sell their digital money agenda to an unwilling public.

Take the Bank of Israel, for example. It just released a new white paper purporting to identify “Principles for creating ‘Acceptance’ and ‘Network Effect’ for the Digital Shekel,” or, in plain English: “Ways to convince the rubes to use our virtual slave coins.” The document considers ideas for leveraging the “Network Effect” to artificially stimulate adoption of the digital shekel. Naturally, the plan does not focus on ways to incentivize the use of CBDCs but rather on ways to enforce their acceptance, including obligating banks, payment providers and merchants to participate in the scheme or forcing the government to officially declare the digital shekel to be legal tender.

On its face, the fact that the banksters are now openly plotting how best to stuff digital money down the public’s throat may be a worrying development.

But, upon further reflection, the fact that the banksters are now turning from the carrots of incentives and bonuses and discounts to the stick of government regulation and enforced adoption does not mean that the anti-CBDC movement is doomed to failure.

On the contrary. That the banksters are now actively engaged in a struggle against the general public is a sign that we are winning and that CBDCs are not inevitable.

Resistance is Fertile

I’ve made the point before, but it bears repeating: the constant stream of propaganda, conditioning and censorship that we are subjected to from governments, establishment institutions and their lapdog media is not a sign of their strength. It is a sign of their weakness.

The fact that they have to spend billions of dollars a year pumping lies and misinformation into the heads of the citizenry in order to keep people from seeing the truth is a tacit admission that our thoughts and opinions actually do matter. After all, why would they bother propagandizing to us at all if they didn’t require our approval (or at least our docile apathy) to continue pursuing their agenda?

Similarly, the fact that the banksters are ramping up the next stage of their CBDC indoctrination operation—attempting to convince an increasingly skeptical public that a complete overhaul of the fabric of our monetary reality is somehow beneficial to Joe Sixpack and Jane Soccermom—is a tacit admission that we are the ones who decide whether CBDCs are implemented or not. They can tout the benefits of their digital slave tokens all they want, but if we refuse to use them, then the CBDC world order will not come to fruition.

The banksters, for one, are well aware of this fact. But are we aware of it?

I understand why this message—that pushback and protest do matter and that the globalist agenda is not inevitable—is such an unpopular one in the “alternative” media. If the message is simply: “Relax, everyone! The battle is over and CBDCs have been defeated! Now go back to sleep!” then it is indeed no different from enemy propaganda.

But that is not the message here. Instead, the message is that the public is—for the time being and until the propaganda machine kicks into high gear—overwhelmingly on our side. People DO NOT WANT programmable money and the vast majority see it for what it is: another trick on the part of the establishment to take more power and control away from every day people and put it in the hands of the banksters and their cronies.

That’s why this is the time to seize the momentum of public opinion and steer it into actual productive activity. We can encourage Cash Friday awareness. We can build up local trading communities based on alternative and complementary currencies. We can introduce those around us to Agorist.Market. We can promote community currencies and precious metals and decentralized cryptos and barter circles and the million other forms of survival currency that clued-in Corbetteers have been researching for years.

The time has come to harvest those seeds you’ve been planting! The public is on our side!

Yes, your resistance and pushback do matter. It does make a difference. We do have a part to play in this. Now, let’s go out there and put the final nail in the CBDC coffin.

What are we waiting for?

 

This weekly editorial is part of The Corbett Report Subscriber newsletter. To support The Corbett Report and to access the full newsletter, please sign up to become a member of the website.

 

Connect with James Corbett




Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

Lahaina Is Within 40 Miles of a U.S. Government Directed Energy Facility on Maui

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 20, 2023

 

In my August 11, 2023, article, I explained the evidence that a directed energy weapon was used to destroy Lahaina, a city on the Island of Maui in Hawaii. The only culprit who could possibly have used such a weapon is the U.S. Military. The cover story for the destruction of Lahaina was that out-of-control wildfires caused it. Indeed, Major General Kenneth Hara, the commanding general of the Hawaii Army National Guard, gave the world the wildfire cover story during an August 9, 2023, briefing. One would think that the head of the Maui Emergency Management Agency, Herman Andaya, would be the proper source of information about the alleged wildfires.

But, strangely, Herman Andaya was not even present in Maui at the time of the destruction of Lahaina. Administrator Andaya was absent in the days following the conflagration in Lahaina. Where was he? According to local news, Hawaii News Now, “Andaya was in Waikiki at the Alohilani Resort attending what was scheduled to be a three-day FEMA disaster preparedness seminar called the Pacific Partnership Meeting.” Oddly, the conference did not start until the morning of August 8, 2023, after the destruction of Lahaina was well underway and well known. Yet, Andaya remained at the conference during the first day of the disaster, and records show that he did not check out from his hotel until August 9, 2023.

Another odd thing about the fires was that the emergency alert system of sirens was not implemented after the destruction began. Someone other than Andaya made the decision not to warn the populace. That failure caused many to die needlessly. Andaya subsequently resigned on August 17, 2023, after his alleged dereliction became publically known.

Back to General Hara: while he is not an expert in emergency management, he is an expert in military armaments. It just so happens that Maui is the location for one of two major sites for the Air Force Research Laboratory (AFLR) Directed Energy Directorate. The other major location is Kirkland Air Force Base in New Mexico. You read that correctly; within 40 miles of Lahaina on the Island of Maui is located the Air Force Maui Optical and Supercomputing (AMOS) site, which is part of the AFLR Directed Energy Directorate. The AFLR states “the Directorate develops and transitions technologies in four core technical competencies: laser systems, high power electromagnetics, weapons modeling and simulation, and directed energy and electro-optics for space superiority.”</span

One of the products under study on Maui by the AFLRE uses “laser propagation through the Earth’s atmosphere.” So powerful is the directed energy technology that AMOS states it “has the ability to propagate light into the sodium layer of the atmosphere and create an artificial star.” AMOS further states that the “state-of-the-art electro-optical facility, the MSSS combines research and development with an operational mission; the only one of its kind in the world.”

Also located at the 10,023 foot-summit of Haleakala on the island of Maui, Hawaii, is the 15th Space Surveillance Squadron (15 SPSS). “The mission of 15 SPSS is to develop, assess, deliver, and operate cutting-edge SDA [Space Domain Awareness] capabilities to support warfighter needs.” The 15 SPSS also operates the experimental systems under the AFRL “15 SPSS is a component of Space Delta 2 and also operates experimental systems under the Air Force Research Laboratory [AFRL].” The Directed Energy Directorate is a component department of the AFRL with expertise in directed energy. That means that the 15 SPSS operates the AFRL experimental directed energy weapons. And it does so from the summit of Haleakala overlooking Maui. Haleakala is the perfect location to control directed energy weapons targeting Lahaina.

Picture of the Maui Space Surveillance facility atop Haleakala shooting a sodium guidestar posted on the AFRL website

Apparently, Lahaina became a target of one of the AFLR’s directed energy “operational missions” on August 8, 2023. Administrator Andaya took the fall for the death and destruction caused by a U.S. military operation against its citizens. The people are being led to believe that the death and destruction were exacerbated by incompetence. That way, they are kept from the reality that the destruction of Lahaina was premeditated mass genocide orchestrated by its own government.

It is notable that U.S. President Biden, the Commander in Chief of the U.S. Armed Forces, was utterly silent about the conflagration. The media did not even have an opportunity to ask him about it until Sunday, August 13, 2023, at which time he responded with “no comment.” Think about that for a moment. An entire city is destroyed, and the media does not even have access to the President of the United States to ask him about it until five days later.

And President Biden’s response is an incriminating “no comment!” Instagram influencer Rogan O’Handley wrote on Twitter that the more we learn about Hawaii, ‘the more we learn why Joe Biden has consistently responded with ‘no comment.’ He stated the obvious: ‘There is something REAL fishy going on here.”

How did the words “no comment” come out of his mouth? Who, President or not, responds to a tragedy with “no comment?” I will tell you who. A person who is part of the conspiracy that committed the tragedy. That is the kind of statement made by someone guilty of a crime! President Biden repeatedly refused to answer any questions about the Lahaina tragedy. On August 19, 2023, the White House officially announced that the President would visit Maui on Monday, August 21, 2023.

The Lahaina disaster has many parallels with the 9/11 attacks. Notably, Administrator Andaya was attending a three-day FEMA disaster preparedness seminar at the time a real disaster was taking place. In like manner, on 9/11 there were also several military drills involving hijacked airplanes while the actual 9/11 attacks took place. Three of the military exercises were called Northern Vigilance, Vigilant Warrior, and Vigilant Guardian. Rather suspiciously, the scenarios matched almost exactly the story of the alleged highjacked airplane attacks on 9/11.

 9/11 War Games by James Corbett

Stanley Hilton, former chief of staff to Senator Robert Dole, represents over 400 plaintiffs in a seven billion dollar class action lawsuit against President George Bush, Vice President Richard Cheney, National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice, Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, FBI Director Robert Mueller, and others in high government office, alleging that they planned and orchestrated the 9/11 attacks. The lawsuit was dismissed in 2004. The federal district judge ruled that the President and his subordinates enjoyed sovereign immunity from what the court described as a “non-justiciable political question.”

Mr. Hilton has documentary proof and eyewitnesses that President George Bush personally ordered the 9/11 attacks. Furthermore, he has eyewitnesses and documentary evidence that the U.S. Air Force and NORAD conducted 35 drills over the two months prior to 9-11-01 rehearsing attacks by airliners against various targets, including specific drills where the World Trade Center was to be the target of attacks by airplanes.

In fact, on 9-11-01 there were five drills being conducted by NORAD and the Air Force involving attacks by commercial airliners. The 35 rehearsals by the U.S. Government for attacks by airliners impeaches the credibility of National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice, who said during a May 16, 2002 press briefing: “I don’t think anybody could have predicted that these people would take an airplane and slam it into the World Trade Center, take another one and slam it into the Pentagon; that they would try to use an airplane as a missile, a hijacked airplane as a missile.” Why would she say such a thing when it is so clearly false? Because she did not think that anyone would ever find out about the prior rehearsals. Now that the rehearsals have leaked out the conspirators had a problem. But that was all taken care of by the district court judge who ruled that the administrative officials had sovereign immunity.

Lahaina has all the earmarks of a directed energy attack, just as was done on 9/11. For more information about directed energy use during the 9/11 attacks read 9/11 – Enemies Foreign and Domestic.

 

Connect with Edward Hendrie

Cover image credit: Wtp22
Lahaina burning during the night of August the 8th, from Wailea.

 


See Related:




Dane Wigington With Greg Hunter: Lahaina Incineration Is Deadly Weather Warfare

Dane Wigington With Greg Hunter: Lahaina Incineration Is Deadly Weather Warfare

by Greg Hunter, USAWatchdog
August 19, 2023

Climate engineering researcher Dane Wigington says the total incineration of Lahaina in Hawaii was caused by man-made weather modification called geoengineering. Wigington says this is really an attack using “weather warfare.”

According to Wigington, they used climate engineering to create a “wind tunnel effect right over Lahaina” with wind speeds up to 100 miles per hour to superheat the fire.

Wigington explains, “This creates a bellows effect, and that escalates temperatures exponentially over what they would have otherwise been. They have been melting steel around the world by exactly that manner for thousands of years by feeding air in. That’s the bellows effect.

“This is the same as an acetylene torch. If you burn just the acetylene, you have 1,500 degrees. When you add oxygen, now you get 6,000 degrees. People are not considering this. They don’t need Directed Energy Weapons (DEWs). . . .

“There is a 140-page U.S. military document that we found and posted at GeoEngineeringWatch.org. It is titled ‘Wildfires as a Military Weapon.’

“It describes surface preparation . . . prior to their commencement of the surface firestorm incineration. That’s exactly what we saw in that region of Hawaii. . . .

“We cannot prove the source of ignition in Lahaina, but what we can say is the template for this event to happen cannot be separated from climate engineering operations.”

Wigington says weird and deadly weather events are going to intensify.

Wigington points out millions of acres are burning in Northern Canada, while California and the Western U.S. brace for a huge hurricane coming from the Pacific Ocean. It looks like somebody wanted Lahaina burned to the ground no matter how many people had to die.

Wigington contends, “We have the disaster capitalists trying to profit off any cataclysm, but I would argue the stakes are much, much more grave. These people know that the planet’s life support system is failing.

“They should know because they are a party to bringing us to this dark place. There are much bigger powers in play. . . .Climate engineering is a covert weapon because they can bring populations to their knees without the population ever realizing they are under assault.

“They mire populations in difficulty, and that makes them easier to control. . . . Climate engineering is far to dignified a term. This is weather warfare.

“We at GeoEngineeringWatch.org are focused on the biggest hole in the bottom of the boat. Whatever people are worried about, political theater or whatever concern they have, none of it will matter if we continue on the current course.

“I mean, in the very near term, none of it will matter.”

Wigington says more and more people are waking up to the dire problems that weather engineering is causing. If there is a critical mass of awakening, many lives could be saved, and at least part of the planet’s life support system can be salvaged.

Wigington says, “It’s far easier to kill a million people that to control them. The U.S. population especially is a rapidly increasing liability to those in power. Many U.S. citizens are armed, and they are not happy about what’s going on.

“Those in power don’t want to get to a point that these citizens take to the street with their proverbial pitchforks and torches looking for them. So, they are going to debilitate, control and reduce that population as fast as they can. Anyone who can’t see that at this point has their eyes wide shut. So, of course, they are using weather as a weapon. Why wouldn’t they?”

There is much more in the 55-minute interview.

Join Greg Hunter of USAWatchdog.com as he goes One-on-One with climate researcher Dane Wigington, founder of GeoEngineeringWatch.org for 8.19.23.

 

Connect with Greg Hunter

Cover image credit: US Dept of Homeland Security
A cadaver dog with FEMA urban search and rescue searches a Lahaina neighborhood


See Related:

Wildfires As a Weapon: US Military Exposed




The Only ‘National Defense’ Needed in This Country, Is Defense Against the Real Enemy: The Ruling Class and the U.S. Government

The Only ‘National Defense’ Needed in This Country, Is Defense Against the Real Enemy: The Ruling Class and the U.S. Government

by Gary D. Barnett
August 18, 2023

 

“I believe that all government is evil, and that trying to improve it is largely a waste of time.”

~ H.L. Mencken

Throughout our history, and today, little, if any defense of this country or its people, has been necessary or warranted. The true enemy of the people of America is, and has always been, its own government.

The real enemies are most all the politicians, regardless of party, the courts, the CIA, the NSA, the FBI, the IRS, the entire military industrial complex, and in general, the federal and state police forces. In other words, all the ruling class and it pawns in government, its enforcers, and all their institutions and bureaucracies, are the real threat to this populace and its natural freedoms.

The ludicrous notion of national defense, and that government forces actually “defend the country,” is an outright lie; propagandized by the State and its mouthpieces in media, simply as a way to gain great power in order to own and control society.

Many will take offence to these statements, mostly due to the fact that since birth, they have been inundated and indoctrinated by false ‘authority’ figures, to believe that they cannot survive and prosper without restrictive laws and rule, and worthless government schooling, all kept in check by severe coercive State prosecution.

They are taught (schooled) to abandon their individuality in favor of the so-called ‘greater good’ of a collective society, to depend on and trust others in power to protect and sustain them and their families throughout their lives. This breeds only ignorance and passivity in the face of State terror.

Independence, a supposed hallmark of this nation-state and its residents, is literally vilified, and even prohibited in many instances, causing personal sovereignty to be discarded in the name of unified slavery.

We live in a country that has warred aggressively against fictitious enemies, meaning without cause or necessity, more than any other country on earth.

It is stated, and supported, that the United States has been at war for at least 93% of its entire existence. I firmly believe this number to be much higher, and with proper consideration, it is likely closer to 100%.

If one is to determine the actual damage done, the actual harm due to direct war, proxy war, what is insanely considered ‘collateral damage,’ what is the horrid long term cost to human life in the aftermath of this terror, the total number of causalities, including the dead, would be tens if not hundreds of millions of innocent people.

But what is sold to the wrongly named ‘public, is that this country is and has been the savior of ‘democracy,’ a completely evil and failed ideology, which is a gross lie beyond the imagination of any sane and thinking human being.

Yes, the truth hurts, but without acceptance of truth, what is left is a deceitful lie; a manufactured myth so atrocious as to have caused an entire nation’s abhorrent and hostile policies to be supported by the masses to such an extent, as to have caused the most broad-based, aggressive, and egregious destruction of humanity in history. This should be the epitaph upon the death of this empire.

At this time in our lives, aggressive war by this government and all who support its heinous deeds, has graduated from its main objective of slaughtering innocent men, women, and children, in addition to the other devastation, in other countries most everywhere on earth, to include the entirety of this country’s population as well.

The major war currently is against all of us who live and work in the U.S. by those who continue to claim to be our protectors. This contradiction is absurd, but is still little understood by the average American, as can be evidenced by the terroristic treatment inflicted, and with little if any resistance, on this society these past few years.

At a time when this country and the world are steeped in madness and hate, more and more atrocities continue to take place, with almost zero empathy evident by the political class.

The last evil ‘ruler,’ just one among all, ‘chosen’ by the ‘people,’ was Biden, and this was his response to the State’s complicit murder of those in Lahaina just recently, after a very suspicious and devastating fire had destroyed an entire town and its residents.

He had the audacity to offer these poor people who lost everything, including many family members, a one-time $700 payment per household. This was in the midst of giving over $200 million more to Ukraine’s political criminals recently, with plans to give many more billions; this after more than $113 billion has already been paid to enrich the newly rich politicians in Ukraine. (Apparently, blackmail garners payment more than actual need of Americans.)

This alone should be enough for everyone in this country to grasp how little this government cares about its own, and how worthless all in the governing system have become. To depend on, or trust this scum to defend you from harm, is asinine beyond explanation.

Who will defend you from harm? Who will defend you from foreign invasion, although that has never once happened in this country’s history, not even including the pre-planned setup called the Pearl Harbor attack? Who will defend you from hyper-inflation and the resulting extreme prices for goods? Who will defend you from mass censorship and constant surveillance? Who will defend you from food shortages, energy shutdowns, and extensive restrictions on all transactions and travel? Who will defend your children from the consuming perversion being forced on them at every opportunity with this government’s blessing? Who will defend you from aggression and tyranny? Who will defend you from yourself?

It will never be the evil State that defends you, nor will it be its ‘national defense systems,’ its enforcers in the military and police, the politicians, the banking cartels, the large corporate monsters, or any government at any level.

There is only one legitimate defense, and that is self-defense.

Only you, each of you, has the ability and desire to defend himself. No other and no State entity can or will ever be your savior.  Until that is accepted, expect total serfdom to become your voluntarily accepted way of life.

Much more tyranny is coming. Lockdowns, fake ‘viruses,’ bioweapons, threats and totalitarian measures based on bogus ‘climate change, central bank digital currency, social credit restrictions, more inflation, destruction of money, health mandates, curfews, travel shutdowns, food shortages, transhuman promotion, among many other atrocities, including perpetual war.

National defense is an outright lie, and can never protect you, it can only harm you. There is but one enemy, and that enemy is the State!

There is but one defense against this demon called government, and that is when individuals, or individuals working together en masse, abolish all rule. The responsibility for you is you, and any dependence on government whatsoever can only lead to despair, hopelessness, disaster, and enslavement. Defend yourself from this evil State, and break the chains that bind you.

“Every government is run by liars. Nothing they say should be believed.”

~ I.F. Stone

 

Reference links:

America’s perpetual wars of aggression

What the media won’t tell you about the Maui fires

 

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: kirillslov




Mass Murder and the West Maui Land Grab

Mass Murder and the West Maui Land Grab
Maui will either be a major milestone for the ruling class, or a line in the sand for we the people.

by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
August 18, 2023

 



The blame for the destruction of West Maui is falling upon Hawaiian Electric who knew as early as four years ago that there was a risk of fire due to their own negligence of maintaining power lines. But did nothing.

Hawaiian Electric, who is owned by Vanguard and BlackRock, has been shifting their focus to clean energy. But in order to Build Back Better, they must first destroy the old system. And so the power was left on to feed the fires.

The outdoor siren warning system on Maui is one of the most advanced and maintained warning systems on Earth. Residents are accustomed to monthly tests and on the day of the fire, no sirens went off.

The director in charge of this warning system was at a FEMA disaster seminar in Oahu as the fires were devastating the people of Maui.

When asked if he regretted not sounding the alarm, he said no. Because he was worried that the people would run into the fire.

But instead, they burned to death. Including an untold number of children who were home alone that morning because of a school cancellation.

The water wasn’t on. Fire hydrants were dry. And the Deputy Director of Water Resource Management, who was named an Obama Foundation Leader, refused to release water for the west Maui fires until it was too late. He says that in order to share water, Hawaiians need to discuss equity.

Without any warnings and without any water, the people tried to flee. But they were stopped by the police who had orders to keep people from escaping.

The Maui chief of police, John Pelletier, was the incident officer at one of the biggest cover-up operations in US history; the 2017 Las Vegas shootings.

Residents are not allowed to leave unless they get a permission slip from the federal government. But the government recently decided to shut that option down.

While the fires burned, a book was published about the entire event. The book blamed climate change and was written by a Dr Miles Stones. The definition of milestone is; an action or event marking a significant change or stage in development.

Hawaii is being usurped by the same billionaires pushing for the World Economic Forum’s Great Reset. They have been planning on turning Maui into a test bed for their Artificial Intelligence Smart Grid. But the people were in their way, so they burned them out.

Maui will either be a major milestone for the ruling class, or a line in the sand for we the people.

The federal government offers a one-time payment of seven hundred dollars to each family that has lost their home. And the Governor of Hawaii tells reporters that the state plans on acquiring the land.

And if it wasn’t for the local community, the survivors would be left alone to die in the ashes of their neighbors.

 

Connect with The Reese Report




Multi-Billion Dollar “Direct Energy Weapons (DEW)” Market, for Military and “Civilian Use” (?). Were DEWs Used in Hawaii?

Multi-Billion Dollar “Direct Energy Weapons (DEW)” Market, for Military and “Civilian Use” (?). Were DEWs Used in Hawaii?

by  Prof Michel Chossudovsky, Global Research
August 17, 2023

 

Directed Energy Weapons (DEW) constitute a buoyant $5.3 Billion dollar business (2022) which is slated to increase to $12.9 Billon dollars by 2027. This profit-driven military-industrial market is dominated by six “Defense Contractors” including Raytheon, Northrup Grunman, BAE Systems (plc), Boeing, Lockheed Martin and L3Harris Technologies.

According to Raytheon:

 “The development of directed energy (DE) technology is used to counter the drone threat”.

While DEWs are largely intended for military use, so-called “non lethal” and/or “less lethal” Direct Energy Weapons are  envisaged for so-called “Homeland Security applications”. 

The Evidence: Were Direct Energy Weapons Used in Hawaii?

Images confirm the extent and nature of devastation and destruction. (see videos below). 

They also suggest that the damage incurred was not attributable to “natural causes”. 

The evidence suggests that Direct Energy Weapons (DEW) may have been used (yet to be fully ascertained) and that the acts of destruction were deliberate.

Video: Houses are Targeted? Green Trees Remain Untouched



Note the above CBS report points to “A Wildfire Disaster”.

Thousands of families have lost their homes, burnt to the ground. The devastating impacts resulting from possible DEW attacks are not mentioned. The official statements point to “Natural Causes”:

Can you imagine calling up a family that has just seen their home burn to the ground and offering to buy their land for below market value?

This is apparently happening in Hawaii right now on a massive scale.”  

Michael Snyder, (August 17, 2023)

***

Among the six private companies of the military industrial complex, Raytheon and BAE Systems are also involved in ENMOD technologies on behalf of the U.S. Air Force.

There is a flourishing international market. DEWs are exported Worldwide.

The usage for so-called “Homeland Security applications” includes “non-lethal” civilian applications including Airport protection, riot controls, protection of infrastructure (see below).

A Citizens’ Criminal Investigation?

Are these so-called “non-lethal or “less lethal” DEWs available for acquisition or purchase by private sector and/or governmental entities?

A citizens’ investigation is required to establish what is behind this devastating process of destruction in Hawaii and in various  parts of America.

Our thoughts today are with the people of Hawaii.

Below is an examination of the Direct Energy Weapons Market by:

Marketandmarkets.com

click image below to access the complete document:

 

Connect with Global Research

Cover image credit: US National Guard
Combined Joint Task Force 50 (CJTF-50) search, rescue and recovery elements conduct search operations of areas damaged by wildfires in Lahaina, Maui, Aug. 15, 2023. Members of CJTF-50 from the Hawaii Army and Air National Guard, U.S. Army Active Duty and Reserve are actively supporting Maui County authorities to provide immediate security, safety, and well-being to those affected by the wildfires to ensure unwavering support for the community of Maui and first responders. (U.S. Army National Guard photo by Staff Sgt. Matthew A. Foster)




Glyphosate: Cancer and Other Health Concerns

Glyphosate: Cancer and Other Health Concerns

by Stacy Malkan, U.S. Right to Know
July 21, 2023

 

Glyphosate, a synthetic herbicide patented in 1974 by the Monsanto Company and now manufactured and sold by many companies in hundreds of products, has been associated with cancer and many other health concerns discussed in this fact sheet. Glyphosate is best known as the active ingredient in Roundup-branded herbicides, and the herbicide used with “Roundup Ready” genetically modified organisms (GMOs).

Herbicide tolerance is the most prevalent GMO trait engineered into food crops, with some 90% of corn and 94% of soybeans in the U.S. genetically engineered to tolerate herbicides, according to USDA data. A 2017 study found that Americans’ exposure to glyphosate grew by about 500 percent since Roundup Ready GMO crops were introduced in the U.S in 1996.

Why is Bayer taking glyphosate off the U.S. consumer market?

In July 2021, Monsanto owner Bayer AG said it would remove glyphosate-based herbicides from the U.S. consumer market by 2023 due to litigation. More than 100,000 people are suing Bayer alleging they developed non-Hodgkin lymphoma from exposure to the company’s glyphosate herbicides, such as Roundup. We are posting documents released via discovery on our Monsanto Papers page.

Glyphosate will still be used in large quantities in agriculture in the U.S. Reformulated versions of Roundup brand herbicides without glyphosate will also remain on the market, but may contain other chemicals of concern. For example, one of the active ingredients in “Roundup for Lawns” is dicamba, a chemical that can damage non-target plants and crops.

How much glyphosate is used around the world?

According to a February 2016 study, glyphosate is the most widely used agricultural chemical: “In the U.S., no pesticide has come remotely close to such intensive and widespread use.” Findings include:

  • Americans applied 1.8 million tons of glyphosate (or 1.6 billion kilograms) from its introduction in 1974 to 2014.
  • Worldwide, 9.5 million tons (or 8.6 billion kilograms) of the chemical has been sprayed on fields —enough to spray nearly half a pound of Roundup on every cultivated acre of land in the world.
  • Glyphosate use has risen almost 15-fold since Roundup Ready GMO crops (genetically engineered to tolerate glyphosate) were introduced in the mid 1990s.

In the U.S., approximately 281 million pounds of glyphosate were applied to 298 million acres annually, on average, from 2012 to 2016, according to the Environmental Protection Agency. The most glyphosate was applied to soybean (117.4 million pounds annually), corn (94.9 million pounds annually), and cotton (20 million pounds annually). Many citrus fruits, including grapefruit, oranges and lemons, and field crops such as soybeans, corn and cotton have high percentages of their acres treated with glyphosate.

What do scientists and health care providers say about glyphosate?

Many scientists, health care professionals and public interest groups have raised concern about the health impacts of glyphosate. Here are some key statements:

Monsanto owner Bayer AG maintains that glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides are safe when used as directed and do not cause cancer. “Glyphosate is one of the most studied herbicides in the world – and, like all crop protection products, it is subject to rigorous testing and oversight by regulatory authorities,” Bayer states on its website. “There is an extensive body of research on glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides… that confirm that glyphosate and our glyphosate-based formulated products can be used safely and do not cause cancer.”

Internal Monsanto documents, investigative journalism and independent research have established that Monsanto used many tactics over decades to manipulate the scientific record on glyphosate and that regulatory agencies relied on poorly conducted studies and insufficient data.

How much glyphosate is in our bodies?

More than 80% of urine samples drawn from children and adults in a U.S. health study contained glyphosate, according to the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Out of 2,310 urine samples taken from Americans intended to be representative of the population, CDC found that 1,885 contained detectable levels of glyphosate. Scientists described this finding as “disturbing” and “concerning.”

2017 study in JAMA found that Americans’ exposure to glyphosate increased approximately 500 percent since Roundup Ready GMO crops were introduced in 1996.

While it is clear that most Americans are being exposed to glyphosate, the literature on glyphosate exposure levels, especially in children, remains limited, according to a 2020 paper in Environmental Health. “Without more data collected in a standardized way, parsing out the potential relationship between glyphosate exposure and disease will not be possible,” the researchers concluded.

Why are corporate studies a problem?

Regulators in Europe and the United States, Canada and elsewhere have repeatedly affirmed the corporate assertions of glyphosate safety. In making determinations about safety, these regulators have relied in part on tests that are conducted by or for the companies that have not been published or peer reviewed.

The corporate studies have long been kept secret, even by regulators. But in Europe, litigation by a group of European Parliament lawmakers led to the release of dozens of such studies. More than 50 of those corporate studies were analyzed in 2021 by independent scientists from the Institute of Cancer Research, Department of Medicine at the Medical University of Vienna, Armen Nersesyan and Siegfried Knasmueller.

Their goal was to determine if the industry studies comply with current international guidelines for chemical testing.  The researchers concluded that the bulk of the industry studies were outdated and did not meet current guidelines. An array of shortcomings and flaws were found in the studies, rendering most of them unreliable. Of the 53 studies submitted to regulators by the companies, only two were acceptable under current internationally recognized scientific standards, Knasmueller said.

Glyphosate and cancer: What do scientific and regulatory agencies say?

The scientific literature and regulatory conclusions regarding cancer links to glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides show a mix of findings, making the safety of the herbicide a hotly debated subject.

In 2015, the World Health Organization’s International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) classified  glyphosate as “probably carcinogenic to humans” after reviewing years of published and peer-reviewed scientific studies. The team of international scientists found there was a particular association between glyphosate and non-Hodgkin lymphoma.

U.S. agencies: At the time of the IARC classification, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) was conducting a registration review. The EPA’s Cancer Assessment Review Committee (CARC) issued a report in 2016 concluding that glyphosate was “not likely to be carcinogenic to humans” at doses relevant to human health. In December 2016, the EPA convened a Scientific Advisory Panel to review the report; members were divided in their assessment of EPA’s work, with some finding the EPA erred in how it evaluated certain research. Additionally, the EPA’s Office of Research and Development determined that EPA’s Office of Pesticide Programs had not followed proper protocols in its evaluation of glyphosate, and said the evidence could be deemed to support a “likely” carcinogenic or “suggestive” evidence of carcinogenicity classification. Nevertheless the EPA issued a draft report on glyphosate in December 2017 continuing to hold that the chemical is not likely to be carcinogenic. In April 2019, the EPA reaffirmed its position that glyphosate poses no risk to public health. But earlier that same month, the U.S. Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry (ATSDR) reported links between glyphosate and cancer: “numerous studies reported risk ratios greater than one for associations between glyphosate exposure and risk of non-Hodgkin’s lymphoma or multiple myeloma,” the report said.

The EPA issued an Interim Registration Review Decision in January 2020 with updated information about its position on glyphosate, continuing to hold the position that glyphosate is unlikely to cause cancer. In June 2022, the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals rejected EPA’s decision. EPA withdrew its interim decision in September 2022 and the agency will start over in its review.

European Union: The European Food Safety Authority and the European Chemicals Agency have said glyphosate is not likely to be carcinogenic to humans. A March 2017 report by environmental and consumer groups argued that regulators relied improperly on research that was directed and manipulated by the chemical industry. A 2019 study found that Germany’s Federal Institute for Risk Assessment report on glyphosate, which found no cancer risk, included sections of text that had been plagiarized from Monsanto studies. In February 2020, reports surfaced that 24 scientific studies submitted to the German regulators to prove the safety of glyphosate came from a large German laboratory that has been accused of fraud and other wrongdoing.

In June 2021, the European Union’s (EU) Assessment Group on Glyphosate (AGG) issued an 11,000-page draft report concluding that glyphosate is safe when used as directed and does not cause cancer. The finding is based in part on a dossier of roughly 1,500 studies submitted to European regulators by the “Glyphosate Renewal Group (GRG),” a collection of companies that includes Monsanto owner Bayer AG. The companies are seeking the renewal of the EU authorization of glyphosate. Current authorization in Europe expires in 2023.

WHO/FAO Joint Meeting on Pesticide Residues  determined in 2016 that glyphosate was unlikely to pose a carcinogenic risk to humans from exposure through the diet, but this finding was tarnished by conflict of interest concerns after it came to light that the chair and co-chair of the group also held leadership positions with the International Life Sciences Institute, a group funded in part by Monsanto and one of its lobbying organizations.

California OEHHA: In March 2017, the California Environmental Protection Agency’s Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment confirmed it would add glyphosate to California’s Proposition 65 list of chemicals known to cause cancer. Monsanto sued to block the action but the case was dismissed. In a separate case, the court found that California could not require cancer warnings for products containing glyphosate. On June 12, 2018, a U.S. District Court denied the California Attorney General’s request for the court to reconsider the decision. The court found that California could only require commercial speech that disclosed “purely factual and uncontroversial information,” and the science surrounding glyphosate carcinogenicity was not proven.

Agricultural Health Study: A long-running U.S. government-backed prospective cohort study of farm families in Iowa and North Carolina has not found any connections between glyphosate use and non-Hodgkin lymphoma, but the researchers reported that “among applicators in the highest exposure quartile, there was an increased risk of acute myeloid leukemia (AML) compared with never users…” The most recent published update to the study was made public in late 2017.

What health problems are linked to glyphosate exposure?
Cancer

July 2023 study in Chemosphere: Researchers from the University of California, Berkeley, conducted a systematic review of mechanistic studies on glyphosate and glyphosate-based formulations to evaluate them for the 10 key characteristics of cancer hazard identification. Data analysis revealed “strong evidence” for five of the key characteristics of carcinogenicity. An in-depth analyses of genotoxicity and endocrine disruption revealed “strong and consistent positive findings.” The researchers wrote, “Our findings strengthen the mechanistic evidence that glyphosate is a probable human carcinogen and provide biological plausibility for previously reported cancer associations in humans, such as non-Hodgkin lymphoma.”

March 2023 Leukemia and Lymphoma journal: Pooled study of three case-control studies found statistically significant increased risk and confirmed an association between Non-Hodgkin Lymphoma (NHL), including sub type hairy cell leukemia, and exposure to certain herbicides including glyphosate.

A February 2020 paper in Environmental Health presents a comprehensive review of chronic exposure animal carcinogenicity studies of glyphosate. It reports toxicologically plausible pathways for why glyphosate may cause various cancers in rodents.

In April 2019, the U.S. Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry issued its draft toxicological profile for  glyphosate, reporting an increased cancer risk from glyphosate exposures. Emails released via court proceedings show officials at EPA and Monsanto tried to hinder the ATSDR report. (The ATSDR profile is now final, and raises concerns about cancer.)

March 2019 study published in the International Journal of Epidemiology analyzed data from more than 30,000 farmers and agricultural workers from studies done in France, Norway and the U.S., and reported links between glyphosate and diffuse large B-cell lymphoma.

February 2019 meta analysis in Mutation Research/Reviews in Mutation Research reports a “compelling link” between glyphosate-based herbicides and non-Hodgkin lymphoma. Three of the study authors were members of the EPA’s scientific advisory panel on glyphosate who have stated publicly that the EPA failed to follow proper scientific practices in its glyphosate assessment.

A January 2019 analysis in Environmental Sciences Europe argues that the U.S. EPA’s classification of glyphosate disregarded substantial scientific evidence of genotoxicity the negative impact on a cell’s genetic material) associated with weed killing products such as Roundup.

For an analysis released in July 2021, researchers from the University of Vienna analyzed 53 glyphosate studies submitted to regulators by pesticide companies found that most of the studies do not comply with modern international standards for scientific rigor, and lack the types of tests most able to detect cancer risks. The same researchers reported in November 2021 that only two of the 11 studies Monsanto submitted to EU regulators were deemed “reliable.”

In June 2022, the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals rejected EPA’s decision that glyphosate likely poses no “unreasonable risk” to the environment and human health. In September 2022 the U.S. EPA withdrew its interim decision on glyphosate.

Endocrine disruption, fertility and reproductive concerns

July 2023 study in Environmental Pollution investigated the potential effects of low levels of glyphosate exposure from weaning to adult life in male Wistar rats on hypothalamic-pituitary-thyroid (HPT) axis function. Various changes suggest that glyphosate “may affect several steps of HPT axis regulation at the transcriptional level in an age-dependent manner and alter the morphometric parameters of the thyroid gland and TH synthesis, with potential repercussions in the TH-target organs.”

November 2022 paper in the Review of Economic Studies discusses glyphosate exposure and birth outcomes of populations surrounding GMO soy growing regions in Brazil. “We document a significant deterioration in birth outcomes for populations downstream from locations that are likely to have increased relatively more the use of glyphosate … average increase in glyphosate use in the sample during the 2000-2010 period led to an increase of 5% of the average in the infant mortality rate.”

October 2022 study in Environmental Health found glyphosate in 99% of pregnant women in a Midwestern cohort. Higher maternal levels in the first trimester were associated with lower birth weight, higher NICU admission risk. See also Indiana University School of Medicine news release.

In a March 2021 paper in Frontiers in Endocrinology, researchers that glyphosate is detected in the urine of residents of rural and urban environments and there is a correlation between “farmers’ exposure to glyphosate-based herbicides and altered thyroid hormone levels or incidence of thyroid pathologies.”

October 2020 paper in Chemosphere journal is the first comprehensive review consolidating the mechanistic evidence on glyphosate as an endocrine-disrupting chemical (EDC). The paper concludes that the world’s most widely used herbicide meets at least eight of the 10 key characteristics of EDCs, as proposed in an expert consensus statement published in 2020. See also article by USRTK.

July 2020 paper published in Molecular and Cellular Endocrinology, Are glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides endocrine disruptors that alter female fertility?” summarizes the endocrine-disrupting effects of exposure to glyphosate and glyphosate-based herbicides at low or “environmentally relevant” doses in the female reproductive tissues. Data suggesting that, at low doses, glyphosate-based herbicides may have adverse effects on the female reproductive tract fertility are discussed.

June 2020 paper in Veterinary and Animal Science concludes that some ingredients of glyphosate-based herbicides appear to act as reproductive toxicants, having a wide range of effects on both the male and female reproductive systems, including endocrine disruption, tissue damage and dysfunction of gametogenesis.

June 2020 paper in Environmental Pollution finds that neonatal exposure to glyphosate-based herbicides decreased cell proliferation and altered the expression of molecules that control proliferation and development in the uterus, potentially affecting the female reproductive health of sheep.

July 2020 study in Toxicology and Applied Pharmacology found indications that “chronic low-level exposure to glyphosate alters the ovarian proteome and may ultimately impact ovarian function.”

September 2020 study in Food and Chemical Toxicology reports that perinatal exposure to a glyphosate-based herbicide or glyphosate “disrupted critical hormonal and uterine molecular targets during the receptive state, possibly associated with the implantation failures.”

A 2018 ecological and population study conducted in Argentina found high concentrations of glyphosate in the soil and dust in agricultural areas that also reported higher rates of spontaneous abortion and congenital abnormalities in children, suggesting a link between environmental exposure to glyphosate and reproductive problems. No other relevant sources of pollution were identified.

A 2018 rat study by Argentinian researchers linked low-level perinatal glyphosate exposures to impaired female reproductive performance and congenital anomalies in the next generation of offspring.

A birth cohort study in Indiana published in 2017 – the first study of glyphosate exposure in US pregnant women using urine specimens as a direct measure of exposure – found detectable levels of glyphosate in more than 90% of the pregnant women tested and found the levels were significantly correlated with shortened pregnancy lengths.

2011 study in Reproductive Toxicology reported that glyphosate impairs male offspring reproductive development by disrupting gonadotropin expression.

2009 study in Toxicology found that glyphosate-based herbicides are toxic and endocrine disruptors in human cell lines.

Liver disease

A 2023 prospective cohort study using data from the Center for the Health Assessment of Mothers and Children of Salinas (CHAMACOS) reports a strong association between glyphosate and AMPA levels in the urine of 4-year-old and 14-year-old Hispanic children and markers of damage in the liver indicative of future non-alcoholic fatty liver disease and metabolic syndrome. See also reporting in Inside Climate News.

A 2019 study based on urinary analysis for glyphosate reported that glyphosate excretion is significantly higher in patients with nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH) who are considered to be at a higher risk of fibrosis progression and development to cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma.

A 2017 study associated chronic, very low-level glyphosate exposures to non-alcoholic fatty liver disease in rats. According to the researchers, the results “imply that chronic consumption of extremely low levels of a GBH formulation (Roundup), at admissible glyphosate-equivalent concentrations, are associated with marked alterations of the liver proteome and metabolome,” the biomarkers for NAFLD

Kidney disease

The American Association for the Advancement of Science awarded two Sri Lankan scientists, Drs. Channa Jayasumana and Sarath Gunatilake, the 2019 Award for Scientific Freedom and Responsibility for their work to “investigate a possible connection between glyphosate and chronic kidney disease under challenging circumstances.” The scientists reported that glyphosate plays a key role in transporting heavy metals to the kidneys of those drinking contaminated water, leading to high rates of chronic kidney disease in farming communities. See papers in SpringerPlus (2015), BMC Nephrology (2015), Environmental Health (2015), International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health (2014).

The AAAS award to the scientists was suspended amidst a fierce opposition campaign by pesticide industry allies to undermine the work of the scientists. After a review, the AAAS reinstated the award.

Microbiome disruption

November 2020 paper in the Journal of Hazardous Materials reports that approximately 54 percent of species in the core of the human gut microbiome are “potentially sensitive” to glyphosate. With a “large proportion” of bacteria in the gut microbiome susceptible to glyphosate, the intake of glyphosate “may severely affect the composition of the human gut microbiome,” the authors said in their paper. See also reporting by USRTK.

A 2020 literature review of glyphosate’s effects on the gut microbiome concludes that, “glyphosate residues on food could cause dysbiosis, given that opportunistic pathogens are more resistant to glyphosate compared to commensal bacteria.” The paper continues, “Glyphosate may be a critical environmental trigger in the etiology of several disease states associated with dysbiosis, including celiac disease, inflammatory bowel disease and irritable bowel syndrome. Glyphosate exposure may also have consequences for mental health, including anxiety and depression, through alterations in the gut microbiome.”

A 2018 rat study conducted by the Ramazzini Institute reported that low-dose exposures to Roundup at levels considered safe significantly altered the gut microbiota in some of the rat pups.

Another 2018 study reported that higher levels of glyphosate administered to mice disrupted the gut microbiota and caused anxiety and depression-like behaviors.

Neurotoxicity

A large nationwide study published in the journal NeuroToxicology (December 2021) reports that “several neurotoxic pesticide exposures estimated using residential location were associated with statistically significant increased risk of ALS (amyotrophic lateral sclerosis). These include the herbicides 2, 4-D and glyphosate, and the insecticides carbaryl and chlorpyrifos.” ALS is a progressive nervous system disease that affects nerve cells in the brain and spinal cord, causing loss of muscle control.

Anemia

A July 2023 study in Environmental Science and Pollution Research, Taiwanese researchers analyzed data from the 2013-2014 National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) of 1466 adults to explore the relationship between glyphosate exposure and erythrocyte profiles. The study found a “significant negative association between urinary glyphosate levels and hemoglobin and hematocrit … and provides “preliminary evidence of a plausible association between glyphosate exposure and anemia in a subset of the adult population in the United States.”

What are the environmental impacts of glyphosate?
Harm to bees and monarch butterflies

A 2023 study reports that glyphosate impairs learning in bumblebees. See news coverage in Phys.org.

A 2018 study reported that glyphosate damaged the beneficial gut bacteria in honeybees and made them more prone to deadly infections.

Research from China suggests that honeybee larvae grew more slowly and died more often when exposed to glyphosate.

A 2015 study that found field-levels of exposure impaired the cognitive capacities of honeybees.

Research from 2017 correlated glyphosate use with reduced populations of monarch butterflies, possibly due to reductions in milkweed, the main food source for monarch butterflies.

Why are people suing Bayer over glyphosate?

More than 100,000 people have filed suit against Monsanto Company (now Bayer) alleging that exposure to Roundup herbicide caused them or their loved ones to develop non-Hodgkin lymphoma (NHL), and that Monsanto covered up the risks. As part of the discovery process, Monsanto has had to turn over millions of pages of internal records. See our Monsanto Papers page for documents released during the trials. The first three trials ended in large awards to plaintiffs for liability and damages, with juries ruling that Monsanto’s weed killer was a substantial contributing factor in causing them to develop NHL. Bayer is appealing the rulings. The U.S. Supreme Court has so far upheld the rulings against Bayer.

Monsanto influence over research

In March 2017, the federal court judge unsealed some internal Monsanto documents that raised new questions about Monsanto’s influence on the EPA process and about the research regulators rely on. The documents suggest that Monsanto’s long-standing claims about the safety of glyphosate and Roundup do not necessarily rely on sound science as the company asserts, but on efforts to manipulate the science.

More information about scientific interference
Why is desiccation of wheat and other crops a problem?

Some farmers use glyphosate on non-GMO crops such as wheat, barley, oats, and lentils to dry down the crop ahead of harvest in order to accelerate the harvest. This practice, known as desiccation, may be a significant source of dietary exposure to glyphosate.

How much glyphosate is in our food?

Despite having annual pesticide residue testing programs for more than 30 years, the USDA U.S. FDA mostly skipped testing food for glyphosate until after criticism from the Government Accountability Office in 2014. The USDA said it would start testing but then dropped the plan in 2017. Internal government documents obtained by U.S. Right to Know show USDA had planned to start testing over 300 samples of corn syrup for glyphosate in April 2017; but the agency killed the project before it started. FDA began a limited testing program in 2016, but the effort was fraught with controversy and internal difficulties and the program was suspended in September 2016. The FDA did later resume limited testing.

One FDA chemist found alarming levels of glyphosate in many samples of U.S. honey, levels that were technically illegal because there have been no allowable levels established for honey by the EPA. Here is a recap of news about glyphosate found in food:

What mixtures of glyphosate and other pesticides are in our food?

USDA data from 2016 shows detectable pesticide levels in 85% of more than 10,000 foods sampled, everything from mushrooms to grapes to green beans. The government says there are little to no health risks, but some scientists say there is little to no data to back up that claim. See Chemicals on our food: When ‘safe’ may not really be safe.

In 2020, a group of FDA scientists published a research paper examining pesticide residue data collected from 2009-2017. The scientists said: “In this study, results for over 56,000 human food samples collected and analyzed under the FDA pesticide residue monitoring program between fiscal years (FY) 2009 to 2017 were reviewed to identify trends not apparent in annual reports. The overwhelming majority of these samples, 98.0% of domestic and 90.9% of import human foods, were compliant with federal standards. Although herbicides may be more widely used, the 10 most frequently detected residues were insecticides and fungicides. On a yearly basis, the violation rate for imported samples is 3-5 times higher than the rate for domestic samples. The import violation rate increased over time, as did the number of residues detected. Targeted sampling of foods with higher commodity-specific violation rates appears to be a major contributor to the increased violation rate. Mismatches between US tolerances and international MRLs can lead to violations; this was especially marked for rice. Overall, the majority of violations are due to residues of pesticides not authorized for use in the US (lack of tolerances). While DDT continues to persist in the environment and was found in 2.2% of domestic samples and 0.6% of imported samples, 42.3% of DDT-positive samples were below the limit of quantitation. The trends and analyses identified in this paper may help FDA plan future sampling and continue to protect the food supply.”

Monsanto owner Bayer AG maintains that residues of glyphosate in food are not harmful at levels approved by the EPA. A 2021 paper written by longtime Bayer (former Monsanto) scientist John Vicini and published in Comprehensive Reviews in Food Science and Food Safety states that “dietary exposures to glyphosate are within established safe limits.”

For a complete history of the use of glyphosate, including regulatory action and inaction, scientific controversies, human and environmental impact data, read Whitewash: The Story of a Weed Killer, Cancer and the Corruption of Science, winner of the 2018 Rachel Carson Book Award from the Society of Environmental Journalists. See also USRTK’s report on what internal corporate documents reveal about the tactics Monsanto and Bayer used to defend glyphosate. Merchants of Poison: How Monsanto Sold the World on a Toxic Pesticides by Stacy Malkan, with Anna Lappe and Kendra Klein, PhD.

This fact sheet was originally written by Carey Gillam and is regularly updated by USRTK staff

 

Connect with U.S. Right to Know

Cover image credit: maxmann




Dependency on the State Is the Core of the Takeover Plot of Humanity

Dependency on the State Is the Core of the Takeover Plot of Humanity

by Gary D. Barnett
August 16, 2023

 

“It’s not an endlessly expanding list of rights — the ‘right’ to health care, the ‘right’ to food and housing. That’s not freedom, that’s dependency. Those aren’t rights, those are the rations of slavery — hay and a barn for human cattle.”

~ P.J. O’Rourke

Most of you have entered the final stage of your voluntary acceptance of mass slavery, and that slavery is fully dependent on the concept of fear, compliance to a false ‘authority,’ and total dependence on the very tyrant called government, whose plan is to control the world by controlling the common, ignorant, and apathetic collective crowd called ‘the people.’ The most vital component of this ‘Great Reset’ agenda, is for the majority to be dependent on the State, and that phenomenon is now close at hand. The final foundation of all restriction, control of financial and monetary transactions, and control of movement, will hinge on the farcical fraud called manmade ‘climate change.’ No worries however, because many other excuses, and aspects of control and manipulation will be used as well, but at this point, the ‘climate change’ hoax is the lynchpin of the future takeover plot.

The speed of this agenda has accelerated far past earlier time projections, and I believe this to be due to more exposure by the few who understand what is actually happening, to explain all the contradiction, lies, and propaganda, that have inundated society for the past few decades. At this point, the somewhat panicked ruling class and its pawns in government, have vastly escalated their terror campaign worldwide, in order to shut down dissent before it can gain too much ground. This campaign of terror is meant to drive the tool of fear to a much higher degree, so as to be able to accomplish takeover goals with less resistance. As mentioned earlier, the main focus of this increased intimidation is based on the fake ‘climate change’ model.

One obvious example of this fear campaign, is the purposely heightened threat of so-called weather anomalies, especially what are conspicuous (intentionally set) fires burning at ridiculously high temperatures, destroying particular properties, towns, cities, and valuable mineral-laden land holdings. These unnatural fire outbreaks began in earnest in early spring, and have continued incessantly since that time. What began in Canada, has now overtaken the Hawaiian island of Maui, among many other areas around the world, and the devastation is incredible. Only psychopaths could perpetrate such evil as this, but the coverup and blame on bogus ‘climate change,’ has been accepted by most of course, and promulgated by the ruling class, and every State-owned or controlled mainstream media outlet. The attack on all truthtellers claiming these horrendous fires to be intentionally set, was instant, without any legitimate evidence to the contrary to back their plotted refutations, and in fact, this universal response was certainly coordinated.

Now there is a fight to see who will take this land in Maui, and by take, I mean exactly that. It has been exposed that many are attempting to buy and gain contracts to build a new ‘smart city’ on this hallowed ground, and many big players are involved, including Blackrock.. Those claiming to help, people like  Jeff Bezos and Oprah Winfrey, are already heavily involved, and the governor of Hawaii, Josh Green, has taken control of this, and not to the benefit of those residents and business owners who lost everything. (As an aside, the houses and property of Bezos and Winfrey magically escaped the fire?) This evil governor, a true controlling politician, said, and before all bodies have been recovered, or any funerals for the dead have taken place, “I’m already thinking of ways for the state to acquire that land so that we can put it into workforce housing, to put it back into families, or make it open spaces in perpetuity as a memorial to the people who were lost,” Democrat Gov. Josh Green said. What about all those who own that land the ‘State’ is going to force buy? (Steal)

But let us not stop here, as during this same year, there were unbelievable train derailments. most all of which involved very poisonous, and toxic materials, the most noted of course, being the purposely released (due to deliberate fire-setting) noxious chemicals in East Palestine, Ohio, that poisoned much of the northeast U.S. There were many more incidents of this nature as well.

As to extreme fear-mongering, weather ‘services’ nationwide, have intentionally changed all reporting in order to strike extreme fear in the collective herd called the ‘citizenry.’ Fantastic claims of record heat, which are bogus in most every case, are rampant. Instead of greens and darker muted colors to show heat, dark reds and purples just so happen to be the new norm across the entire country, and simultaneously; a coincidence certainly? In addition, the heat is not just hot, it is now “boiling” according to these weather idiots. These descriptions, while ludicrous and plotted, are purposely meant to cause undue alarm in an uninformed ‘public’ with little or no desire or effort to understand any truth.

All of these things, and an endless supply of other threats, including the threat of nuclear war, of financial collapse, of food shortages, of extreme inflation leading to extreme prices, to new ‘pandemic’ emergencies, to travel restrictions, lockdowns, monitoring of all transactions, and of total digitization of the economy in order to control all, are now constant. The end of cash is being pursued aggressively, and the replacement by central bank digital currency (CBDC) is looming in the near future. This agenda too, has recently accelerated greatly, indicating that the ruling element of society is attempting to expand its control mechanisms more quickly so as to avoid any pushback. Given what is happening in open view, the great increase of intentionally-structured disastrous events, the massive transfer of wealth and property, the government’s aggressive stance immediately following every manufactured ‘weather event’ or so-called ‘natural’ emergency, and the total disregard for life and personal property, how long will it be until this takeover plot becomes fully entrenched in reality?

All of these events are meant to make the average ‘citizen’ dependent on the State. The more dependency, the easier to control. When the bulk of society cannot or will not take care of themselves, will not be responsible for their own lives and freedom, will not fight back in their own defense, and voluntarily choose to acquiesce to authority and State relief instead of taking any personal responsibility, what will become of this country?

It will be very telling to watch this State terrorism that has been released on Maui, and how the people respond. Will they give up their homes and land that was destroyed by and due to evil forces, or will they demand to keep and hold their property? Will they disallow this totalitarian scum called a governor from his nefarious U.N. plans, and keep what is theirs? Or will they simply allow the State’s political class to do as they please with everything they have deliberately destroyed, and become wards (slaves) of the State?

Once mass dependence is in place, there will no longer be any chance of a free society. The State seeks to control all, and the way to accomplish that heinous mission, is to make the populace at large completely impotent, so that they have not the ability or drive to fight back. Total dependency is key to any takeover conspiracy by the ruling class and its State thugs, and many feigned threats and so-called emergencies will erupt on a regular basis going forward. This is without doubt in my opinion, so believe nothing, trust no State representative at any level, trust no mainstream media, and question everything!

Between the government which does evil and the people who accept it – there is a certain shameful solidarity.”

~ Author: Victor Hugo

Reference links:

A message to Maui … The truth may shock you!

Canada fires four times more toxic

California firestorms

Lahaina rebuild scheme

Additional government complicity in Lahaina fires

Hawaii governor wants to swoop in and buy up Lahaina

East Palestine, Ohio intentional chemical fire corruption

 

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: stevepb




Michael Tellinger With Reiner Fuellmich: ‘One Small Town’ vs the Globalist Agenda’s ’15-Minute Cities’ — On Creating a Life Outside the Enslaving Government Systems

Michael Tellinger With Reiner Fuellmich: ‘One Small Town’ vs the Globalist Agenda’s ’15-Minute Cities’ — On Creating a Life Outside the Enslaving Government Systems

 

TCTL editor’s note:

Below, you will find a conversation between international attorney (US & Germany) Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, attorney/economist Dexter Lejay Ryneveldt from South Africa, & Michael Tellinger (founder of Ubuntu and One Small Town intiatives) also from South Africa. Also in attendance is Emil Borg, the new One Small Town (OST) ambassador for Sweden.

As some of the readers here will know, the One Small Town (OST) initiative has gone through many challenging phases over the past 17 years, learning from failures and gaining wisdom through discussion and experience of many of its supporters. Many years of trial and error — blood, sweat and tears — have gone into the creation of this OST model.

Those of us who have lived long lives and have experienced the falling apart, again and again, of our work and our dreams, know what it takes to remain trusting and persistent in spite of the odds.

In this interview, Michael presents the basic details of what One Small Town (OST) initiative is, its history and its evolution from the Ubuntu Contributionism vision. He also discusses the new digital Infinity token and explains that it differs from cryptocurrency coins, and that they are keeping it separate from the current global financial system.

Reiner and Dexter asked some key questions during this interview and will be doing a follow-up interview with Michael after they have the chance to do additional research and look into the details of the OST initiative.

As Reiner said in the interview:

“The one thing that most people, when it comes to setting up your own self-sufficient systems, have been worried the most about is what do we do about the monetary system.”

As this conversation is of great importance to many of us, the follow-up interview will be posted here at TCTL when it is available.

Below the video is a basic description provided by ICIC (International Crimes Investigative Committee).  The video can be found at ICIC channels at Odysee and Rumble.

I have added show notes and a transcript to make review of this information easier. This is a lot of information for most of us to take in. You’ll likely have your own questions about this initiative.  Some may want to join the One Small Town initiative and/or offer support to this vision by purchasing Infinity tokens.

Following the transcript, you will find links to One Small Town and Michael Tellinger websites where you can do further research.

My thanks go to paying substack supporters and others who have made donations via the donation page at here at TCTL. You make this work and the maintenance of this website possible, providing access to thousands of readers around the world. 

~ Kathleen Stilwell, editor & curator, Truth Comes to Light

 



One Small Town vs. 15 Minute Prisons

by Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, ICIC
with Michael Tellinger, Dexter Lejay Ryneveldt & Emil Borg
August 14, 2023

 

In this episode of ICIC, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich talks with Michael Tellinger, a scientist, author, explorer, humanitarian founder of the ‘One Small Town‘ initiative, as well as Emil Borg, New National Ambassador for One Small Town Sweden, and Dexter Ryneveldt, lawyer and economist in South Africa: possible solutions to help free ourselves from the dependencies of the systems and live a dignified and free life.

Especially in the so-called Corona pandemic with its inhumane measures, it became abundantly clear that the prevailing governmental systems have nothing good in mind for humanity and that they have long been pursuing a subtle global agenda to install totalitarian mechanisms. This is to make humanity controllable and fully dependent on their system at their will.

These brutal procedures have made many people wake up rather uncomfortably, and question the authorities as well as the reality in which we live.

Michael Tellinger presents the idea of the “One Small Town Initiative” in detail.

He has been involved with its development since 2005 and has dedicated all his time, possessions and manpower to this project, as he is completely convinced of this possibility of living together without depending on and being abused by a governmental system.

He talks about the beginnings of the ‘One Small Town’ project, formed from the so-called Ubuntu movement and Contributionism, a system in which people contribute their skills and talents for the benefit of the community. In this way, everyone can benefit from each other’s skills.

It’s about realizing how much power and potential a small town of several thousand people has, where everyone co-operates with everyone else at all levels instead of competing.

If the mindset changes, there is an infinite abundance of opportunities to live with each other, from growing food, to starting businesses, to creating property and to participate in these same local small town businesses.

The basis of this project lies in returning ownership to those, away from global world corporations, and towards those who provide and work to create real value.

Why is this kind of free coexistence impossible within the framework of political systems?

How exactly does the underlying exchange of goods and services work from an economic perspective?

Is this method feasible, and how does one manage not to fight against the system, but to create one’s own independence within the legal framework?

Where do one-small-town companies already exist?

What explains their rapid growth worldwide and how can people become part of these projects?


Transcript & Show Notes prepared by TCTL editor:

00:00:42

Introduction

Reiner:

Dear friends, today we will try and talk about, not the problems, but the solution to those problems that we’ve been talking about for so long — for at least three years.

Some people have been talking about these problems for even longer — those who have realized that we’ve been lied to by those who we used to trust.

But today we have Michael Tellinger from South Africa. We have Emil Borg from Sweden. And we have my friend and colleague Dexter Ryneveldt from South Africa to discuss how we can get away from under the thumb of the system and have much better lives than we do under the system.

So thank you very much for making the time. It’s an honor, and it’s a pleasure, of course, Michael, to have you. And same with you, Emil. It’s always fun to talk to you.

So what do you do in South Africa? You have been working on these solutions for, not just for the last three years, but for much longer, right?

00:01:50

The Evolution of Ubuntu Contributionism & One Small Town Philosophy

Michael:

Yes, I have, Reiner. Thank you very much. It’s great to meet you and I’m very excited to have this conversation with you. Thanks to Emil for setting this up. And great to meet you, Dexter, out here in South Africa as well.

Yes, look, the One Small Town initiative has been around for a long time. Initially I started talking about this idea in 2005 already and slowly but surely it evolved.

We’ve walked the talk, we’ve paid the price, we’ve — it’s taken blood, sweat and tears. Everything I’ve had. Everything I have. Every cent I’ve ever earned has been poured into this. So it’s been my lifelong passion the last two decades at least. And here we are.

Something that started as a crazy idea that everybody laughed at me. They wanted to beat me up for even suggesting these kind of crazy ideas. And it was was really a thing about people. It needed to evolve and also grow into a time when the level of consciousness was a little bit higher around the world.

And I think this, especially the whole COVID plandemic and the lockdown that people felt attacks, they felt the abuse of governments, they felt — they realized how abusive governments can be and how they can completely and utterly overstep their boundaries.

That helped a lot of people wake up, and it really — during the lockdown is when the One Small Town movement really exploded.

So just a little bit more background. So the One Small Town movement grew out of what I started calling Contributionism and the Ubuntu movement out in 2007, 2006-2007.

So it all started with the Ubuntu movement, with the idea called Contributionism: a system in which people contribute their skills and talents towards the benefit of their community, so that everybody benefits from everybody’s skills and talents. And it’s slowly but surely evolved, gotten better and stronger over time.

We also had a period that we went through politics. We got involved in politics in South Africa. I registered the Ubuntu Party in 2010. We participated in three elections — 2012, 2014 and 2016.

So in essence, I ran for president in 2014 during the national elections as the leader of the Ubuntu Party.

And I must tell you, that’s when I truly discovered how crooked the political arena is and how the entire outcome of the elections is prepared. It is laid out for us. It is not elected, it is selected.

And that taught me really to use the One Small Town philosophy. We then participated in the 2016 elections in South Africa again, but just in the municipal elections under the One Small Town banner. By then we’re in transition from trying to promote the philosophy of Ubuntu because it was a bit vague. And it turned into the One Small Town philosophy where you take small towns and you turn them around by waking people up and showing them that if they cooperate and collaborate, they can achieve so much more.

In fact, any small town of several thousand people has infinite potential to create abundance for themselves.

The only thing that people have to do is change the way they think. And start to, instead of competing against each other, start to cooperate and collaborate on every level — starting with growing food, starting as many businesses as they can, and creating the ownership of the businesses in our small towns.

The ownership start needs to come back to the people away from the large corporations, away from the multinational retailers, away from the multinationals that control everything.

And that’s where I realized in 2016 that this is most likely not going to happen on the political arena. And then we exited the political arena in 2016 and One Small Town became a non-political and nonprofit community development program. But since then it’s just exploded.

Just to add a little bit more before I stop yapping, the Ubuntu Party, actually with the philosophy of unity within community and people cooperating, and the whole philosophy of Contributionism — which I must say really appeals to people and still appeals to people around the world in larger and larger numbers because it’s such a simple, beautiful philosophy of people contributing towards their own prosperity.

The philosophy of Contributionism turned into the Ubuntu Party in a number of countries, so we had the Ubuntu Party in Canada, in the UK, in Australia. And we almost launched in the USA and that didn’t happen. The Canadian Ubuntu Party fell apart because of inner conflict, and then after the 2016 elections it became very clear that going into politics is not a solution.

You cannot inject a seed of consciousness into the political beast and think that the political beast is going to change.

But the important thing here is that we walk the talk. I walk the talk and therefore I have the experience to talk about all these things where most other people do not have these experiences.

The Failure of Intentional Communities

We also engaged with intentional communities around the world, whether it’s Esalen or Damanhur and other — many, many other communities that I met the founders of such communities around the world, only to realize that all of these communities are a huge disaster and a huge failure on every possible level.

And that’s where it just gave more and more strength and credence to the One Small Town initiative, which is completely and utterly different from any other community upliftment project or an initiative. And this is why it is suddenly growing around the world at such a rapid rate.

And that’s my little introduction, just to familiarize people with who I am and where I come from and what we’ve done in the last 17 years.

00:08:12

Reiner:

I think it’s great that I’m finally meeting someone who really knows what they’re talking about, because I’ve been propagating, and most people on our side of the fence have been propagating, the disconnection, the shutting ourselves off of the system — because the system is not only thoroughly infiltrated and utterly corrupt, therefore you can’t fix it, but it is also not worth fixing. Because it’s based on the wrong virtues. In fact, there are no virtues except materialism. And it’s fighting each other. It’s competition in the worst sense imaginable.

So I can’t wait to hear more about this because we all know that we cannot trust the global corporations. We cannot trust the global NGOs because they’re all run by the same very few, very evil, people.

And we also know — because I’ve been into politics as well, for about, I don’t know, a year maybe. And then I got out because I was totally frustrated. I realized this is totally corrupt because you’re part of the system when you enter politics.

So there’s no other way than to reimagine ourselves as free, independent, sovereign people who can do whatever they want. And we should do it for our own benefit, and not even think about that old rotten system that is now definitely coming apart. This whole house of cards is collapsing.

00:09:47

A New Paradigm: Competition Within a Cooperative Spirit

Michael:

I think what you said there is absolutely 100%. I resonate with every word you say.

It’s also important for me to stress that the One Small Town initiative is not a system — we’re not fighting the system.

You know, like you said, this the system that we’re in is broken. It cannot be fixed, and it’s not worth fixing. Because, as you said, it’s built on the rotten foundation. Foundation of greed, control, competition — destructive competition.

So within the One Small Town initiative, we still have competition, but it’s competition within a cooperative spirit. And that’s a completely different thing.

You know, as long as you have competition within a cooperative spirit then you achieve things. And the achievements that you create actually benefit the community. And not become a detriment to the community because now… So I’ll go into more detail later.

So I just want to stress to everybody watching this that the One Small Town initiative, we’re creating a new reality. We’re creating a new paradigm, a new system that will slowly but surely make the current system obsolete.

So there’s no violence, no opposition, no conflict. We don’t have to fight anyone or anything or any government. We just build this up in our small towns in larger and larger numbers across the world.

All the small towns are connected to each other through our centralized blockchain, our centralized exchange mechanisms and sharing and so forth. I’ll go into more detail about this.

And this is how we slowly but surely take back the power to the people and especially into the small towns.

Hubs of Innovation, Creativity & Investment Opportunity

So the small towns not only become hubs of innovation, of excitement, of technology, of creation, of happiness and everything else we’ve always imagined for our families and our future. But also the small towns suddenly become the most exciting investment opportunities for the conscious investors of the world.

Because once the investors with the billionaires and the millionaires realize that the Small Towns is a safe and ongoing investment opportunity with unlimited potential for growth, watch the stampede.

I anticipate that once the first billionaire or millionaire joins us and invests into a number of the cornerstone businesses in a Small Town, and… by doing that, really, exposes the opportunity.

Watch the stampede of conscious investors around the world move away from the very, very scary and questionable investment opportunities on the stock markets and the normal kind of investment opportunities that are running dry very, very quickly.

And when people realize that by investing into a community where you go into a partnership with an entire community, you’ve literally created for yourself a safe haven for you and your family. The safest town that you can imagine, where everybody works together because the businesses that we start all belong to us.

The profits that we make belong to us. They don’t go offshore to some shareholders sitting in a boardroom somewhere else. And the technology and innovation that we create is used to help the community, and not help a few rich individuals on some board, in some foreign country, that are selling us electricity and withholding medicines and cures for disease from us. And that goes for the supply of food, obviously.

So with the One Small Town initiative, we have a very small, very simple plan of action, how to initiate it, how to start it.

Start it small and grow it as quickly as we can. And as people see this excitement and the joy in their fellow town folk, that creates the domino effect that becomes unstoppable.

00:13:56

Two Worlds That Cannot Be Rejoined

Reiner:

And one more thing. In that previous discussion I just had with that person who — a nice guy — who believes in this utopian dream of reviving the public television and radio stations. I told him I think this is utopia, but I wish you the best of luck.

For me, however, the reality looks like this. And this is based on another interview I had the day before, which deals with a scientist who is now deeply into spirituality.

And it resonates with what some of the people from the Maori who we speak with in terms of bringing justice to the world. In terms of what they call restoring the peace for the world, it resonates with their spirituality.

We already have a divided world. We have two worlds. And I think that they cannot be rejoined. It’s impossible. Because the other side of the fence, they’re either in cahoots, knowingly in cahoots, with those who are pulling the strings, or too stupid — stupidity out of cowardice because they don’t dare use their brains. Or too stupid to realize that they’re being used for evil purposes.

So if they want to join us, if they want to join your One Small Town initiative, fine. Of course we’ll welcome them, but we don’t really worry about them. I don’t.

I think we should, on our side of the fence, focus on what’s good for us because we’re the ones who are creative.

It’s not the large corporations. Guess why they’re buying up all these small and medium sized businesses: because they don’t have their own creativity.

So let’s keep that power for ourselves and make use of it for our own benefit.

What is your take? Go ahead, Michael.

00:15:52

“If It’s Not Good for Everyone, It’s No Good at All.”

Michael:

So, Reiner, I just say, you know, if you have any questions about One Small Town, please shoot them at me. Because I feel, I don’t want to just feel like I’m talking away here. So if you have any specific questions about how does this work, how does that work, please feel free to shoot them at me.

But I just want to outline a little bit for your viewers that might be new to this. Go to our website onesmalltown.org. Watch all the videos. And you’ll also realize that some of the videos go back, you know, one year, two years, five years, 10 years, 15 years. Some of the videos are very old. And you’ll see how we’ve evolved, how this thing has grown and matured into what it is today.

That’s why it is so strong. That’s why I can speak with such confidence and passion about how this thing works. How One Small Town has all the solutions that you can think of for all the problems. And the solutions already built into the One Small Town model.

Not because I’m smart, but because the solutions have evolved over the years from the One Small Town model and just presented themselves.

Because if it’s not good for everyone, it’s no good at all. That’s one of our slogans.

And one of the other important slogans that’s really important for people to try and digest here is that we’re not fighting the system.

We’re not opposing anyone. We are using the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation. This is really important.

And this is why most, not most, every other sort of intentional community initiative that has been attempted around the world — even the great Osho out in California, in Oregon, was it? Which could have been an incredible solution, but the ego got in the way.

And every other intentional community that has started has been a failure. And we can say that because if it was a success we’d be using it. We’d be doing it and we’re not.

So One Small Town comes and brings together all the lessons we’ve learned from all the failed experiments and presents a very simple transitional phase for people that are sick and tired, people that resonate with what we are talking about here, people that know there’s a better way, there’s a better life.

That we can live in a utopian world. That Utopia is a good word. It’s not a bad word. It’s been made a bad word by the negative people in the world, right?

So yes, we’re striving and we’re creating a utopian world for ourselves. And this is a step-by-step introduction of how to get from here to there. And it does not have to take a long time.

But in the process of going from here to there, we have to realize that the reason why the corporations are so successful and have such a strong stranglehold on all of humanity is because of their systems, their structures and their control mechanisms.

So what we are doing, we’re using the same kind of systems and structures and control mechanisms so that we can create success.

But these structure systems and control mechanisms are controlled and managed by the people of the community. They are the owners of these systems.

It just helps them to navigate the treacherous seas and oceans of corruption, and theft and deceit, and so forth so that it provides our blockchain and our online platform.

One Small Town (OST) Token & Blockchain Platform — An Alternative Exchange System

The One Small Town platform and blockchain provides a secure environment for investors to know — if they invest into a brewery or growing food or medicinal plants or whatever else it is — that they’re investing into our small town.

They can follow their investment. They know exactly how the money is being used, that it’s going where it’s intended to go.

That all the members from our community — that are 60% or 90% shareholders in some cases of all the businesses — that they see, exactly how much profit we’ve made in each and every business and how many dividends are going to be distributed every month to all our members.

Everything is completely transparent in every town and every One Small Town initiative and community. And this is why we have to put these structures into place.

This, however, has caused a little concern with some of the slightly more “spiritual” — and I use the word with love — some more sort of hippie-minded members, right.

They go ‘Wow, you guys are behaving just like the corporates now. You know, like, wow, man, I really don’t like the way you’re doing this. You’re just acting just like the corporates.’

And the answer is yes, we are. For your own safety. Because if we don’t do this, everyone’s gonna rip you off, dude. And everyone’s gonna run away with all your hard work and you’re gonna have nothing to show for it.

And this is why all the hippie colonies of the past, and all the intentional communities of the past have failed, for this very simple reason.

And to just to add one final thing before I hand over to you: to do this, we’ve created what our what we call the One Small Town platform and blockchain. And that then also, about just more than a year ago, spawned out of the blue, the most exciting opportunity that we realized — is that because we have this as a membership. One Small Town has a voluntary membership that people join for free. You don’t have to pay an entrance membership fee or nothing. You just join for free. Go online, sign up as a member. You instantly become a member and you open your digital wallet.

On the Infinity Token & Contribution of Three Hours a Week

So what we’ve created is an Infinity token. Which is really the token. (Excuse my noisy Rife machine right here that’s just finished treating my feet.)

So what we’ve suddenly had an epiphany is that, instead of using —

Before I go there, I need to say that the only thing that One Small Town members have to do is that, when when you become a member, you’ve pledged to contribute three hours a week towards your businesses, towards your community. Three hours a week. It’s all it takes, right?

People that know what I’m talking about will understand. That turns our community into an incredibly powerful labor force. If you have a town of 10,000 people, suddenly you have 30,000 hours of free labor a week. Because we contribute our time voluntarily towards our own businesses, towards fixing our town.

Now, the difference between our 30,000 hours of labor a week and a large corporation. You know how much a large corporation would pay for 30,000 hours of labor. It’s very simple to do the calculation. That’s what they can’t afford. And yet we can afford it, and we do it with love and willingly for free.

And this is why a small town of 10,000 people, that every member just contributes three hours a week, suddenly becomes a fierce competitor to any global-multinational corporation.

Immediately and instantly. We can grow anything, build anything, manufacture anything, distribute anything. Because we choose to do it together, and we are the owners of these businesses. It’s a very powerful position to be in.

And to manage all of this, we’ve had to create the system that is foolproof and cannot be cheated, etc.

So in the process we had to find a way of — how do we know when somebody arrives to do their three hours in one of our businesses or, you know or cutting the grass in the park or helping the orphans, or delivering food to the elderly, or whatever it is that we do (we’re gonna do all kinds of things in our community).

And that certainly presented us with an incredible opportunity. Instead of just using a punch card system — you know the old punch card system that you clock into your job and clock out — suddenly we use technology with QR code readers. And we created what is known as the Infinity Token, which is a membership-asset-backed-NFT token which is created every time one of our members contributes three hours towards one of our businesses or community.

So suddenly we’re now also sitting with the fact that all our members, the moment they contribute their 3-hours a week, over and above the dividends that we distribute to ourselves from the profits of our businesses, and the food and everything that we grow, that we distribute to ourselves every month.

We also reward ourselves with our own Infinity tokens that are growing in value at a rapid rate, because it’s the only truly asset-backed-NFT community token that’s backed by true and real human sweat equity.

And the more members we have around the world contributing three hours a week towards their businesses, the more the value of the Infinity token grows.

And to finish this little ranting monologue is — to utilize these Infinity tokens, we’ve created what we call the One Small Town digital wallet that every member instantly gets in your account. When you open your account online, you get your digital wallet and you start collecting your Infinity tokens every time you contributes three hours towards the One Small Town initiative.

And you can send those tokens from your digital wallet instantly for free to any other member around the world. As long as they’re member, you can send it to them via their e-mail (boom) and I send it from me to your digital wallet instantly, outside of any banking system, outside of anybody’s prying eyes. And you and I can exchange anything we want by exchanging these tokens.

So we’ve created an alternative currency system, if you can call it. An alternative exchange system. It exists. It’s real and everyone, everywhere in the world can use it right now.

00:25:57

Dexter Ryneveldt Questions the Financial Reality & Implications

Dexter:

I’m actually very, very impressed what you have said in the synopsis that you have given, Michael, as to what is the basis for you guys working and working towards, like you say, Utopia, the One Small Town initiative.

One of the things that I just want to find out from you. I know here in South Africa, one of the big things within the communities we are talking about, and you have mentioned cooperative units.

So what I want to find out from you, and in particular when it comes to the financial implications and things.

I want to find out, when we talk about cooperative units, organizations that are the One Small Town initiative is actually driving.

Is it actually registered with the South African Reserve Bank or are you actually trying to keep it not connected to any system here in South Africa?

00:27:01

The Financial Organization of OST – 17 Years in the Making

Michael:

Yeah, no, it is a completely independent system. The One Small Town company is registered as a nonprofit company.

The way we operate right now is that every One Small Town initiative is actually registered as a pool under the One Small Town nonprofit company. So they operate as a pool. So they’re also then seen as a nonprofit company.

Remember that we’re not providing work. We’re not creating work, so we don’t fall under the labour law. Because everybody that contributes their three hours a week is a co-owner of the business.

So they’re just working in their own business. So it’s not a job.

So we’ve eliminated all these potential problems with government and labour and any of that.

So yeah, this is why it’s taken 17 years to get to this point. It didn’t happen overnight. Slowly but surely, we found the problems and the solutions were presented to us.

One Small Town Trading Platform About to Go Live

And now with the Infinity tokens, that has opened up a door, not only to reward ourselves with our own Infinity tokens and be able to exchange them amongst ourselves. And also sell them and trade them on our One Small Town trading platform, which is about about to go live probably about four weeks from now.

And again, this is a private trading platform. This is not trading on on any open cryptocurrency markets or any of that. You have to be a member of One Small Town.

In other words, the Infinity token cannot be crashed. It cannot devalue. No one can steal your tokens. You can’t lose them because it’s an NFT that can be traced.

And so it’s a very, very different system from any other cryptocurrency or NFT scenario. We operate in a way that we don’t fight the system. If they’re taxes to be paid, we’ll pay the taxes.

You know, so we don’t want to create any ripples. We don’t want to resist or fight anyone. We use the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation.

And one of those tools of liberation is finding the smartest tax advisers there are, so that we as a community, that very soon could be turning over millions and maybe billions of dollars or rands or euros per town —

(Please, remind me to come back to this where I can make such an outrageous statement.)

If we’re turning over billions of euros in our little town, we’re going to find the best bloody tax adviser.

Just like Bill Gates and these rich bastards. They pay zero tax because they have very smart people doing their tax for them.

00:29:43

Dexter:

So if I understand you correctly, when we talk about — when you talk about the Infinity token, the Infinity Token is basically based on each and every individual member of the One Small Town initiative, where they give three hours of their time, and there is then an investment. And then from that investment, that creates the value. And from that value, that can be an exchange globally.

That’s basically the foundation of this Infinity token.

00:30:17

On the Challenges Faced by OST Organizing Resources & Finances

Michael:

It is a foundation. And more and more people are getting excited about it.

It’s taken a little while for the crypto heads and the, you know, those kind of people that are so stuck in Bitcoin mind. It’s just, it’s sickening. But they’re starting to realize how faulty and how insane that world is. And how sane and safe our world is.

And that penny is starting to drop for people to say, wow, hold on, this is a far more safer environment. I invest in this. I contribute in this. And I’m gonna talk to you more about our additional investment tokens we’re about to launch related to the businesses and the profits of the businesses.

So this is an infinite potential for growth on every level you can image. And it’s a safe environment, completely safe.

Blockchain. Membership protected. Investor protected. Members protected. Everyone is protected. No one can ever run away with you. No one can collapse it. No one can collapse your investment. The stock markets can’t collapse it.

It is bulletproof, right? So it’s controlled by the people and the members.

Right now we can determine the value of the Infinity token. That’s how we actually launched the Infinity token. We launched it at $1.00.

Based on the value — the launch value was actually $40 and the reason we can say that is because the average three hours of labour — If you had to work in the United States or Europe or — and some of the Western countries — where you looked at all the different possible scenarios. So for a three-hour shift you would earn on average $40, U.S. dollars. For a three hour shift.

So that is in real life, real terms, the true value of the Infinity Token. It’s $40. Right? And we launched it at $1.00.

So at this stage, it is grossly undervalued. So anyone that buys the Infinity Token now is buying it at an incredibly discounted rate because it’s going up and up and up towards $40. Whether the people like it or not, that’s what the true value of it is.

And then it’ll just go higher and higher. And the reason it’s gonna go higher and higher is that because — there’s an algorithm. We created an algorithm. Our programmers created an algorithm to determine the value of the token.

So it’s not just me sitting here deciding what the value is. The algorithm is linked to the issuing of the tokens. And basically every time one of our members — every time a member joins and every time members contribute their three hours, the blockchain picks up on it and it increases the value of the token by my minute little fraction.

So if we have a few hundred members working and contributing, it goes up slowly. If we have a few thousand members, it goes up faster. Once we have a dozen thousand or 100,000 members, watch the value of the Infinity token go higher and higher. Very, very quickly and steadily.

And then finally the other true value of the token, which is really playing games with people’s minds is this one:

So imagine you now live in a small town situation where we’ve created really abundance and utopia for ourselves. We’re growing vast amounts of food. We’re keeping a portion of the food for ourselves. The rest of the food we sell, to export internationally. We bring the dividends back. We distribute our dividends.

We build laptops and fridges and bicycles and nail clippers. And bread and milk and cheese. And I mean everything you can imagine. Because that’s what we do, we choose to do it. It’s our decision. Right?

And now the more we grow and build and create, the more we’re gonna have every week and every month.

Where do we put it? We have to put it somewhere, right? So this suddenly gave birth to the One Small Town superstore, like a Walmart. So suddenly we open a superstore that belongs to the people, the community.

But because everything we put in there, we have manufactured, we have grown, and made the bread and milk and bicycles and laptops, whatever. Whatever goes into the One Small Town superstore is made by us. That means we can sell it for a much cheaper price than Walmart or anybody else.

You see the interesting situation that’s developing here. Right? So even the greedy, multinational retailers are gonna not be able to compete with our own retail store — that makes all our products and food available to everyone that wants to buy.

They come in there and they buy in fiat currency. They don’t buy it in tokens. They pay dollars or pounds or whatever. And this is where we get fiat currency and cash to still manage and meet the needs in a in a system.

So we are not jumping out of the system. We are still using, you know, profits in cash and euros and everything to help distribute to the people, so they can still live in this crazy world we find ourselves in.

But slowly, but surely, we’ll transition into a whole new world in which that money is no longer needed.

But, this is how it works. So the benefits to members of One Small Town, there are three benefits.

First one, you get tokens. Every time you can do about 3 hours, you get a token in your digital wallet. You can contribute up to three hours a day. So in one month you can earn 31 tokens. The maximum you can earn in a month — 31 tokens a month.

Or, minimum, to get your benefits, one token per week, right? So one three-hour shift a week. That’s a minimum you have to contribute to get the labor, the free labor force, that we know we can allocate people towards a number of businesses. So we know we’ve got the labor force to perform certain tasks.

And the second benefit we give to ourselves from the One Small Town is all the profits from all the businesses are pooled collectively and distributed evenly to all the members.

So you don’t have to work — Just because you worked in the bakery and you didn’t work in the in the stables doesn’t mean that you’re not going to get benefit from the stables. You get benefit from everything because you’ve contributed towards your businesses in your community.

So you’ve pooled — The One Small Town initiative is a is not a bartering trade, a one-to-one exchange. It is a one-to-many exchange. 

I contribute towards the well-being of my community. So does everybody else. And therefore we share in everything that we create. And we distribute it evenly to all of us. That’s why it’s called contributionism.

So I benefit from everybody’s input and they benefit from my input and that’s why it’s such a perfect leveling of the playing fields.

So even if you’re a surgeon and your doing brain surgery for three hours, you’re still going to get one token. And if I’m cutting the the lawn or draining the sewage pipes in the hospital, I get the same token that you get as a surgeon, because if the sewage pipes aren’t cleaned, you ain’t doing any surgery. Right?

So this is the absolute leveling of the playing field. Everybody’s treated equally and their contribution is valued equally. And that’s what most people truly appreciate because now they feel appreciated for who they are and what they do, not diminished because they’re doing some measly work.

But the third thing — the benefits that we get — is at the end of each month —

So it’s the tokens, the dividends, the distribution of the profits and then the basket of goods. Every month at the end of the month, you go to the One Small Town superstore. And all the food that we’ve created, we keep keep a portion of everything that we do. Whether its laptops, we make a limited number of laptops to distribute to our members. The rest is sold. If it’s bread or cheese or milk or corn flour or whatever.

So you go to the One Small Town superstore. You put in your membership card. And it prints out a ticket and says this month you get a bag of this, you get a bicycle, you get nail clippers, you get a helmet or whatever it is that we created.

So you go there and get your basket of goods for free. The only thing you have to sacrifice is one Infinity token. That’s to show that you received your basket of goods.

Alright, now obviously every month we’re going to distribute food. Food is number one. So you’re always going to have food distributed to all our people. So they never, ever go hungry.

And there’ll be building materials. There’ll be bricks and cement and God knows what. Windows and doors and, you know. Who knows what we’re going to be manufacturing. It could be a car.

So what is the value of that one Infinity token that you’ve had to sacrifice to get your basket of goods?

The value of that token is the total value of the basket of goods that you just received. And the people will know this. My God, for one token he got all the stuff that doesn’t add to the value of the token on the algorithm. But in the minds of the people, the people know that that’s what the value of the token is.

So just to understand, we didn’t include the value of the basket of goods into the algorithm of the value of the token, because the moment we do that we breach the Securities and Exchange Act. So suddenly we’re dealing in Securities and Exchange and we can’t do that.

So I’m just telling you how complex this has been and how many different things we’ve had to think about not to break the law. And yet give the people as many benefits as they possibly can get. And make the Infinity token very, very lucrative around the world.

00:39:58

Reiner:

Emil, go ahead. You’ve been silent.


Emil:

Sometimes you should talk and sometimes you should just be quiet. And I think this is a time to be quiet, to be perfectly honest.

My role in this is to be Michael’s disciple in Sweden. I’m trying to, not trying, going to start One Small Town in Sweden. And I’m the ambassador for Sweden. That’s my role in this. I’m going to be on the ground, and, yeah, make sure that we get it all the way through. Make it happen.

OST Not Dependent on the System — Inside the System But Disconnected From It

Reiner:

So what I gather from this, Michael, is that the One Small Town idea can exist inside the system but disconnected from it. It has some connections, but it isn’t dependent on the system.

You’re totally self-sufficient if I understand you correctly. But you’re still complying with the rules and regulations of that, I believe, collapsing system so that through this transition period you can already build these One Small Towns.

And when the time comes and the system collapses, which it sure will, then you can do your own thing completely without being bound by any rules and regulations outside of the One Small Town ideas, right?

00:41:34

Changing the Way People Think: 

Michael:

Yeah, that’s exactly it. And that’s how we call it One Small Town and not one small settlement. Because, you know, when people think that we’re, you know, we’re going out buying a piece of land and building houses. No, no, no, no, no. That’s a failed system. That doesn’t work.

There are very exclusive potential situations in which it can work, but it’s a huge nightmare.

Why should we start from scratch? We have hundreds of thousands of small towns and villages around the world. We don’t have to build anything from scratch.

Towns exist. They have everything. All the infrastructure. They have halls and factories and streets and sewage and electricity and farms and everything we need.

All we need to do is change the way the people think. And realize that if we just cooperate and collaborate, anything becomes possible. So I want to come back to the potential of the small towns.

If you look at any international corporation. The average annual turnover of a company that has 4,000 or more employees is $1 billion or more per annum.

Just let that sink in. I’d like your viewers to think about what I’m saying here.

So if you have an international company of 4,000 employees that work in a 9-to-5, with all the expenses that come with them and the offices, and all the crap and the corporate stuff, and et cetera. All the labor costs. Four thousand employees. Your average minimum turnover is $1 billion or more. Some of the companies I looked at it doing $16-$20 billion turnover per annum with four or five thousand employees.

Can you imagine what we can achieve with 10,000 members in a One Small Town situation where each one of our members contributes three hours a week? And some of them three hours a day.

Because now they’re not just employees at a company wasting time, wasting company resources. Taking this home. Taking that home, you know. Suddenly we have members of the community that are co-owners of that business, that are shareholders in that business, that depend on the profit of that business. That take that business and approach it very, very differently.

So when they go and contribute their three hours towards that business, they do it with a very different mindset.

One Small Town Businesses as Investment Opportunities

Suddenly, as an investor, if I invest into a business in a small town, I — the investor, by the way, can never own more than 30% of the business. That’s the maximum that we allow.

So the business plans are set up so that investors invest the funding capital and they retain 30% of the business. The 60% belongs to the community because the community does the work, the labor. And 10% is retained for the One Small Town management locally, nationally and internationally. Because, you know, that’s how we’re going to be able to have funds to keep running the different One Small Town offices.

There is no money coming into those offices other than the success of the businesses created by the small town businesses. So it’s the bottom up, not top down.

Well, it’s again an example how the people, the people power, create the success on every level.

So as an investor from outside, my investment, I go into partnership with an entire community. That means every member of that community is my partner. And wants my business to succeed as much as they want it to succeed, or as much as I want it to succeed, because they have a vested interest in the profits.

So this is a game changer on every possible level.

The other big thing that we’ve done, that we’re about to do, is to start issuing investor tokens, and this is a way to allow communities themselves to crowd fund their own businesses.

So every business plan — so this is how it works:

We get together. You launch One Small Town in your community. You become the ambassador. You start signing up members and every member that you sign up pushes the value of the Infinity token a little bit more. You start doing this.

You have a creative think tank with your members. What kind of businesses can we start? What kind of businesses can we start with very little money, if any? What kind of businesses can we do business plans for that we need, you know, maybe $10,000, $50,000, $100,000? And what kind of businesses cost us $5 million or $10 million? And what kind of businesses do we think we can start when it cost us $100 million or more? And start developing these business plans because we gotta think big.

How much food can we grow? How much land is available?

We have different models to go into partnerships with farmers and land owners and traditional leaders in the Americas and countries where you have traditional leaders that own vast amounts of land.

Where very lucrative and exciting partnerships for the land owners, for farmers, even municipalities and governments if they’re not using the land.

So we start coming up with ideas for the businesses. And then we start writing business plans for those businesses. Those business plans get loaded onto the One Small Town platform and they get connected to a project management system that gets connected to an accounting system. Just so that it’s online and all your accountants can use it. Plus it’s all free of charge. There’s no cost to any other One Small Town members.

And then the project management system is connected to the accounting system. And the accounting system then allocates the investment funds to that specific business on a monthly drawdown based on what the business plan requires.

So it is a completely transparent situation that everyone can see what’s going on. No one can steal the money and run away with it.

And to come back to the investment thing. (So, Emil, if you want to say anything, just raise your hand and I’ll let you chip in.)

But the key thing here is that every business plan will need the investment amount. So we want to allow our communities, or give the opportunity to the people in our communities, to become shareholders in their own businesses first. And not some outside rich people that always own the businesses in your town.

So every business that we start that lands up on the platform, we issue a token. If it’s, say, a dairy — we’re starting a dairy. So we issue 1,000,000 dairy tokens for the town of Nora.

Let’s use our example town in Sweden. We decide we’re gonna start a One Small Town dairy and we need to raise $2,000,000 to start that business. And run for two years until we become profitable.

We need to raise $2,000,000. So we issue 1,000,000 Nora dairy tokens at $2.00 each to raise $2,000,000.

So we’re never gonna release more or less than 1,000,000 tokens for any business, right? And the million tokens will then have a value based on how much we need to raise. So we’re going to issue 1,000,000 tokens at $2.00 each to fund the Nora dairy. And then we open that up to all our members in Nora to buy those tokens. So they become shareholders in that business. That funding is 30% of that business.

So I literally am buying a piece of 30% by the number of tokens that I’ve bought. And those tokens — now you’re benefiting in two ways. Now you earn a token and you’re getting annual dividends, profits, from that dairy. So you got two benefits here.

You’re not just a shareholder, you’re also a token holder. And that token might become a lot more valuable than the dividends from that dairy at some point in the future.

So you see what we’re doing here? We’re really, really using the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation on every possible level.

This is just explaining how we are about to fund some of the exciting new businesses. If we can’t raise the $2,000,000 for the dairy, then we open it up to the country. And hopefully we’ll raise it from the people in the rest of the country. If we can’t raise it there, then we open it up to the world. And this way we try and retain the investment from the people of the community first. Then the country. And then the rest of the world. To keep the money local.

So it’s not just ‘buy local’. Like a lot of towns and communities are going ‘buy local’, ‘buy local’. We’re doing a lot more than that.

We invest local, manufacture local, grow local, buy local, export local and bring in the profits into our community to benefit us locally.

00:50:49

How Will OST Protect Itself from Mr. Global?: “The system is rigged to always destroy humanity.”

Reiner:

You know, Dexter is not just a lawyer, he’s an economist too. So he’ll ask the questions that concern the economics or the money, the monetary system.

I have one question in particular.

It is almost certain that the other side — Mr. Global, that world which is about to collapse, but it’s still there — that they’re going to try and do everything in their power to stop this from evolving. Infiltrate. Invent all kinds of legal or whatever rules.

How are you going to protect yourselves against that?

Michael:

Yeah, it’s a very important question. And this is why I made it very clear right up front — is that we don’t fight the system. Because the moment we start fighting the system, we’re gonna lose.

People need to understand this. You cannot beat the system. The system is rigged to always destroy humanity, so we can’t fight them.

So we are playing by their rules. We’re using their tools. We’re using their money. We’re using the banks. We’re using the legal systems, using everything that they’ve created to enslave us. But we’re using that to now benefit us and help us.

That’s why I call it — We’re using the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation.

And in every small town —

I jumped — I actually digressed a little bit earlier when I spoke about what is the potential of the profits being made in a small town.

So right now our objective is that any town of 10,000 people or more should be turning over — through the businesses that they start — should be turning over $1 billion, a minimum $1 billion per annum.

If you’re not doing that, then you’re doing something wrong.

It’s not going to happen overnight, but that’s our goal. That’s our objective. That’s where we’re heading.

And you know, money talks, bullshit walks. Unfortunately, that’s the world we live in.

And the stronger our communities become financially, the more difficult it is to knock them over or to undermine them. So every One Small Town community needs to become as financially strong as quickly as possible. Because then it’s very difficult to infiltrate, to overturn, to undermine, because that financial strength in fiat currency becomes the strength of that community — to stand united and protect that wealth that they’ve created for themselves while they’ve got this whole other wealth behind them.

There’s infinite supply of food and technology. And I’m not even going to talk about the other technology, but just to let you know that we have all the technology you can imagine that will be implemented in these small towns.

I’ll let your imagination run wild. I’m not even going to mention the technology, because that gets dangerous.

Reiner:

Well, I would think, Michael, that as I am absolutely convinced that all the creative people with all the intuition, and all that what makes us human, are on our side of the fence, they will be attracted to this.

And therefore there will be competition between the One Small Town concept and the other side. But they can’t win.

I mean, they’re collapsing anyhow. But if this kind of a competition sets in, there’s no one there to support their ideas and their systems because they don’t have any ideas. All the people with the ideas are going to be on our side of the fence.

So it does look very, very promising.

I’ll have to look into this in much more detail, of course, and I will, but that’s exactly what we’ve been talking about for at least three years.

You’ve been dealing with this for much longer. But many people who have only woken up through this wake-up call — which corona is, as far as I’m concerned — they will, all of them, have understood that the system will not survive.

And we have to get out from under it, so to speak, and we have to create our own. And this sounds extremely promising.

What do you think, Dexter, as an economist?

00:55:07

On the Importance of Decentralization & Safeguards Against Future Centralization

Dexter:

I completely agree with you, Reiner. One of the words that basically comes to mind is decentralization.

Based on what you have said, Michael, I want to find out how are you going to ensure that your initiative is not gonna get to a point where everything is centralized.

Because that’s one of the biggest obstacles that humanity is actually faced with, especially when one has regard to huge, big corporate companies. Their main goal, and that’s basically for the elite, is to say we have to centralize because when we centralized we can then control.

So from what you’ve said, you confirmed that power, authority, sovereignty is basically given back to the people.

So then the big question is how are you going to ensure at all times that there is not going to be a point where one will actually have to deal with a centralization issue itself?

00:56:16

Michael:

A very important question, Dexter. And this is why it’s taken so long to develop the system and learn from our experiences and answer questions like this.

You know, I have — since 2005 I have done lectures in more than 35 countries, probably in more than 500 cities of the world.

I’ve done evening lectures, one-day workshops, weekend workshops and week-long workshops on the One Small Town. And so you can imagine how many questions I’ve faced over the years.

And I can tell you there has never, ever, ever been a time that, within the group of people participating in the One Small Town workshop, that we did not solve the problem that was brought up by the people in that meeting, in that workshop.

So this is the most exciting thing that I can share with you. So think about this.

Decentralization is really — this is the foundation of One Small Town, where every community is its own master. But we’ve created the platform and the blockchain through which all these communities are interconnected. That if that community in Cape Town suddenly needs — they realize that we haven’t grown enough apples for next season, then the system is used to put up there ‘we’re going to be short 200,000 apples’. And some other One Small Town up in Caribou or whatever is gonna say, ‘hey, we’ve created too many apples’. And they put it up there. So it becomes an exchange mechanism between the small towns.

And that exchange mechanism becomes free because this is part of the ethos of the One Small Town initiative.

Not only that, but one of the most exciting and attractive attributes of this, or benefits, is that if you’re a member of One Small Town in Germany, right, and you decide you want to come visit your cousin in Cape Town or outside of Cape Town somewhere for a few months, you arrive there and you go to the town and it happens to be a One Small Town. So you arrive at the One Small Town office. You give them your membership card. They scan it and they know exactly what you have contributed and what value you have presented to your small town in Germany, where your skills and abilities are. If you’re a master carpenter that you are training others, you know young students, to become carpenters, or you’re a master cake maker or an engineer or whatever.

They know exactly who you are and what you can contribute to their small town outside of Cape Town. And they say, ‘hi, welcome, Michael. Welcome to our town’. And they log you on to the system as a member of that specific town, and immediately, based on your experience, the blockchain then allocates you to where you are most needed with your special skills, abilities and talents.

And you start that week. You get a message on your phone, saying please, you know, report here for three hours. Or you can then tell them I’d love to teach art. Or I’d love to teach this. And then they’ll log you in as a teacher that’s going to be teaching this. And for that you get your tokens. And at the end of the month you go to the One Small Town superstore, get your food and everything else that you get in your basket and you get a portion of all the profits, dividends, from all the businesses — profits that we’ve created in our businesses.

So you can literally move to another town anywhere in the world slot into that community and be able to not just survive, but live very, very well, have everything you need and be respected and honored within that community from the moment you arrive because the people know what you’re contributing to their community.

So it is a completely decentralized system. No one can ever centralize this. It’s impossible.

01:00:11

On the Threat of Track & Trace Technology

Reiner:

What about the dangers of tracking and tracing with this system?

Michael:

Well, that’s a very important question. And those dangers will always be there.

And my answer to questions like this is, the same technology that is used to track and trace people is available to neutralize the tracking and tracing technology.

And we know those kind of people. We have the people that can cure disease. We have the people that know how to generate electricity.

They are many. They are all on our side.

They all participating in larger and larger numbers, but that’ll come out of the woodwork as this thing progresses.

And that includes telecommunication. It includes, you know, frequencies. It includes broadcasting. It includes everything.

The same people that work for these big telecommunication companies are just ordinary people that may have started out in a small town somewhere. And they are thousands and thousands and thousands of very smart people that do not like the system.

And the moment they have an opportunity to do something good for a small community that they want to be part of, guess what they’re going to choose.

Dexter:

Then I want to find out, Michael, when it comes to the value of the Infinity token, I’ve heard you actually say it can actually be pegged to the dollar. And we know — it’s common knowledge — the dollar, when we talk about the dollar, we talk about the fiat currency.

And I think that’s one of the major concerns for humanity as well.

Is it going to be possible at some point that your Infinity token can actually be pegged to any mineral commodity like gold, silver, diamonds, etc.?

Michael:

Yes, it is. The only reason we pegged it to the dollar is just to give people the perception of the value.

The token is infinitely powerful because somebody just worked for three hours. So, you know, how much value is somebody’s three hours worth? And imagine a million people around the world working three hours a week?

Imagine 20 million or 100 million people working three hours a week. By the time we get to that level, the value of the token becomes irrelevant really, quite frankly.

You see, so what we’re doing is transitioning from this system, the current system, into a new system. And with that transitioning, using the current banking systems and the ratios and rationale that people can relate to.

But as it grows and gets bigger and bigger, people pay less and less attention to the value of the token, because they’ll be exchanging the token between themselves.

Out of sight. Out of mind. No one can interfere with how many tokens I send you. It’s free. It’s instant.

I send it from my wallet to your wallet. You can give me your house. You can sell me your house. I’ll send you 1,000 tokens and you transfer the house to my name, you know. So people will be doing all kinds of trades.

But for me, the most important part is for the people at the lowest level, the people that have nothing. And you know, South Africa. This is a very important part for South Africa.

So my heart always looks at how do we handle third world situations or impoverished countries where people have nothing. They don’t have jobs. Most of our towns have 60-70-80% unemployment.

You know, the people in Europe can’t imagine that kind of situation. So it’s a very different situation.

So we start looking at community kitchens. Something as simple as a finding a hall where a church has already got a kitchen. The church becomes a member of the One Small Town community. Now when they cook food for the people, they’re actually getting an Infinity token. They’re a member of One Small Town.

When we start making dividends from our businesses, each one of those church members starts to receive dividends and Infinity tokens and everything else.

So it brings the community together. The food community kitchen becomes the heart of the community. Where those that have nothing — they wake up in the morning with nothing — they at least now have somewhere to go.

They can join and go and clean the streets. Or help in this business or that business. And at the end of a three hour shift they get their token and they go to the community kitchen and get a nice plate of food.

So that’s a life changer for people in those kind of situations. You know, first world countries don’t understand that.

We understand that very, very clearly here. And in Brazil and India and other countries like that, you know.

So I’m very, very passionate about those kind of things — that foundational, beautiful structure that really helps the people on the ground in the One Small Town initiative.

Dexter:

Can you mentioned just a few examples here in South Africa, whose got the Small Town initiatives, Michael?

Michael:

Yes. So we started out in Kuruman. And we got very excited in Kuruman, because we had the mayor there that really liked the idea. And we all believe that it was gonna work because the mayor and the council is going to help promote it to the people and so forth.

Well, you know, unfortunately — and I don’t want to speak ill of the mayor or anyone there, because there are some wonderful people there, and they truly — their heart was in it.

Unfortunately the political system prevented it from happening. You know, meeting after meeting, council meeting after council meeting, resolution after resolution. And six months later, nothing is happening. And that was our baptism by fire — to learn that we cannot work with councils. We cannot work with politicians. We cannot work with mayors.

And there was just a reminder of why I got out of politics, why the Ubuntu movement and the One Small Town initiative got out of politics.

This was just a quick reminder.

So now we have a number of small towns that are brewing, that are buzzing. But ambassadors are still learning. And they’re trying to figure out how to how to get this off the ground. And this is brand new.

Remember, we’re building this from the ground up. You know this isn’t — we’re creating something that’s never been done before. So some some ambassadors are really a lot more active. Or they see it clearly or they have more experience.

So in Barrydale, Western Cape, that’s our newest One Small Town. And I expect that’s going to be the town that’s really going to rock and roll, and show and lead by example.

We’re doing so many exciting things in Barrydale already. And our ambassador there, Graham Abbott, is just an incredible guy — an incredibly talented and very, very experienced entrepreneur, self-driven guy.

And these are the kind of ambassadors that we need — people that are self driven, that have got diverse experience and all kinds of businesses and activities. How do you start things up? How to find solutions for problems that seem insurmountable? These are the kind of people we need as ambassadors because they’re the guys are going to start — the guys and gals — they’re going to start this thing up right.

Reiner:

I think that’s what it really — it is not always the leaders, the so-called leaders of a community you need to talk to.

But if it’s a really, a real grassroots movement, you have to talk to the people themselves.

We just realized that in New Zealand. You have to talk to the Hapu, the people themselves. Some of the leaders have sold out to the government, to the corporate government, so that’s why you need to get the hearts and minds of the people themselves.

I think that’ll make all the difference.

01:07:46

Examples of Current One Small Town Initiatives

Michael:

Yeah, yeah, absolutely, right. We’ve learned the same. Exactly the same here.

So you know, every traditional leader in South Africa that we talked to just loves it. They they love it, they want it. They’re offering us land.

So in terms of land, especially in the areas that there’s loads of land available among the traditional leaders, we have a lot of land that we can go grow things.

So yeah, just to give you an example in Lebanon. By the way, Lebanon is by far the most the biggest success we have with One Small Town. Our ambassador there, Fayez Mu*** [spelling unknown], in the last nine months has performed miracles.

It’s truly spectacular what has happened. They have started the One Small Town Art Gallery. They’ve got lands that they’ve started to plant. All kinds of medicinal plants, including oregano, to extract oregano oil for medicinal purposes. It’s a very high profit yielding business.

They’ve they’ve got lots of land allocated to them, going into partnership with farmers to grow all kinds of other medicinal plants, medicinal honey. Beekeeping. All the products also made from from beekeeping. All health products and shampoos and soaps, et cetera.

They’ve got primary water in a very, very deep well that the water is absolutely beautiful and healthy. That’s been tested. That they are about to start bottling. As primary, healing water for bottling and export as a One Small Town product from Ras el-Metn, Lebanon. Like Fiji Water, you can buy everywhere in the world. Well, very soon you’ll be able to buy Ras el-Metn primary water.

They’ve started the art gallery, which is, and I’d love to talk to you about the art gallery, which — we’re changing the rules of selling art around the world completely. Which is one of my pet projects because I’m an artist at heart as well.

And the other big thing that we’re launching in Lebanon, in Ras el-Metn, is our first health and wellness center. A five-story building with some of the latest alternative healing modalities. Where 40 of the top doctors in Lebanon have have volunteered 30% of their time to come and help and work in this health and wellness center — and only take a small portion — only take a 30% cut of what they do for that health and wellness center.

This is unheard of, so we are opening the hearts and minds of medical professionals who — many of whom are just, you know, money driven and success driven.

We’re now finding those healers and health industry professionals that want to do good, that want to help people, that want to heal people. And this is going to be our first beautiful example of a health and wellness center.

We’re about to launch the health token. I think we’re gonna be launching 1,000,000 tokens for $5 because we need to raise $5,000,000. And again, we start locally and then go outwards and raise that $5 million for 30% of that of that investment.

And the business plan for that is mind blowing. It’s absolutely mind blowing. It’s incredibly detailed and the most exciting part of it is that it actually shows a profit of around $7 to $8 million just in the first year after launching. No, no, it’s crazy. It’s crazy.

So now that business plan has become a model for a health and wellness center for every other country, every other small town with with slight, obviously, adaptations for the new specific environment.

But now we have — this is how it’s going to happen. Every time we launch a new business plan for a certain situation, that business plan becomes the property of One Small Town members all over the world. They can take it and use it for their community to launch that business in their community, raise funds on an adapted version of that business plan for their community.

It could be a brewery, it could be a cement factory. It could be built making cornflakes. It could be whatever you can image.

Reiner:

So it’s the exchange of the best ideas then.

Michael:

Yeah, exactly. Exactly. Yeah.

Dexter:

Michael, excuse me. You’ve been talking about the Infinite token. And I’m thinking do you have an app?


Michael:

Yes, it’s not an app within the One Small Town website, One Small Town platform. It’s a secure blockchain platform environment, so it’s like an app within that.

In fact, I think, if I’m right we’re launching the digital wallet. It was either launched today or tomorrow, in the next day or two we’re launching the One Small Town digital wallet, which means that any member, anywhere in the world, if you’ve got Infinity tokens in there, you can send them free of charge, out of sight or mind of any bank or government, to anyone you want in the world, as long as they are a One Small Town member. It’s instant. And it’s for free (boom).

Let me tell you, I’ve seen this happen. The excitement that you experience and the joy when you see that happen, when somebody sits next to you, they say I’m going to send you Infinity token now. And they just click (boom) and it appears in your wallet. You go, ‘oh, my God’.

You just realized how powerful that is. You just realized that we have created an alternative trading system. An alternative exchange system.

Should the global banks collapse tomorrow, we already have a solution for it. We don’t have to build anything.

It exists, it’s ready. And anyone in the world can use it immediately. And it’s free.

01:13:58

On Using the Same Technology the Globalists Use to Control Us, to Liberate Us

Reiner:

So you’re using as you’re saying the tools of enslavement as tools of liberation. You’re using all of the tech, all of the available technology. But instead of what they’re doing — they’re using it to control us — you’re using it to liberate us.

That’s the ultimate goal of this. You’re simply making use —

Everything has two sides as we all know. You can use energy for good and for bad purposes.

So what you’re doing is you’re using all of the technology that they’re using for bad purposes for good purposes.

It’s a very simple approach, but it makes a lot of sense. And if you can protect —

Michael:

That’s exactly what it is.

What I need to add — it’s very important that you brought us back to that thought — is because I’ve noticed that some of our members, and even sometimes people that want to become ambassadors —

(And historically some of our ambassadors that weren’t quite ready to take on the role, maybe because we also don’t know how to interview ambassadors. How do you know whether it’s going to be a good ambassador or a bad ambassador? We don’t know. We take a chance with everyone we bring on board. We’re building this from the ground up.)

So I’ve also noticed that many of our members — well not many — some of our members that are still little hippie-minded, little freedom-bunny-minded, and, you know I love spirituality — I’m the most spiritual bunny in the world if I want to be — but at the same time, I realize that that’s not going to put bread on the table. I need to go and plant the food, to make create the food.

So we’ve had to implement this very strict control mechanism. The way that corporations control their systems ,so no one can steal from them.

We’ve had to set this in motion and set this up for our members to use, so that they can’t get ripped off. No one can run off with their ideas or their money or their businesses.

And sometimes some of our slightly, you know, airy-fairy members don’t yet, don’t quite get it. They think that we now want to become draconian corporations that want to control everything.

No, not at all. We’re not controlling anything. We’re just giving you the platform to use for your own control and protection.

But if you want to be part of One Small Town, you have to be on the platform. Otherwise you can’t be part of One Small Town.

Otherwise, how will the system know whether your members have done work for three hours somewhere in a Siberian village? You’re out there in the Amazon jungle or in the bloody Outback in Australia. How will we know if somebody’s going to contribute their three hours?

So, just like you said. We’ve built this very powerful system, this tool, this monster that is aiding and helping the people to be able to connect and share. And no one can rip them off and no one can steal anything that they’ve created.

So it’s there for the benefit of the community, not for my benefit. Believe me, I’ve sacrificed everything I have to get to this stage. And when I say everything I have, I’m not kidding.

Reiner:

It sounds and looks great.

I will, and Dexter too, we will take a very close look so that we will be able to connect you with all the right people. Because
I think that’s ultimately what it takes.

This idea, if it is going to fly worldwide, needs a lot of supporters from our side of the fence.

The other side, we don’t care about, but from our side of the fence. And they have to be absolutely — they have to be convinced that it works.

And they have to be — I’m sure it work — but they also have to be convinced that it’s safe from infiltration and control.

01:17:53

An Idea Whose Time Has Come

Michael:

Yeah, it’s very important. Thank you for saying that, Reiner.

And it’s people like you — and your influence is vast globally, obviously. Especially during this COVID era, you’ve become a a global celebrity on the social media.

So I’m very grateful that you took this interview or this conversation with us. With me and with Emil.

Thank you, Dexter, for participating. So you’re an absolute joy. I didn’t even realize that you were going to join us from South Africa. So it makes my makes my heart jump even more with joy. So it’s wonderful.

And this is working. It’s an idea whose time has come. It’s taken 17 years to get here.

But watch this space. It’s growing exponentially. And a year from now, who knows where we’re going to be.

We might have 100,000 towns signing up to the One Small Town initiative on the platform. Because the intention is that it becomes a completely automated process that we don’t have to intervene. And that’s why we’re working very, very hard to make sure that everything works — the platform, the blockchain, works.

Because once people want to sign up, it’s gotta be smooth. We can’t have gremlins in there.

Taking a Closer Look at the Technology & the Possibility of Surveillance

Reiner:

Yes, I can see that and the one thing that most people, when it comes to setting up your own self-sufficient systems, have been worried the most about is what do we do about the monetary system.

What about the —

We don’t want to be controlled by CBDC. We want to be absolutely free and not controlled by anyone.

Now, the tools you’re using can be used for two purposes. As I said before, for a good purpose and for a bad purpose.

And from what it sounds like — we’ll have to take a much closer look — but from what it sounds like you’re using it for a really good purpose. So that people will not have to be afraid that somebody is watching over their shoulder and trying to see what they’re doing 24/7.

That’s the one big worry that most people have. So we’ll have to convince them that there is no risk, no danger of this happening in this system.

Otherwise, I applaud you. This is great.

This is probably exactly what everyone’s been looking for from our side of the fence.

Emil:

If I can put in a word with that whole fear. When you make everything local, that fear disappears.

But what happens if someone wants to take control of you when your local environment is running and functioning?

They can’t do it so. So the solution is simple.

Michael:

Yeah, that’s a very important point to bring up.

Yeah, Reiner, thank you so much for your interest.

Thank you, Dexter.

If if you want to discuss anything at any stage, if you want to jump on a zoom call or quiz me on anything, please feel free to do so.

We’re building this up and we do need the influence of people like you, and all the others that you have in your pool of influence.

Let’s get this growing. Remember, this is free.

No one is forced to join One Small Town. And the beautiful thing is that you don’t have to jump off the cliff into uncharted waters to try something new.

No, nobody has to leave their job. Nobody has to stop doing what they’re doing. All they have to do is become a member and contribute three hours a week. That’s all it takes.

Getting More People on Board

Reiner:

It sounds so fantastic, but it also feels good.

So, we’ll have a follow up meeting on this, because we’re gonna have to get some more people on board. Some more people who really, really will be able to help set this up.

I know there are a lot of people out there who’ve been kind of waiting at the sidelines to see if there’s something coming up where they can chip in. A lot of very well-intentioned and very smart people.

But I think maybe this is it.

Michael:

Those are the kind of people that I know you have, obviously, a good reach to. But even more so, I hope that this message also reaches the conscious millionaires and billionaires out there, who know that the investment markets are rotten to the core, that are looking for new conscious, humanitarian investments with consequence and infinite potential for growth.

One Small Town is exactly that. You’re investing into communities, entire communities, that you’re going to help turn upside down and turn into to hubs of creative creation, creative new businesses, food production, health and Wellness, everything you imagine as a powerful individual, powerful financial support. You can take a small town and completely turn it upside down.

From the small towns around the world that are collapsing at an increasingly rapid pace, we can turn that around. And we just need the conscious millionaires and billionaires to realize that One Small Town is that new opportunity that they never imagined would present itself.

Reiner:

The stock market is crashing anyway.

Dexter:

Thank you so much, Michael. I really love what you have presented.

I think for me, one of the core message is that you are basically, through your initiative, you are putting power back into the hands of the individual, back into the hands of the communities.

And I think it is going to be a great success, especially when actually talking from a South African developing country’s point of view. When you look at communities, communities are basically the backbone of any society.

So you cannot even start talking about the society if you don’t look after the best interest of communities.

And as far as what I can see, and to what you have presented, I don’t have any doubt in my mind that this is something that is going to be successful.

This is something that is going to ensure that humanity can continue to thrive for generations to come.

So I wish you all the best, and I am definitely going to take up your offer. I will get your contact details. I’ll actually visit your website as well, get in touch with you. And I would love to actually have another zoom meeting with you.

Thank you so much, Michael. Great success.

Michael:

Thank you, Dexter.


Reiner:

I have nothing to add to that. Now that Dexter has said it, I can only confirm it.

Yeah, this sounds like the best idea. This is the way out of this collapsing system. That’s it.

Michael:

Well, I’d like to thank you, gentlemen.

Emil, thank you for setting it up.

Dexter, thank you for joining us from Cape Town, I believe.

And Reiner, it’s a great honor and pleasure to meet you. I’ve followed your work especially throughout this COVID period, this, this plandemic. And I’m deeply grateful for this meeting.

And I want to end on this note.

If it’s not good for everyone, it’s no good at all.

Reiner:

You’re right.

Thank you very much, Michael. It’s been an honor and a pleasure. Talk to you later.

 

Connect with One Small Town

Connect with Michael Tellinger

Connect with ICIC (International Crimes Investigative Committee

Info on Infinity Tokens

(If you have trouble finding a workable link to buy tokens, try here.
Use the menu on the left side to select ‘Buy Tokens’)


See Related: 

One Small Town & the Restoration of Human Freedom: Michael Tellinger Interview With Jerm Warfare

Michael Tellinger: Money Was Created to Enslave Humanity

Reiner Fuellmich: On Standing With the Māori People of New Zealand Who Never Ceded Their Independence

Cover image credit: TheDigitalArtist




Maui Wildfires and the Theft of Sacred Hawaiian Land

Maui Wildfires and the Theft of Sacred Hawaiian Land

by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
August 14, 2023

 



Survivors of the Maui fire say that they received no warning and that the flames appeared so quickly that escape was difficult. Everything was suddenly in flames and many found refuge in the ocean for hours while their homes burned to the ground and into the same powdery ash footprint we’ve seen in recent years. So far, it is estimated that nearly a thousand people have died. Locals are worried this includes hundreds of children who were home due to school being canceled that day.

Several people are reporting that the government is not only doing little to help but they are blocking local efforts to do so and not allowing local donations through. And blocking life-saving medicine because it isn’t federally approved.

The people of Maui are on their own for now. And aside from the federal government’s bureaucratic failure, they have good reason to be suspicious. Just like what we saw five years ago in Paradise California, there was nothing normal about these fires. Within a day of burning, it was like a bomb went off.

Local residents have been reporting bright flashes of light. One was captured by a home security camera that appears to have been the start of the Olinda fire.

Many people are saying that it was Directed Energy Weapons. We know that most major governments already have them. And during the California fires, online weather maps recorded what looks like a laser from above striking an area just before it bursts into flames.

In his research, Denis Mills discovered that the incendiary aluminum and barium nanodust from chemtrails is most likely fueling the ferocity of today’s so-called super wildfires. And on the day before the Maui fires broke out, locals were reporting a heavy overcast from chem-trailing that they’d never seen before.

It’s also interesting to note that the Maui police chief was the incident commander for the Las Vegas mass shooting in 2017.

Lahaina is considered to be a historic and sacred land. It was the capital of the Kingdom of Hawaii before it was taken by the United States. It’s been occupied by native Hawaiians ever since who are defiantly opposed to the mainland outsiders who have been buying up land with no respect for local culture. Not just BlackRock and Vanguard, but Billionaires like Mark Zuckerberg who owns more land on Kauai than what the government of Kauai owns. And Oprah Winfrey who has bought over a thousand acres of land in Hawaii. Including a new 870 acres in Maui she bought this Spring.

In 2018 the Paradise wildfires broke out exactly where the United Nations have plans to somehow make off-limits to humans. And that same year a report on wildfire prevention was published that was focused on the exact same areas in Maui where the fires just broke out.

Governor Josh Green has been putting the World Economic Forum’s Great Reset agenda ahead of Hawaiian interests. Just weeks before the fire he unveiled an emergency proclamation on housing that eliminates the Land Use Commission. Allowing the government more leeway to build as they see fit. Such as building 15-minute Smart Cities run by Artificial Intelligence. Just like they’ve been planning for years.

 

Connect with Greg Reese




Dr. Joseph P. Farrell: Strange Wildfire Incidents Move to Maui

Joseph P. Farrell: Strange Wildfire Incidents Move to Maui

by Joseph P. Farrell, Giza Death Star
August 14, 2023

 

By now we’ve all heard of the disastrous, and sad, fires on Maui that have wiped out hundreds of people’s homes, livelihoods, and tragically ended the lives of many.

If you’re wondering why I’ve not commented until now, it is because  like many of you, I’m  shocked and saddened that these fires caused so much damage, and seemingly struck without much of a warning. Unlike the propatainment media, I did not want to comment in my usual fashion about my suspicions about these fires, because it was just not “right” nor the time to do so.

Needless to say, such attempt to maintain some tact was utterly absent from the propatainment media which wasted no time invoking its nutty climate change narrative, beating even the Bai Den Dzhao misadministration to that punch. Indeed, in a rare display of sensitivity and tact, and to his rare credit, the “president” refraining from making any reference to that narrative.

But comment and speculation is necessary, particularly for anyone paying attention to the strange resemblance of what has happened in Maui, to what happened in California years earlier with equally strange fires, particularly those in Paradise, California.

We all recall the strange pictures from those fires: homes and businesses completely burned to the ground, while next to them, bushes, trees, and shrubs remained alive and unburned.

Perhaps these strange results are the bizarreries one comes to  expect from plasmas, i.e., perhaps they are “firestorm equivalents to Leidenfrost layers”.

Whether or not that wild and “out there” speculation makes any sense is really irrelevant, because my point is  that one can contrive almost any “naturalistic” explanation to account for the strangeness of what we saw. It becomes more difficult when one remembers the pictures of melted roadbeds on bridges, buckled and melted guard rails, right next to abundant – and unburned – underbrush.

Again, naturalistic explanations are possible: the metal in the roadbed or guard rails acted as heat conductors and actually channeled heat away from the underbrush. Maybe (but did they channel the fires away from the trees and underbrush? if so, how?).

Then from Paradise, CA, there were the pictures of homes with burned out electrical power boxes where, apparently, some of the fires had started.  Pictures from earlier fires showed clear evidence of vorticular behavior in the heat flows, reminiscent of the “fire vortices” reported by Germans and Japanese that survived the firebombings of Hamburg, Dresden, and Tokyo during the Second World War.

The bottom line is, naturalistic explanations are possible, though highly speculative, and a bit of a stretch.

Thus, the fires can also be explained in other, equally speculative but much more sinister ways. For example, initially I advanced the idea that one possible way to explain why trees and shrubs survived the ambient heat of fires right next to them that burned down homes and businesses was perhaps that the fires were triggered and initiated in conductive materials by very powerful microwave interferometry.

Others produced alleged pictures of the fires being initiated by lasers as “proof” that some sort of directed energy started the fires.

Pictures can, of course, be doctored and photoshopped, but their production indicates many others were at least thinking in similar terms.

My other “sinister speculation” was that the fires were initiated by the power grid itself. Every electrical circuit is also a small broadcast circuit, and the electricity in  the wires in one’s home could literally be modulated and pulsed by transients in such a fashion that they might possibly be used to initiate fires.  Of course I’m guessing, and my speculations are an attempt to rationalize what makes no sense.

With that in mind, however, there is already a bit of significant testimony by Dr. Kathy Forti, who was there when the fires began. I am grateful to our friend Catherine Austin Fitts for spotting this, and passing it along; it’s worth your consideration:

What Really Happened on Maui – I Was There

Note the following from Dr. Forti’s story:

A friend called me early on the morning of Tuesday, August 8th and told me he had a strong urge to visit Lahaina that day. Tempting me with lunch at Cool Cats, one of my favorite eateries in Old Lahaina, I said “Okay. Let’s go!”

The 30 minute drive was without incident, without winds, and without any warning advisories. As soon as we reached Lahaina, all power got zapped. Cell phone, internet, traffic lights, GPS, the 911 emergency system (which is never supposed to go down) and the power outage caused every store and shopping mall to immediately close. Nothing was open.

Then the winds came in, bringing with it a rare rainless hurricane with gusts from 60-80mph. Trees became uprooted and branches were coming down everywhere, along with power poles. I heard a crash behind me and where I was less than 30 seconds prior was a crashed and uprooted tree. It was time to get out of there.

Now first of all, I can empathize with what Dr. Forti is recording here, as it sounds suspiciously like the 100mph + winds I experienced just this last June where I live, which put Shiloh and I in our shelter for an hour and a half: the constant roar of the wind and the unbelievable lightning storm were like nothing I’ve ever seen or experienced before. My only advantage is that our warning system was not suspiciously “non-functional” prior to the event.

Hawaii’s system appears to have been “down”, and I’m reminded like many of you of that strange incident during the Trump administration when the warnings went off, and then were retracted. Now the system was completely down during a major weather emergency.

I’ll just come right out and say it: to me these incidents betoken some massive security problems, and possible deliberate interference with those systems.  And yes, I realize that means I’m stating that the whole sad Maui episode might have been a deliberately engineered event.

But just wait, because I’m not the one saying it: Dr. Forti is, and she was there:

No evacuation sirens ever went off that day when the fires began. They failed as well. My friend and I had to escape through the back road going all the way around the island as all traffic was blocked in the other direction. Many might not have known about this back route since GPS was down.

These fires were indeed strange. The night before both my friend and many others claimed to have had very restless sleep. I personally experienced a strange flooding wave of energy in my head, almost like seizure activity, which I have come to identity as dark energy coming in. This flooding energy continued on and off the next morning, more so when I was in Lahaina. This told me there was directed energy involved in what was occurring.

This was not just a random act of mother nature. It reminded me of the strange fires in Paradise, California a few years back which swept through and wiped it off the map. Their only crime was getting in the way of a high speed railway project slated to come through the town.

A little bit of history to draw your own conclusions: Historic Lahaina is the key harbor seaport on the island. The Lanai Ferry goes back and forth from there, all the commercial snorkeling and scuba diving firms set sail from there and tourists flock there in daily droves.

The problem with Historic Lahaina was that it had a large old Hawaiian community that was in the way of the developers. Now it’s like ground zero, declared a disaster area, and federal and states rules are probably going to be tossed aside. It’s a toxic mess. They will undoubtedly blame it all on climate change and welcome in the developers to totally bull doze and level it.

All over the island tracts of land are being bought up by corporations and no one knows who is behind them. Foreign interests? The people on this island are beginning to put the pieces of the puzzle together and suspect this was a major power land grab.

In January 2023 there was a Smart City Conference where they discussed turning Maui into a 15-minute “smart island”. Next month there is a Digital Summit to discuss turning the island digital and all AI. I kid you not. (Emphasis added)

What intrigues me most about this story are the remarks I’ve highlighted by italics: prior to the fires, Dr. Forti experienced a “strange flooding wave of energy” in her head, an energy that she describes as “almost like seizure activity.”

This, too, struck very close to home, for the very day of the big storm that hit here where I live, I was listening to the weather radio, and tracking the storms that began way out on the western edge of the state and followed an almost perfect straight line all across the state until it finally arrived here and struck right about midnight.  That whole day I had this very strange sensation of energy, vague and “in the background” and amorphous, but unsettling and causing a kind of anxiety and unfocussed mental state.

All I can say is that I knew that this storm was not normal, and I had the absolute distinct impression hours before it actually struck that when it struck here, it would cause massive damage and power outages, which it did. Similarly, my little dog Shiloh was also anxious and nervous all day, and constantly begging me for attention.

Dr. Forti notes that corporations are buying up all the land on Maui, and that “they” have plans to turn the island into an artificial intelligence/fifteen minute island prison. That may be one motivation  behind the firestorm. Others have pointed out the presence of certain populations there they want removed. Still others have written me and pointed out the concurrence of the Maui fires with the release of the film Oppenheimer.

The point is, many people are sensing something is “not right” about these fires, and you can number me among them. If so, and if someone has deliberately caused them as part of some sick agenda, or for personal or corporate or political gain, then amid our prayers for Mauians, we might also pray for the exposure of the perpetrators, and for them to face justice.

Some might complain that we don’t really know who “they” are. I would aver, on the contrary, that we do… the doctrine of mens rea is a very powerful thing, and some of them have already openly declared their “real mind”…

See you on the flip side…

 

Connect with Joseph P. Farrell

Cover image credit: US Coast Guard Station Maui




Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

Lahaina Was Destroyed by a Directed Energy Weapon

by Edward Hendrie, Great Mountain Publishing
August 11, 2023

 

There were some strange things about the alleged wildfire at Lahaina, Hawaii. Notably, the spokesman who explained what happened was NOT a fire official or anyone from the local government with any knowledge of fire fighting or emergencies. Instead, we find Major General Kenneth Hara, the commanding general of the Hawaii Army National Guard. He stated that he did not know what ignited the fires. But he opined that low humidity and high winds “set the conditions for the wildfires.” He is an army general; what does he know about forest fires?

There is reason to question the general’s claim. The wildfire would only make sense if a forest of trees surrounded the city of Lahaina. That is the first problem with the story. There is no forest near the town. Indeed, the satellite photo below shows that the tallest trees near the city belong to the Maui Kuaia Estate Cacao Farm. Cacao trees are pretty small ranging in height between 13 and 26 feet. But those trees are across a highway several hundred yards from the nearest building.

Notice that Lahiana, Hawaii is NOT surrounded by a forest of trees. The only dense area of trees would be the Maui Kuaia Estate Cocao Farm. Cacao trees are quite small ranging in height between 13 and 26 feet. That small clump of trees on the tree farm separated by a roadway and many hundreds of yards of barren land containing only scrub grass could not cause a massive conflagration alleged to have been caused by wildfires.

What about the trees within the city itself? There are lots of trees in the town. But when we look at the photos of the city after the alleged fire, we find that the trees in the town are mainly intact. Strangely buildings that have been destroyed allegedly by fire are surrounded by trees untouched by flames.

Something else is going on here. That something else is directed energy. The buildings were destroyed by directed energy weapons. Directed energy weapons use microwaves. They cause molecular destruction of materials that absorb them; wood remains unfazed because wood absorbs very little microwave radiation. It is similar to how you can put a paper plate in a microwave oven without concern that it will catch fire. But if you put aluminum foil into that same microwave oven, it will quickly begin to spark and burst into flames.

Directed energy is not new technology. Directed energy weapons were used during the 9/11 attacks on the World Trade Center. The book 9/11-Enemies Foreign and Domestic details the evidence that directed energy weapons were used on 9/11.


 

The pictures above and below are frames from an aerial video of the alleged wildfires that destroyed the city of Lahaina, Hawaii. The authorities do not know how the alleged fires started. Notice that buildings are leveled, but standing trees surround the destroyed buildings. How could the city have been destroyed by wildfires when the trees in the town are untouched by any flames? Notice in the video frame below there are two buildings completely leveled with unburned trees abutting the buildings. Nearby buildings are untouched by any fire. This is telltale evidence of directed energy weapons.

 

Notice in the video how the buildings are leveled to the ground, but the trees remain standing and unburned.

 

Connect with Edward Hendrie

Cover image based on creative commons work of:
debeeonmaui & tumisu




Who Caused the Fire in Hawaii?: On the WEF, Global Plans for Smart City Governance & Deliberate Destruction of Key Locations

Who Caused the Fire in Hawaii?: On the WEF, Global Plans for Smart City Governance & Deliberate Destruction of Key Locations

 

“…Because we all know the World Economic Forum are the ones pulling the strings. Right?

“So if we know that, when we see a fire like that, then the second that we hear that the plans are to bring in a Smart City, you’ll know why it was done.”

~ The End of the Beginning from ‘The Maui Experiment! How They Destroyed Lahaina to Bring In a WEF Smart City Governance…’ 

 

Truth Comes to Light editor’s note:

Below is a compilation of work by Sam Tripoli and The End of the Beginning YouTube channel, along with photo images courtesy of the US Coast Guard.

Transcript of Sam Tripoli’s short video at X was prepared by Truth Comes to Light.

Links to related documents and articles are also provided as references.

~Kathleen

* Update by Sam Tripoli has been added. See his videos below. 1) People are being turned away by the military who want to help and donate. 2) The warning system didn’t go off and they are claiming it must have been a” malfunction”. 3) An executive order was signed in July stating they could take your land if you needed to be rezoned.

 

Who Caused the Fire in Hawaii?

Transcript:

So today we’re going to give a little update on the Hawaiian fires.

Now I want you to look at this footage. And this doesn’t look like a fire to me.
It looks like something almost exploded, or something went off.

Now what’s interesting is certain things are still standing, while other things are not.

Now the governor did say this is climate change doing this. Interesting.

What they don’t talk about is in January, how they had in Maui, a Smart City Conference to turn Maui into an entire Smart Island — changing everything to electric. Renewables. Solar panels. And pushing everybody into electric vehicles. 15-Minute Smart Cities.

So now what’s also interesting is next month, in September, Hawaii is hosting the Digital Government Summit, utilizing AI to govern the island.

Hmmm. It’s almost like they’re resetting something to start rebuilding for this, which they’re trying to push.

Now we look at all the climate change narrative that they’re going to try to push, but they’re not going to talk about the Weather Modification Act of 1976.

I highly recommend everybody look to this act. Because who is involved in the weather modification activities?

Department of Agriculture. Department of Defense. Department of Interior. EPA. And NASA.

So if they’re modifying the weather, then could they have caused this event?

So if we see that the Department of Defense and other factions are responsible for modifying the weather, well then if we look at Direct Energy weapons, we can maybe see how this can all relate to this event.

[Important update by Sam Tripoli]

Related Links:

Hungry Heroes Hawaii Emergency Fire Response
~~ Fundraiser
~~

 

Hawaii Digital Government Summit 2023

Hawaii International Conference on System Sciences 2023

 Weather Modification Act (1976)

World Economic Forum: Our alliance is creating smart city governance


 

The images below are courtesy of United States Coast Guard and are in the public domain.

Lahaina Lighthouse surrounded by ruins after August 2023 wildfire (source)

Burned out cars and the remains of buildings are seen in Lahaina town in this image captured Wednesday by U.S. Civil Air Patrol. (source)

Two Hawaii Army National Guard CH-47 Chinook perform aerial water bucket drops on the Island of Maui to assist the fight of wildfires, Maui, Hawaii, August 09, 2023. The two air crews performed 58 total bucket drops in 5 hours in up country Maui totaling over one hundred thousand gallons dropped on the fires. (U.S. National Guard Video by Air Force Master Sgt. Andrew Jackson) (source)

The Coast Guard, along with federal, state, and local partners continue to respond following the Lahaina wildfires in Maui, HI August 9, 2023. A total of 17 lives were saved from the water and 40 survivors were located ashore by Coast Guard Station Maui boat crews. (source)

Damage in the harbor of Lahaina on the island of Maui following a devastating wildfire, via the U.S. Coast Guard (source)

 

See related by The End of the Beginning YouTube channel:
‘The Maui Experiment! How They Destroyed Lahaina to Bring In a WEF Smart City Governance…’ 

 

That Didn’t Take Long! Look Who Donated $100 Million to Maui’s Smart City Rebuild!



 

Cover image credit: US Coast Guard (source) (source)


See Related Articles:

Chemtrails Exposed: The Deep State and the New Manhattan Project

“Apocalyptic Scene”: Out-of-Control Wildfire Spreads on Hawaii’s Maui Island

Wildfires As a Weapon: US Military Exposed

Dane Wigington: Geoengineering Is Fueling Firestorm Catastrophes

Dr. Reiner Fuellmich With Andrew Johnson on Undisclosed “Black Technology”, the Truth About 9/11, Planned UFO False Flag Events, Steven Greer’s “Disclosure Project”, Directed Energy Weapons, the Cover-Up of Free Energy Already Available, “Psychological Terrorism” & the Attack on Human Consciousness

DEW (Directed Energy Weapon) Beams Into New Madrid Seismic Zone as 1,100F Temps Flare Up

Geoengineering: Romanian General Emil Strainu on the Terrifying Possibilities of Geo-Warfare

Weather Warfare: Beware the US Military’s Experiments with Climatic Warfare

Australia Burning: Disaster Capitalism or Something Else?

Joseph P. Farrell: An Odd Thing About Those Fires in Greece…

Reiner Fuellmich With Peter Mac Isaac: Why Are Canada´s Forests Burning? 




Josh Mitteldorf: CO2 Is the Least of Our Worries | Yes, Ecosystems Are Collapsing. No, It Has Nothing to Do With CO2.

Josh Mitteldorf: CO2 Is the Least of Our Worries | Yes, Ecosystems Are Collapsing. No, It Has Nothing to Do With CO2.

 

“So, it’s true that we are at the warmest point in the last 100,000 years, but that has little to do with human activity. The 100,000 year cycle has a range of about 10o C, and human activity in the last 200 years is responsible for only about one 1o C. Compared to local effects in America and Europe during the Little Ice Age of the 18th century, the effect of all our burning of fossil fuels is lost in the noise. Global warming is a worldwide average, while the Little Ice Age was regional; but the point is that even in the last few hundred years, ecosystems have had to adapt to much larger changes than those that human activity has imposed.”

 

CO2 Is the Least of Our Worries
Yes, ecosystems are collapsing. No, it has nothing to do with CO2.

by Josh Mitteldorf, Unauthorized Science
August 4, 2023

 

Last week, Nobel physicist John Clauser came out of the Clausit to speak his own inconvenient truth about global warming and CONo good deed goes unpunished. Another physicist who was a personal hero of mine has expressed similar views. This is a big subject, and I don’t feel engaged enough with the issue to write a book, But I will say a few things about which I feel pretty certain, but to which Right Thinking People may take exception.

  1. Global ecosystems are indeed in crisis, and this is the result of human activity.
  2. But greenhouse gasses, CO2 and climate change are peripheral to this story. The net effect of CO2 emission is likely to be beneficial, if at all relevant.
  3. Environmental activism may be the most important movement on the planet today, and its diversion into a narrow focus on carbon is dangerous.
  4. Weather manipulation is a well-developed, sophisticated science being practiced on a global scale, without open scientific backing and without democratic consent. This, too, is a crime and a major danger.
1.  Ecosystem collapse

We know just enough to realize that ecosystems are complex and interdependent in more ways than we can understand. Ecosystems are robust, and the loss or replacement of a few species triggers adaptations so that the ecosystem continues in a new equilibrium. But ecosystems can also collapse if a keystone species is lost, or if it is sufficiently disrupted.

Some large fraction of the species on earth is either extinct or rapidly disappearing. It is impossible to offer a more quantitative estimate because most of the macroscopic species have not yet even been catalogued, and of the microscopic species, including bacteria and fungi, our understanding has barely scratched the surface.

At some point, ecosystems collapse and species disappear because other species on which they depend are disappearing. This is happening in large stretches of the world. Ocean life is seeking a new equilibrium after the pollution, overfishing, and the killing spree of the last 50 years in particular. Forests and wetlands the world over no longer support the diversity of life that they once harbored, and the collapse of biodiversity has a momentum that continues over decades.

Major reasons for this collapse include
  • habitat loss
  • deforestation
  • every war is an environmental disaster
  • widespread poisoning of insects, which are at the base of the animal food chain
  • insects are also pollinators, and plant life becomes fragile when insects disappear
  • draining of wetlands, mining of fossil water, and damming of rivers
  • deliberate targeting of apex predators, including lions, wolves, and whales
  • washing of topsoil into the rivers and oceans
  • wasteful practices in mining, agriculture, and industry
  • global travel, bringing invasive species that tend to homogenize ecosystems worldwide

Many people, consciously or otherwise, imagine a transhuman future in which the earth is paved over and food is grown hydroponically. We’ll eat lab-grown meat and live in a virtual paradise, even after we kill the ecosphere. This is a dangerous delusion! All life is interdependent. No species can survive outside an ecosystem. Bacteria manufacture chemicals crucial for life. Insects pollinate. Fungi recycle waste, make atmospheric nitrogen biologically useful, and connect trees underground. No species can exist without a rich ecosystem, and we don’t begin to understand all the connections that create a functional ecosystem. Mankind’s one attempt to create an artificial ecosystem, dubbed Biosphere 2, fell flat on its face within weeks.

In murdering nature, we are destroying the foundation for human life as well.

2.  Carbon dioxide has little to do with this
Anthropogenic global warming is a tiny fraction of the natural variations in earth’s temperature.

There are great natural cycles in the earth’s temperature. One of the best-documented is a cycle of about 100,000 years. The reasons are not well understood, but the present warm period in which human civilization has developed is not typical. Ice ages are typical. As recently as 12,000 years ago, the part of Pennsylvania where I live was under a glacier two miles thick. When these conditions inevitably return, it will create a far greater disruption to animal life and to human activity than anthropogenic warming. “We’re overdue for the next ice age,” and it may be that “global warming” is helping to stave off that destiny, at least temporarily.

So, it’s true that we are at the warmest point in the last 100,000 years, but that has little to do with human activity. The 100,000 year cycle has a range of about 10o C, and human activity in the last 200 years is responsible for only about one 1o C. Compared to local effects in America and Europe during the Little Ice Age of the 18th century, the effect of all our burning of fossil fuels is lost in the noise. Global warming is a worldwide average, while the Little Ice Age was regional; but the point is that even in the last few hundred years, ecosystems have had to adapt to much larger changes than those that human activity has imposed.

All the hype about a climate catastrophe based on carbon emissions is based on computer models that are woefully inadequate. These models have been wrong about the changes in the last 40 years since modeling began. They are no reliable guide to future climate response, though they are are continually being cited as authority. In the last 7 years in particular, CO2 emissions have continued and accelerated, atmospheric concentration has increased steadily, but temperatures have gone up and down.

Freeman Dyson makes the point that plants grow faster when there is more CO2 in the air, and when temperatures are warmer. Plants are the productive basis for all ecosystems, so ecosystems are enriched by higher CO2 levels. John Clauser makes the point that there is no evidence that a pattern of extreme weather events can be related to more CO2 in the air.

3.  The environmental movement has been derailed by the carbon narrative

Many people of good will are passionate about reducing their CO2 footprint. Many companies and organizations are profiting from scaring the public about climate change and selling solutions to enrich themselves such as carbon credits, or pushing nuclear power as a friendlier form of energy than burning wood, coal or petroleum products. (It is not.)

Government policies regarding energy could certainly be improved. The most effective thing we can do is to adopt technologies that use energy much more efficiently than we now do. Cars that get 200 miles per gallon of gasoline already exist, and public transit can be much more efficient.  Buildings can be designed so that they remain comfortable with much less energy input. Rocky Mountain Institute has been creatively documenting the necessarily policy changes for decades.

There is an urgent need for all of us to get back to advocating the diverse policy changes that are required to preserve and restore ecosystems, to slow and mitigate the Sixth Extinction. Reducing carbon emissions is dauntingly difficult, both technically and politically. Technically, because so much of what we do depends on fossil fuel energy, politically because the economic benefits of burning fossil fuels accrue locally, while the costs, if any, are spread across the globe.

Burning oil is associated with spills that devastate ocean life for decades; burning coal is associated with mountaintop removal; fracking causes earthquakes and pollutes groundwater. Cars cause smog and coal-burning power plants put mercury in the air. I’m not saying that fossil fuels are environmentally benign or that our dependence on carbon-based fuels is sustainable; only that atmospheric carbon dioxide is not the locus of the principal harms.

Focus on carbon emissions is the least effective kind of environmental advocacy, and it is probably counter-productive.

4.  Weather manipulation is everywhere, and it’s unacknowledged

Chemtrails are real, though the motivation for this vast, multi-billion dollar project is unclear. My best guess is that HAARP and similar large antennas are being used to push air masses around the globe with electrostatics and stratospheric heating, and that seeding the stratosphere with aluminum is part of a coordinated effort to send that radio energy to desired locations.

Dane Wigington has done more than anyone to document this. He has an encyclopedic knowledge of the phenomena, but I don’t believe he understands the motivation for weather manipulation. This is his introductory video.


Droughts and cold snaps are being weaponized to reduce agriculture output. Hurricanes are being steered toward inhabited areas. It may be that weather manipulation could be applied in a productive and broadly beneficial program, but evidence is that the opposite is being pursued.

I believe that the long drought in California, floods in Texas, and the recent transport of smoke from Quebec to blanket the densely populated Eastern US are all examples of weather manipulation. I believe that these engineered weather anomalies are being put forward as evidence that CO2 is deranging the weather. I realize that it is difficult to prove that any particular weather anomaly is engineered, but Wigington’s evidence convinces me.

But there is no doubt that the technology of weather manipulation has been under development for many decades, and present capabilities are unacknowledged. Who is manipulating the weather and what is motivating them? I think these are important, open questions.

The bottom line

Please redouble your advocacy for environmental protection in all its forms. Please educate yourself about chemtrails and geoengineering. And don’t worry about CO2.

 

Connect with Josh Mitteldorf

Cover image credit: Hans


See related:

Weather As A Force Multiplier:Owning The Weather In 2025 by USAF Air University, Air Command and Staff College 

Related articles found at Truth Comes to Light:

So-called ‘Climate Change’ as Seen by the Public Is Not the Problem; But Weather Geoengineering Is Destroying Everything on Earth?

Is The Sky Falling Or Is Just Weather Geoengineering “Killing Us Lightly”?

Magnetic Rain? [Short Video]: Documenting the Toxic Geoengineering of Our Skies

Geoengineering: Romanian General Emil Strainu on the Terrifying Possibilities of Geo-Warfare

Dane Wigington: Geoengineering Is Fueling Firestorm Catastrophes

Geoengineering, Toxic Skies & Plastic Rain in the US Rockies

Controlling Hurricane Ian? — The GeoEngineering Connection

Geoengineering: Fire And Ice

The Dimming, Full Length Climate Engineering Documentary




Vandana Shiva: Bill Gates and Silicon Valley Behind Push for ‘Farming Without Farmers, Food Without Farms’

Vandana Shiva: Bill Gates and Silicon Valley Behind Push for ‘Farming Without Farmers, Food Without Farms’
On the latest episode of Russell Brand’s “Stay Free,” scholar, environmental activist and food sovereignty advocate Vandana Shiva, Ph.D., discussed food fascism, the power of “philanthropy,” digital enslavement and how people can free themselves from this system.

by Brenda Baletti, Ph.D. , The Defender
August 2, 2023

 

“Human beings cannot have a relationship with nature, land and one another, it seems increasingly, without the intercedence of this corporate power,” comedian and political commentator Russell Brand told scholar and environmental activist Vandana Shiva, Ph.D., on the latest episode of his “Stay Free” podcast.

Brand asked Shiva, a food sovereignty and environmental activist, to explain how this corporate takeover of nature happened.

Shiva said the privatization of land and resources under colonialism was the first step in transforming nature into “either a mine or a dump.”

Today, she said, privatization has become so entrenched that mega-corporation Cargill can own every chicken, chicken production facility, and every input needed to raise chickens, and then dump all of its waste into public rivers.

The situation we face today could not have happened, she said, without the criminalization of farmers — for which she held media organizations like The Guardian responsible because they attack farmers instead of the corporations.

“If the drivers are the corporations,” she said, “you have to have the guts to bite the corporations. You don’t target the victims. The farmers are victims of this system.”

Who are the real ‘food fascists’?

Brand asked Shiva why the global uprising of farmers — from Sri Lanka and India to Germany, England and the Netherlands — against the globalization of agriculture had come to be cast as a right-wing idea by the press.

Shiva said Mussolini himself defined fascism as “the convergence of economic and political power.” “Food fascism,” she said, “is the recent control over our food systems by giant corporations and the billionaires.”

Under colonialism, the British controlled the land, she said, but they didn’t control the food. The advent of agricultural industrialization, the green revolution and globalization made it possible for corporations to take control of food.

The call for “food sovereignty,” she said, “came as the call as opposite to the food dictatorship and food fascism.”

Now, she said, those people want to complete the separation of people from the land that began with colonialism.

Today, they want “farming without farmers.”

Being able to plant a seed, input love, knowledge and sun and produce food, “is the only truly independent production system and it’s that freedom they want to attack,” Shiva said, because they are threatened by it.

So they discredit farmers by calling them “fascists” and “right wing.”

“And anybody who facilitates that is essentially doing the work of these globalists,” she said, “they’re the fascists.”

How ‘philanthropy’ buys control

Today, people who talk about the disproportionate power and influence that billionaires like Bill Gates have over global agriculture and health are regarded as “conspiracy theorists,” Brand said.

He asked Shiva to explain Gates’ rise to power in plain language and with facts.

Shiva said people like Gates became wealthy through neoliberal trade liberalization, where trade in information, in the software and other forms of data Gates produced, went completely untaxed.

Then, she said, they used that money “philanthropically” to gain control of other sectors.

By donating massive sums of money to the global seed bank, to the World Health Organization and to media organizations such as The Guardian and the BBC, Gates and other billionaires took control of those institutions.

It even gives them the power to control governments, she said, who have been made desperate for money through indebtedness.

Gates and Silicon Valley, she said, “are very big players in the fake food future of farming without farmers, food without farms.” And they get journalists such as The Guardian’s George Monbiot to promote it.

Chasing enslavement

Shiva said this vision is built on “an imagined promise of an imagined future that we are never gonna arrive at. Because when you get there, you’ll find it doesn’t belong to you. It belongs to them.”

The systems that support their vision of the future appear to offer us convenience, but in reality, she said, maintaining them takes all of our time.

Many indigenous people, she said, still have a lot of time to enjoy life “because they’re not chasing enslavement through consumption.”

Shiva wondered why people would want a “smart home,” where, for example, “the fridge will tell you your milk is getting old. How dumb are we getting that we can’t open the door of our fridge and know our milk is getting old?”

“All that is surveillance data,” she said.

And processing that data takes big servers. “The tiny bits of enslavement we are getting into is [producing] 4% of greenhouse gases, which is more than the aviation sector,” she said.

She added:

“So, not only is it a very foolish kind of slavery, it’s a huge ecological footprint on the planet. Yes. And we can’t afford it. So we have to learn to walk lightly.”

Data is the new oil

Brand said he was alarmed at the increasing pace of “desacralization” where people prioritize materialism over spirituality and lose control over their lives. He asked Shiva how she thought censorship, the inhibition of free speech and the ability of the media to shut down dialogue, fed into this process.

Shiva said it was part of “a system of total control,” that makes that control highly profitable.

What’s new in this system according to Shoshana Zuboff’s “The Age of Surveillance Capitalism” is that today, human beings themselves have been turned into raw material whose data can be extracted.

“That is the capital of today. Big data is the new oil, and then it’s used to manipulate us,” she said, adding “Any system that allows you the awareness of your real freedom must be censored.”

The strange thing, Brand said, is that this system of technological domination was sold to people as a way of empowering them and giving them their freedom.

Technology should be a tool, she said, but it “has been elevated to a god” and those opposed to that transformation are discounted, through Orwellian doublespeak, as “right wing.”

But, Shiva said, the last few years have shown there are three things people cannot give up:

“First, your ability to know and distinguish between truth and untruth. … And not allow post-truth to be projected as truth and the truth speakers to be projected as conspirators.

“The second is our ability to relate to each other without the intervention of a surveillance state and surveillance corporation.

“And third, because food is what makes us, it becomes our blood, ourselves, our brain.”

In other words, Brand said:

“Speak freely. Tell the truth. Communicate freely. Grow your own food. Don’t eat things grown in labs. Don’t eat bugs. And don’t listen to people who want to promote it.”

Watch here:



 

This article was originally published by The Defender — Children’s Health Defense’s News & Views Website under Creative Commons license CC BY-NC-ND 4.0. Please consider subscribing to The Defender or donating to Children’s Health Defense

Connect with The Defender




On the Elimination of Individual Thought and Dissent: Why Flatulent Cows Matter

On the Elimination of Individual Thought and Dissent: Why Flatulent Cows Matter

 

“The goal is not the elimination of cows; it’s the elimination of thinking and dissent. If we keep the above in mind as a process rather than an intended outcome, we have a greater ability to focus on the critical issue.

“To be sure, there are those entities that would like to eliminate red meat and feed people insects as a replacement. But that’s not the central issue here.

“The core objective is nothing less than the elimination of individual thought and dissent. It’s essential in the creation of a fully collectivist state, and it’s at the very heart of the overall globalist objective.”

 

Why Flatulent Cows Matter

by Jeff Thomas, International Man
July 31. 2023

 

We’ve all heard nonsense about cows presenting a danger to the continuance of life on earth – that methane gas from cow flatulence will bring on climate change faster than John Kerry’s jet.

Any thinking person (a sub-species of Homo sapiens that’s in decline but not yet endangered) would agree that the notion that an animal that’s existed in harmony with nature for over two million years could destroy the earth within fourteen years if they’re not exterminated is truly absurd.

And yet those whose ability to reason is on the decline are inclined to believe the claim. Presumably, these individuals are the same ones beginning to believe that men can have babies and that an individual can become something he or she is not simply by “identifying” as such.

But those of us who see the absurdity in such clearly nonsensical beliefs are disinclined to laugh as we observe that these concepts are being disseminated by globalist governments through a compliant media… and, worse, are being accepted by more than a few people.

As a case in point, recently, a publication – Natural News – did a piece entitled, “13 Nations agree to engineer global FAMINE by destroying agriculture, saying that producing food is BAD for the planet.”

In that article, they describe a conference led by US Climate Czar John Kerry, in which representatives from thirteen countries are stated to have committed to a diminished cow population worldwide to combat climate change.

Well, that conference did take place, and a topic of discussion was methane produced by cows, and thirteen attendees did agree that measures of some sort were needed.

But it is not the case that thirteen countries have enacted legislation to eliminate cows.

We might take a step back here and examine what actually occurred. In so doing, we may not only learn whether or not red meat will soon be eliminated globally; we might also gain some insight into how globalist governments seek to achieve their ends.

In most countries, the role of Minister for the Environment is a lowly ministerial position, given to a loyal party member as a token. Most Ministers of the Environment pontificate a fair bit but rarely implement significant change. So, let’s follow the thread of what has taken place.

  • John Kerry contacts the Environmental Ministers in a host of “lesser” countries around the world on the vague premise of “making a difference.” They’re pleased to take part, as Kerry gives them higher visibility and legitimizes their otherwise rather pointless jobs.
  • A conference is held at a four-star hotel somewhere for a few days. Everybody listens to the speakers wringing their hands over the dangers of climate change, and each minister tries to get their photos taken with John Kerry.
  • There’s very little in the text of the keynote presentation by Kerry – mostly vague comments about the dangers of methane and the need for each country to commit to making a difference.
  • At the end of the conference, the attendees are proud to sign a document that’s devoid of detail but says that they’re all in agreement in hoping to make a difference.
  • A press release is issued, showing all the ministers together, stating that methane is dangerous and that all the countries are in agreement regarding the concept of a worldwide methane control policy.
  • The message received by the public is that all the experts agree on whatever they’re saying, although what they’re saying is still quite unclear.
  • A publication such as Natural News publishes an article with a suitably alarming title.
  • The perceived overstatement by Natural News is regarded as a provocation by controlled information sources such as Wikipedia to alert the public. Interestingly, whenever a publication, group, or individual is discredited by Wikipedia, they always do so in the very first line of their description, i.e.,
  • “Natural News is a far-right, anti-vaccination conspiracy theory and fake news website known for promoting alternative medicine, pseudoscience, disinformation, and far-right extremism.”

That’s essentially the process that’s now consistently being utilized by globalists.

Wikipedia now divides all publications, pundits, and others as either truth tellers or far-right conspiracy advocates. The real issue here isn’t farting cows any more than it’s whether men can have babies. These are mere exercises.

So, if we take a step back and consider an overview of what this all means – why it’s so prevalent and why the process is being so consistently utilized – we might be conclude the following:

The issues are absurdly extreme for a reason. The objective is not the achievement of the issues themselves. It is the alteration of the psyche of the populace. 

Once the public has spent several years having their heads divided between “far-right extremism” and what’s approved by the Ministry of Truth, enough people will have been converted into non-thinking proles that a bill can be put forward with the broad and intentionally non-specific objective to outlaw far-right extremism in all its forms.

In order to assure the passage of the bill, a significant majority of people will have to have already reached the stage in their new thought process that they feel that the law is not only justified but essential. Those people who can still think will be expected to comply.

The goal is not the elimination of cows; it’s the elimination of thinking and dissent. If we keep the above in mind as a process rather than an intended outcome, we have a greater ability to focus on the critical issue.

To be sure, there are those entities that would like to eliminate red meat and feed people insects as a replacement. But that’s not the central issue here.

The core objective is nothing less than the elimination of individual thought and dissent. It’s essential in the creation of a fully collectivist state, and it’s at the very heart of the overall globalist objective.

 

Connect with International Man

Cover image credit: Alexas_Fotos




Incandescent Light Bulb Ban Starts on August 1; Gas Stove Ban Coming Next

Incandescent Light Bulb Ban Starts on August 1; Gas Stove Ban Coming Next

by Chris Menahan, InformationLiberation
Jul. 30, 2023

 

Biden’s Department of Energy plans to mete out “the maximum civil penalty” against manufacturers that “knowingly distribute” illicit light bulbs which violate their new efficiency standards.

From Politico, “While everyone was yelling about gas stoves, the incandescent light bulb went away”:

It’s lights out for the incandescent bulbs that people have known, changed and singed their hands on for 140 years.

The modern descendant of Thomas Edison’s most famous legacy is set to formally meet its demise in the U.S. at the end of this month, despite years of efforts by Republicans to extend its lifespan. As of Aug. 1, the Energy Department will fully enforce new efficiency regulations that the old bulbs can’t meet, effectively prohibiting their retail sale.

[…] The endgame for old light bulbs came quietly — by early this year, lawmakers had mostly moved on to squabbling over gas stoves and other newer targets of the Energy Department’s efficiency efforts.

With the Biden regime jailing their opposition en masse, transifying kids, threatening to start WWIII and throwing open the borders, certain issues have to take a back seat.

Over a decade ago, though, the light bulb issue shone bright for tea party conservatives and GOP presidential hopefuls, who accused Democrats of trying to limit consumers’ choices.

CFL bulbs — the alternative at the time — literally induced migraine headaches in otherwise healthy people. When they broke, a hazmat team was needed to clean up the mercury they released.

Republican lawmakers even succeeded in passing legislation to block the Obama administration from carrying out the new efficiency standards — sometimes to the irritation of large light bulb manufacturers that had spent big bucks preparing for them.

[…] The fight zigged, then zagged: The Obama administration took action in its waning days to finalize the bulb efficiency requirements, only for former President Donald Trump — who once proclaimed energy-efficient bulbs made him “look orange” — to halt the move. But DOE pushed the rules to the finish line last year after President Joe Biden came into office with a climate agenda that includes a focus on energy efficiency measures.

Trump blocking the ban was one of the highlights of his presidency.

DOE completed the action last April, but full enforcement of the rule is set to begin Aug. 1. The transition away from the inefficient bulbs has been underway for more than a year, as the department provided flexibility for manufacturers and retailers to comply with the new standard.

That fight may be settled, but the larger fight over energy efficiency standards is still looming. Republican lawmakers in recent months have continually derided the Biden administration’s efficiency actions on everything from more efficient stoves to laundry machines and dishwashers.

For example, the Energy Department is proposing new efficiency standards covering gas stoves as well as electric stoves and ovens. Advocates say the rule would save consumers money on natural gas and lessen a source of greenhouse gas pollution, but critics point to DOE estimates that only about half of gas stoves now in the market could meet the proposed standards — something they contend amounts to a de-facto ban.

[…] DOE said it intends to seek the maximum civil penalty against [light bulb] manufacturers that knowingly distribute products that violate the standards. The department has previously issued civil penalties worth tens of thousands of dollars for companies violating its energy conservation standards.

Over half the country still appears to be using mostly incandescents.

Forty-seven percent of U.S. households reported using LED bulbs for most indoor lighting in 2020, according to the Energy Information Administration, up from only 4 percent in 2015.

It’s still not clear what incandescents will survive this ban. There’s some exemptions for certain specialty bulbs but I can’t find a definitive list anywhere.

Incandescents are still the best bulbs there are as the light they produce is 100 on the color rendering index — meaning it’s identical to sunlight — whereas the best LEDs are only around 90.

Nonetheless, as is now the norm, the plebs must be made to suffer to advance the “liberal world order.”

 

Connect with InformationLiberation

Cover image credit: josch13




How Green Is Lab-Meat?

How Green Is Lab-Meat?

by Navdanya International
July 28, 2023

 

Synthetic foods are the next generation of ultra-processed foods made through the hyper-processing of industrially produced crops, a combination of processed and artificial ingredients and completely new ingredients produced through synthetic biology, (or so called ‘precision fermentation’), and cell-culturing. These products use a combination of gene editing used for the precision fermentation, industrial ingredients, and traditional commodity supply chains to create a product that only further entrenches our already highly problematic and destructive globalized food system.

Why lab-made meat and dairy is not an option:

  • These false solutions will only reinforce and continue industrialization- which is the real culprit of the climate crisis. The issue of unsustainable food systems comes from the inherent unsustainability of the industrialization of all areas of food and agriculture. Whether that be through the industrial raising of animals through CAFOs (Concentrated Animal Farm Operations) where animals are force-fed industrially grown, pesticide-laced grains and soy, or the further industrialization of food now being made in a lab. These two things stem from the same corporations, the same mentality and the same denial of the industrial, globalized food systems devastation on the planet.
  • Lab-cultured food is a fake solution that aims to replace products without challenging the power structures that  underlie the corporate, industrialized agricultural model. It moves attention away from the real solutions offered by the growing regenerative agriculture movement and disregards the role of small producers and food communities in shaping our food systems. Regenerative, agroecological farming practices have the potential to sequester 52 gigatons of carbon dioxide, as they can harvest 733- 3000 kg or more of carbon dioxide per hectare, per year from the atmosphere, equivalent to the amount needed to stay below the 2 degree centigrade range. By increasing carbon absorption, organic farming has a lower climate impact than industrial agriculture.
  • The dichotomy does not stand as industrial CAFOs versus lab-meat. This false binary erases the role of agroecological small farmers, and pastoralists and treats them as if they were the same as industrial agriculture. Both CAFOs and lab-cultured meat concentrate power into the hands of a few. While agroecological systems are based on generations of ecological knowledge, local food culture and ecological resilience that support local food sovereignty.
  • The true solution is agroecological systems that work in harmony with nature, that regenerate ecosystems and ensure the health and well-being of plants, animals and humans. Ecological systems based on integration of agroecosystems promote food sovereignty, food democracy. The real solution does not lie in creating substitutes for food, it lies in understanding the needs of the ecosystems we are embedded in and healing our connection with nature.
  • The same circle of businessmen and corporations that pushed for the Green Revolution, and the industrialization of food systems, are the very actors behind these lab-made products. Actors such as Bill Gates, Jeff Bezos and meat industry giants like Tyson foods, JBS, Cargill, Nestlé, and Maple Leaf Foods are behind the push for this new market where investment has now reached $2.78 billion. synthetic and lab-cultured foods are quickly becoming a next means to consolidate even more power and profit into the hands of a few food giants without holding them accountable to the consequences of the system they perpetuate.
  • Handing over control of our food to a handful of multinational companies only makes us more dependent on them, creating a fully integrated food and agricultural system, controlled by profit. This erodes our food sovereignty, and food security, while having potentially detrimental consequences on local food systems, and ecological systems. What is at risk is the final elimination of small farmers, of traditional agroecological practices, and traditional diets.  To follow through with the massification of lab-grown meat would mean the final, complete separation of food from nature.
  • These products still rely on long-distance globalized supply chains, and derivatives of the industrial food system. For example, to run, these bioreactors require large amounts of nutrients for cells to grow and reproduce. Given the limited production of individual amino acid formulations suited for cell culture globally, one hope is to use industrially cultivated soy to derive the full amino acid profile necessary for cell growth. This would work to only further entrench the already destructive cultivation of soy. Therefore defining these products as environmentally friendly, and sustainable, is just a greenwashing ploy to profit off a new generation of environmentally conscious consumers who are growing critical of the grim realities of industrial food production.
  • It is unlikely these products will be any healthier or safer to eat. These ultraprocessed foods are made from refined ingredients which means that they lack many of the nutrients found in traditional foods. Nutrients and fortifiers will need to be added as separate ingredients and cannot be absorbed as effectively as they would from whole foods, and can cause harmful interference with other nutrients. As a result our bodies may derive less health benefits from them and therefore they should not be part of a nutritious and environmentally friendly diet and should be classified as Junk Food.
  • According to a report by the FAO, the complex process of cell-culturing also leaves many opportunities for contamination from toxic heavy metals, organic pollutants, cleaning products, toxic bacteria, additives and preservatives, left-over antibiotics, growth hormones or other chemical or material contaminates. The presence of any of these contaminants, whether individual or in combination, would pose serious food safety risks to consumers.

In the end, these “Frankenstein foods” dismantle our connection with nature and in doing so, they ignore the role of natural processes and the laws of ecology that are at the heart of real food production. By promoting the illusion that we live outside of nature’s ecological processes, this new technology will only serve to increase corporate control over food and health, accelerate the collapse of local food economies and further destroy food democracy. The real solution to the environmental, and health crises should be based on an active rejuvenation and regeneration of the planet by working with ecological processes through agroecological and regenerative farming practices.

Real food made through real farming is the direct result of a process of care for the land, animals, and fellow humans that celebrates the connection between food and life. It protects the life of all beings on Earth while also nourishing our health and wellbeing. Artificial food is a direct manifestation of years of food imperialism and colonization that has denied our diverse food knowledge, food cultures, and disregarded the biodiversity of the earth and its ecosystems.

 

Connect with Navdanya International

Cover image credit: kartynas




Funny How the UFO Narrative Coincides With the Race to Weaponize Space

Funny How the UFO Narrative Coincides With the Race to Weaponize Space

by Caitlin Johnstone, Caitlin’s Newsletter
July 27, 2023

 

If Wednesday’s House Oversight subcommittee hearing on UFOs had happened ten years ago instead of today, it would have shaken the world. Imagine someone from 2013 hearing congressional testimonies about “routine” military pilot encounters with giant flying tic tacs, floating orbs, 300-foot red squares, and cubes in clear spheres zipping around in ways that surpass all known earthly technology by leaps and bounds, or about secret government possession of otherworldly aircraft they’re trying to reverse engineer and the dead bodies of their non-human pilots, or about the possibility that these creatures are not merely extraterrestrial but extra-dimensional. Their jaws would have hit the floor.

Now in 2023 we’ve been getting incrementally drip-fed bits and pieces of these stories for six years, so the scene on Capitol Hill on Wednesday didn’t have the impact it would’ve had in 2013. It’s making headlines and getting attention, but not as much as Sinead O’Connor’s death or people’s thoughts on Barbie and Oppenheimer. The response from the general public could be described as a collective nervous laugh and a shrug.

People scroll past the footage from the hearing on social media, go “Whoa, that’s weird,” and move on with their lives. The information’s going in, but just kind of on the periphery of mainstream consciousness. Maybe next year they’ll show us something that would’ve been even more shocking to someone in 2013 than Wednesday’s hearing would’ve been, and it will be met with the same nervous laugh and shrug by the people of 2024.



Of course in the circles I tend to interact with, the response is a bit different. People who are highly skeptical of the US war machine tend to also be highly skeptical of this UFO narrative we’ve been seeing since 2017.

“Distraction” is a word you hear a lot. “It’s just a distraction from ______”, where “______” is whatever hot story they personally happen to be fascinated by at the moment. I personally don’t buy that explanation; the new UFO narrative wasn’t just cooked up at the last minute to distract from current headlines, it’s been unfolding for six years, and people aren’t even paying that much attention to it. The empire doesn’t tend to orchestrate spectacular events as a “distraction” anyway; the adjustment of public attention tends to take the much more mundane form of agenda setting in the media, where some stories receive more attention than others based on what’s convenient for the oligarchs who own the press.

I also see people theorizing that this is all a ploy to ramp up the US military budget. There could totally be something to that, but again this narrative has been unfolding for six years and so far the military budget has just been swelling in the usual yearly increments as always.

Don’t get me wrong, though — I’m as skeptical about this thing as anyone. For one thing the origins of the mainstream UFO narrative which began in 2017 were steeped in extensive distortion, dishonesty and journalistic malpractice, and were carried forward by shady intelligence operatives like Lue Elizondo. David Grusch, who made by far the most sensational claims at Wednesday’s congressional hearing with his tales of dead aliens and reverse-engineered UFOs, is himself an insider of the US intelligence cartel.

But for me what really stinks about all this UFO stuff is the timing. Here we are in the early stages of a new cold war which features a race to militarize space, and we’re hearing congressional testimony about mysterious vehicles posing a threat to US airspace which have the ability to go up and down between earth and space very quickly. That smells off.

I mean, does it really sound like a coincidence that we’re seeing all these news stories about UFOs and aliens at the same time we’re seeing news stories about a race between the US and China and Russia to dominate space militarily? A Foreign Policy article from last year blares the headline “China and Russia Are Catching Up to U.S. in Space Capabilities, Pentagon Warns” with the subheading “The militarization of space is picking up pace.” These warnings are echoed in articles by Defense One and Time. An article on the United Nations website from last year carries the title “‘We Have Not Passed the Point of No Return’, Disarmament Committee Told, Weighing Chance Outer Space Could Become Next Battlefield.” A 2021 report from the war machine-funded Center for Strategic and International Studies titled “Defense Against the Dark Arts in Space: Protecting Space Systems from Counterspace Weapons” warns of the urgent need to build more space weapons to counter US enemies. A Global Times article from last year carries the title “Chinese experts urge avoidance of space weaponization amid commercial space capability deployment in Ukraine.”

These stories about the space militarization race aren’t getting the attention the much more entertaining UFO stories are getting, but it seems likely that those who are responsible for moving the war machinery around are paying a lot more attention to the former than the latter. The US Space Force took its first steps toward becoming a reality in 2017, the same year these mainstream UFO stories started coming out, with the explicit purpose of countering Russia and China.

And it just seems mighty suspicious to me how we’re being slowly paced into this UFO narrative (or UAP narrative for those hip to the current jargon) right when there’s a mad rush to get weapons into space. I can’t actually think of any other point in history when the timing of something like this would have looked more suspicious.

So for me the most disturbing parts of the UFO hearing were the parts that could wind up facilitating the agenda to militarize space, like when this phenomenon was framed as a “national security” threat or when it was mentioned that they can transition from earth to space very rapidly.

When asked by congressman Glenn Grothman “do you believe UAPs pose a threat to our national security?”, former Navy commander David Fravor answered with an unequivocal yes. A few minutes later Fravor described these vehicles as being able to “come down from space, hang out for three hours and go back up.”

When asked by congressman Andy Ogles whether UFOs could be “collecting reconnaissance information” on the US military, all three witnesses — Grusch, Fravor, and former Navy pilot Ryan Graves — answered in the affirmative. Asked by Ogles if UFOs could be “probing our capabilities,” all three again said yes. Asked if UFOs could be “testing for vulnerabilities” in US military capabilities, all three again said yes. Asked if UFOs pose an existential threat to the national security of the United States, all three said they potentially do. Asked if there was any indication that UFOs are interested in US nuclear technology, all three said yes.

Ogles concluded his questioning by saying, “There clearly is a threat to the national security of the United States of America. As members of Congress, we have a responsibility to maintain oversight and be aware of these activities so that, if appropriate, we take action.”

When asked by congressman Eric Burlison if “there has been activity by alien or non-human technology, and/or beings, that has caused harm to humans,” Grusch said he couldn’t get into specifics in a public setting (a common theme throughout the hearing), but said that “what I personally witnessed, myself and my wife, was very disturbing.”

Grusch would complicate this cryptic statement a few minutes later by saying that he’s never seen a UFO. How this statement doesn’t contradict his previous statement about having witnessed harmful behavior from non-human technology and/or beings was not made clear.

So you’ve got US policymakers being told that there are vehicles using technology not of this world routinely violating US airspace and posing an existential threat to US national security, and that these craft can go from earth to space and back at will, and that they need to help make sure their nation can address this threat.

What conclusions do you come to when presented with that kind of information? If you’re a lawmaker in charge of facilitating the operation of a highly militaristic empire, you’re probably not going to conclude that it’s time to hold hands and sing Kumbaya. You’re probably eventually going to start thinking in terms of military technology.

One of the most important unanswered questions in all this UFO hullabaloo is, why now? Why are we seeing all this movement on “disclosure” after generations of zero movement? If these things are in fact real and the government has in fact been keeping them secret, why would the adamant policy of dismissal and locked doors suddenly be reversed, allowing “whistleblowers” to come forward and give testimony before congress? If they had motive to keep it a secret this entire time, why would that motive no longer be there?

If you ask the online UFO community, many will essentially take credit for the whole thing, saying the most powerful war machine ever assembled has reversed its policy of total opacity because of “pressure” applied by disclosure activists. This doesn’t pass the smell test; the most powerful empire in history isn’t reversing course on a longstanding policy of blanket secrecy because of internet forums and FOIA requests.

So why now? Why the drastic and sudden shift from UFOs and aliens being laughable tinfoil hat nonsense to the subject of serious congressional inquiries and widespread mainstream media coverage?

Well, the timing of the race to militarize space might provide an answer to the “why now?” question. Is it a coincidence that this new UFO narrative began its rollout in 2017, around the same time as the rollout of the Space Force? Are we being manipulated at mass scale about aliens and UFOs to help grease the wheels for the movement of war machinery into space? How likely is it that by pure coincidence this extraplanetary narrative timed out the way it did just as the US empire makes a last-ditch grab at unipolar planetary domination?

I don’t know. I do know that if I’m assigning degrees of probability, “Extraterrestrial or extradimensional beings are here and take a special interest in us and sometimes crash their vehicles and our government recovered them but kept them a secret but suddenly decided not to be so secretive about them anymore” ranks significantly lower than “Our rulers are lying and manipulating to advance their own interests again.”

I am 100 percent wide open to the possibility of extraterrestrials and otherworldly vehicles zipping around our atmosphere. What I am not open to is the claim that the most depraved institutions on earth have suddenly opened their mind to telling us the truth about these things, either out of the goodness of their hearts or because they were “pressured” by UFO disclosure activists.

I don’t know what the hell is going on with this UFO thing, but I do know the drivers of the US empire have an extensive history of manipulating and deceiving at mass scale to advance imperial agendas. And I do know that at this crucial juncture in history where the empire is clinging to planetary domination with the tips of its fingernails, there are a lot of imperial agendas afoot.

 

Connect with Caitlin Johnstone

Cover image credit: 0fjd125gk87




Elon, X, and the Epitome of a Front Man

Elon, X, and the Epitome of a Front Man
The illusion of choice will make your financial enslavement less painful

 



by Greg Reese, The Reese Report
July 26, 2023

 

Elon Musk announced over a year ago that he planned to convert Twitter into an everything app like China’s WeChat. An app to do everything including online banking and finance.

Last April Musk announced that Twitter Inc. has been renamed to X Corp., he created a new Artificial Intelligence company known as X.AI and he partnered with eToro for stock and crypto exchange.

The media would have you believe that Elon Musk is an independent billionaire genius whose dream is to revolutionize banking. But this story is demonstrably false. The facts tell us that Elon Musk is a frontman for the same old same old. But because he says there are only two genders he has gained the trust of a radicalized people in a time of war, without ever having to explain his lies.

Musk says he grew up poor but his family was rich with emeralds and had a history of abuse and witchcraft. Telltale signs of multi-generational mind control.

Musk received tens of thousands of dollars from his parents to launch his first business venture. A digital phone book known as Zip2. Outside coders were hired to write the entire thing because Elon couldn’t code. Zip2 sold for millions and went nowhere. But Elon made 22 million dollars and with the help of the mainstream media, launched his new persona as a quirky pop-star genius. He then acquired x dot com and announced he would create an online bank known as X. He partnered with banking experts who all left the company after accusing Elon of lying to the media about the product. Which is all he did.

Elon Musk is believed to have co-founded PayPal. This is false. In 2000 Musk sold his failing x dot com business to Confinity, a company founded in 1998 by Peter Thiel and Max Levchin. All Musk reportedly did there was insist on changing the company’s name to X. He was forced out but somehow managed to get them to agree in writing to remove all references to ‘founders’ from the company website.

Musk made nearly two hundred million off the sale of PayPal, a company that he contributed nothing to, and then used that money along with the illusion of being a successful businessman co-founder to buy his way into Tesla.

Tesla Motors was founded in 2003 by Marc Tarpenning and Martin Eberhard, who developed the Tesla Roadster. When Tesla accepted millions from Elon, it came with the condition that he be named chairman of the company. Even though he only contributed money, Musk was unable to hide his anger that the media wasn’t giving him credit for Tesla Motors. And after forcing Eberhard out of the company he re-wrote their history to have himself listed as an original co-founder.

This obvious fake persona of a billionaire quirky genius has worked so well that few even question SpaceX. The official story is that Elon, who has absolutely no experience with rocket science, came up with the idea for SpaceX while traveling to Russia with the CIA’s Michael Griffin of In-Q-Tel. Shortly after this conversation, Griffin was made administrator of NASA where he launched the COTS program that privatized NASA’s rocket program. And awarded two-hundred and seventy-eight million dollars to SpaceX who had never made or flown any rockets. Musk then partnered with rocket engineer Tom Mueller, who went on to produce rocket technology that has clearly been developed for years in the private sectors of the military-industrial complex.

Elon’s companies have received billions in government subsidies over the last two decades. Money that was later spent on the purchase of Twitter. Where he immediately began the process of turning it into an everything app with its own banking system. Or rather, the ruling class cabal that pulls his strings is turning Twitter into an everything app with its own banking system. And that should be alarming. But he says there are only two genders, and families are good, and people love a hero.

They don’t need to chip you to control you. We already have iris scanners and palm scanners. A cashless society will do the job. And for many, Elon’s X will be preferable to Amazon’s palm scanners. The illusion of choice will make your financial enslavement less painful.

 

Connect with Greg Reese




The Insidious Truth Behind Free School Meals

The Insidious Truth Behind Free School Meals
The UN is pushing for universal free school meals, but that level of control would be easily abused. 

by Kit Knightly, OffGuardian
July 25, 2023

 

There is a growing international campaign to institute free school meals all around the globe. On face of it this might seem like a great idea…

but in the New Normal age nothing is ever really free.

So, let’s unpack…

The campaign is being spear-headed by the UN-backed School Meals Coalition (SMC), whose self-proclaimed goal is “free school meals for every child by 2030” (for some reason they are obsessed with that date).

The SMC already has over 80 national governments signed up to its pledge,  with over 90 “partners” (including the Rockefeller Foundation), and these numbers are only likely to grow after their presentation at the UN’s World Food Summit earlier today.

At the same time, the Coalition is getting glowing press write-ups, like this one from The Guardian’s economics editor Larry Elliot:

For the scheme to work, rich countries would find around one-third of the $6bn annual cost, with the rest found by the governments of low-income countries through their budgets or though innovative financing ideas such as debt for school meals swaps, under which countries would channel the savings from debt relief into school meals programmes. At a time when aid budgets are being cut, $2bn a year is small change for donor governments and represents just one day’s worth of annual subsidies to food producers. It is a small price to pay for something that could do so much good.

This agenda has been lurking in the shadows of UK politics for a while now, with Labour Party MP Zarah Sultana first pushing FSM to all primary kids back in the winter of 2022.

It feels weird to write sceptically about this, because, as  a self-proclaimed leftist for most of my life, free school meals is exactly the kind of policy I likely would have supported without question just a few short years ago…

…but those few years were Covid years, and they’ve taught us all a lot.

Firstly, and most importantly, its become increasingly apparent that any policy is only as fair as the people implementing it, and only as decent as the intention behind it, and, however superficially humane  this plan might sound, the practical impact would be to hand yet more control over to the same murderous, eugenicist state that very recently killed thousands with a lie.

Secondly, a monopoly is a monopoly – whether private or state-backed – and the moment a monopoly exists the freedom to choose is dead. Freedom of choice is always the first liberty to go, but never the last.

Consider, for a moment, exactly what free school meals means in a post-covid world still reeling from a deliberately created financial crisis and in the midst of a “Great Reset” transformation.

1) The cost of living is soaring, and many parents – working parents as well as unemployed – are simply not able to afford to heat their homes or feed their children.

2) “Covid” caused a huge spike in homeschooling in countries all around the world.

3) there is an on-going campaign to “revolutionize global food systems” by promoting eating insects, GMOs and lab-grown “meat”.

Let’s trace the point where all these policies intersect.

What are we looking at?

Essentially, free school meals can be used to…

a) counter the rise in homeschooling by effectively bribing or coercing struggling parents to keep their kids in school so they can be fed

b) condition children (and their parents) into accepting eating whatever the state chooses to provide – be it ‘healthy’ GM veganism, bug-burgers or lab-grown food paste

c) this conditioning will help to normalise a more general acceptance of these “foods”

And that’s just the passive phase of control. We can assume it won’t stop there because it never does.

Maybe  free school meals will one day be tied to accepting universal basic income payments, or conditional on  your digital ID or your social credit score.

Maybe only vaccinated children will qualify for free school meals.

I’m sure you see my point.

The unfortunate truth is that we live in an era of ever-increasing  – and anti-human – corporate/state overreach.

The food might be free in the financial sense of the word,  but there will most definitely be a price to pay.

 

Connect with OffGuardian

Cover image credit: primalfuture




Runaway Slaves

Runaway Slaves

by Jeff Thomas, International Man
July 24, 2023

 

 

I believe it’s safe to say that most all of us sympathise with anyone who’s living in a condition of relative slavery and, if he has the courage to attempt to free himself, we root for him to succeed. Those of us who are the most compassionate would even offer him support in his quest, if we were called upon to do so.

But few of us think about slavery as being a modern institution. We tend to see slaves as victims of a racial divide who suffered disgracefully in times gone by.

So, we should take a look at the definition of slavery. In essence, it’s a state in which the product of an individual’s labour is forcibly taken from him. (His condition may include abuse, bondage, etc., but these are symptoms, not a definition.) The purpose for enslavement is always the same: to obtain the fruits of the slave’s labour, without mutually agreed-upon compensation.

And so, if we look at the bare bones of the definition, we easily recognize that if all of the fruits of our labour are taken from us, we are entirely enslaved. If a portion of those fruits is taken from us, we are partially enslaved.

Taxation is unquestionably, by definition, partial enslavement. It’s safe to say that virtually no one in the present world has ever been asked to sign away to his government the power to tax him. Make no mistake about it – taxation is achieved through force. You don’t wish to pay whatever is demanded? You go to prison.

Throughout history, there have been governments that taxed their minions ever-increasingly, eventually reaching the point that people began to leave the country rather than pay the usurious tax. (Rome declined in the fourth century as countless merchants left to live in the more-primitive north, amongst the barbarians, in order to escape tax enslavement. Similar developments have occurred in other countries throughout history.)

Although, in bygone eras, total slavery was quite common and occurred in every continent at one time or another, in our own time, governments have recognized that partial slavery is more effective – give people the impression that they’re free, whilst taking a major portion of the fruits of their labours from them in the forms of taxation and inflation.

But, at some point, people tend to rebel against slavery. First a few try it and succeed, followed by greater numbers, followed again by even greater numbers. In today’s world, we read falsified statistics of the numbers leaving a given country and those giving up their citizenship and don’t realise that these numbers are far from correct. They’ve been adjusted radically downward to make those running for freedom seem like anomalies.

Yet, as the former “free world” becomes increasingly oppressive; as the economic system breaks down, political leaders will experience dramatically diminished revenues and the only solution to keeping themselves in tax dollars (and in power) will be to tax the few remaining productive people far more heavily, to make up for the shortfall. It is at that point that an exodus will begin – first, quietly, then in increasing numbers. Then, emphasis on preventing slaves from running away will increase dramatically.

This will occur in three ways, as it always does.

The Owner Will Try to Prevent an Escape

In days of old, a slave owner would be likely to spend money to advertise in newspapers and print flyers to be distributed, offering a significant reward for the return of a slave. If the slave were recaptured, he would likely be flogged and might even be hanged.

An oppressive government is much the same. They’ll be happy to make examples of those seeking freedom, if their flight occurs after a no-exit date has been declared.

The Owner Will Pressure Other Jurisdictions Not to Accept Runaways

Historically, states and countries that have endorsed slavery have put the pressure on their non-slave-holding neighbours, warning that they will suffer if they give safe harbour to escaped slaves. Limiting trade and controlling the movement of money are the most immediate sanctions.

And, in fact, we’re already seeing this in the US today. With FATCA, the US is putting enormous pressure on banks worldwide to provide extensive information on any American holding an account there. And, if the US is not satisfied with that reporting, they levy huge fines. The outcome is as intended – most banks in the world no longer want Americans as clients… at all – the punishment for welcoming them is too great.

The next logical step is to limit expatriation in the same way – that other countries will be punished for taking in Americans as refugees after an as-yet-unnamed date.

The Chosen Destinations Will Become Overrun

Many destinations are presently sympathetic, welcoming the first “runaways.” But as numbers increase, the receivers of refugees will become like Californians in the 1930’s, who originally welcomed the Okies as potential low-paid farmworkers, but later turned against them violently when too many arrived to absorb into the population comfortably.

At some point, each existing destination will declare a moratorium on further refugees. Those who got in under the wire would be safe and sound, but no new applicants would be considered. (Again, this has historically been the norm.)

The final outcome would likely be similar to that in Germany in the late 1930’s, when German Jews who saw the writing on the wall, attempted to leave the country in ever-greater numbers. But, by far, the majority decided to wait and see if conditions worsened before exiting. Two things happened: 1) Destination countries collectively closed their doors to any further immigration of German Jews and, 2) Germany eventually made expatriation for Jews illegal. Those who were trapped went in their millions to slave labour camps, where total slavery was the universal rule.

This is not an anomaly – countries that find themselves in a similar situation, in which large numbers wish to escape, tend to drop the pretense of respect for freedom and resort to full slavery. Whether it be Mao’s work camps, or the Gulags of Russia, once the mask is off, partial slavery often is done away with and full slavery ensues.

Of course, we’d like to argue that all of the above examples are extreme and that nothing that severe could happen today. But then, those who fell victim in these examples also felt that way at the time, or they wouldn’t have stayed put and allowed themselves to be victimized.

Those folks were essentially the same as you or I. Their only shortcoming was that they failed to anticipate the fact that the historical economic and political warnings were occurring all around them, and they failed to vote with their feet.

 

Connect with International Man

Cover image credit: geralt




Everyone in NATO is a War Criminal

Everyone in NATO is a War Criminal

by Dr. Vernon Coleman
July 18, 2023

 

NATO has been an offensive, war-mongering lobby group for the arms industry ever since its foundation.

Despite pretending to exist to keep the peace, NATO has always been eager to start more wars and use more bombs and bullets.

But today, for the designer war between America and Russia, NATO has gone further than ever before – it has become a terrorist organisation.

And everyone involved in NATO is now, officially, a war criminal.

Why?

Because NATO forces have given two banned types of military hardware to Ukraine.

First, there were depleted uranium shells.

These will cause many cases of cancer among innocent civilians.

Just as they did in Iraq and Afghanistan.

Even the Americans won’t now use depleted uranium. So Britain is sending them to Ukraine.

Now there are cluster bombs.

These release loads of small bombs which look like toys. And they’re banned by more than 100 countries.

The aim is that children will pick them up. And the bomb will blow off an arm or a leg.

Cluster bombs are used because when children are injured the population becomes depressed. And hospitals are kept busy trying to keep badly wounded children alive. Plus the community then has to try to deal with children with no arms or no legs or no limbs at all.

That’s what NATO has become.

Every political leader who attended the latest NATO conference is a war criminal.

Everyone working for NATO is a war criminal.

That’s not rhetoric.

It’s not opinion.

It’s fact.

Our leaders are war criminals.

And they’re doing it in our name.

 

Connect with Dr. Vernon Coleman

Cover image credit: Ri_Ya




The Asinine Insanity of the ‘Climate Change’/C02 Hoax: Kill the Cows to Save the Earth!

The Asinine Insanity of the ‘Climate Change’/C02 Hoax: Kill the Cows to Save the Earth!

by Gary D. Barnett
July 18, 2023

 

Sky Falling

Experts Agree: Not only is the sky falling but we’re all going to die from global warming. SUVs are a major culprit, and have been contributing to rising sea levels according to climate expert, Chicken Little. Colleague, Algore, speaking during a blizzard, agreed with Little.”

~ The Daily Alarmist

I must preface my comments here with sane logic, so as to ward off the absurd idiots who have bought hook, line, and sinker, the madness of the mainstream media, the political class, the non-science ‘scientists,’ the fake environmental whackos, the evil UN, the illegitimate IPCC, and the staged marketing of the ever-pathetic rantings of the once teenage bimbo ignoramus, Greta Thunberg, about man’s normal activity destroying the ‘planet.’ It is just not so!

Yes, the climate on earth changes on a regular basis. Yes, extreme weather conditions are seemingly present more often than not considering the near past. Yes, warming and cooling takes place over time, and has for millions, (or billions) of years. Yes, particular humans, (government, malevolent ‘scientists,’ NGOs, and the military, among many other nefarious individuals and organizations) can manipulate weather to harm us, but no; driving an SUV cannot kill us all. I present this as a purposeful affront to the evil liars, propagandists, depopulation monsters, eugenists, and technocrats, who desire to rule the earth at the great expense of all common men and nature.

The latest absurdity, not new or unique in any way, is the plan of the Irish government to cull (kill) 200,000 healthy cows, claiming “they contribute to ‘climate change’ due to ‘carbon’ emissions.” Anyone who takes this nonsense seriously, or accepts and/or ignores it, is opening the gates to voluntary human extermination. To not be able to understand that both cows and humans eat, live, and expel C02, and to not see that there are eight times more humans than cows globally, why would anyone not grasp that killing humans would be, according to these mad enviro-fools, even more effective in their efforts to ‘save the planet’ than killing cows? Why not kill every animal, including large numbers of humans, if ‘saving the planet’ from farts is the main goal?

Humans not only expel more C02 than cows, but they consume vast amounts of energy, they drive cars, they fly on planes, they build factories that pollute, they mine, they create incredible mountains of plastic and garbage, they perpetuate wars that destroy the earth at unheard of levels, and they continue to outpace cows in population growth by extreme margins. Cows only breath and fart, so why kill these innocent animals; why not just go ahead and cut to the chase, and kill large swaths of humans, (the real plan) saving the soon to be endangered Bos taurus — bovine? (cow) Are you beginning to see the absurdity of this bogus ‘climate change’ bullshite? The nonsense swallowed up and believed by most all these ‘climate change’ pushing scum, expands the bounds of absurdity to astronomical levels.

It gets much worse. This incredibly harmful and idiotic plan by the very imbecilic Irish Department of Agriculture, and the Irish Environmental Protection Agency, will pay 5,000 euros ($5,622) for each cow killed. Keep in mind, that 200,000 cows makes up 0.02% of the total number of cows on earth. Is anyone stupid enough to consider this a legitimate fight against the fraudulent notion of ‘climate change?’ At that price, it would cost $1.125 billion just to pay the farmers for killing their animals. (At this price, to kill all cows on earth, would cost $5.525 trillion) But what about the cost to dispose of these animals, the huge amount of energy and pollution used to do so, the loss of food and dairy products, the supply reduction and obvious extreme price increases certain to come? How will these losses be made up, and how much increased energy will be required to fill this void?

I do realize that most might consider this a minor subject matter, but that would be a grave mistake on your part. The powers that be are not planning on stopping with the killing of animals; they are intent on total control over every aspect of your life, including what food you eat, where you are allowed to go, how much energy you are allowed to use, how much heat you will be allowed in winter to keep warm, how you spend your allotted currency units, (CBDCs) how much medical care you may be allowed, where you may live, and even control whether you may procreate or not.

Why not get to the meat (pun intended?) of this problem, and dispose of the lies and propaganda that consume this now ignorant, pathetic, and indifferent population. The weather is being controlled, it is greatly harming humanity and nature, and is causing an incredible amount of damage not only to this earth, but to every living thing on it. This is not, and never has been, the result of normal human behavior, but is due to mass manipulation of the weather by the ruling class of claimed ‘elites’, who have chosen to use false climate narratives to create mass fear in order to control all. This is the ultimate fake ’emergency’ being used to take over humanity.

Many factors are likely present concerning climate extremes, including, but not limited to, weather geoengineering by the State, graphene rain, directed energy, climate modification assault, heating the ionosphere using HAARP technology, cloud seeding, spraying our skies with metals and poisons through stratospheric aerosol injection, (chemtrails) and most assuredly, artificially creating and enhancing the destructive  nature of hurricanes and earthquakes. Certainly, there are other devastating manipulations of weather going on as well that are unknown at this time, as the military’s full technological potential is hidden, and far ahead of what is believed by most. In addition, releases of toxic chemicals, bioweapons, and the continuous poisoning of the earth’s land and water by deadly substances such as glyphosate, is continuously ongoing. Weather is now a major weapon against mankind, and is being used to monopolize all agriculture and food production, or planned lack thereof.

It is not just cows that will be targeted by these evil ‘climate change’ monsters, it is the entire human race. So to believe that killing cows will save anyone or this earth, is not only completely ludicrous, but a sign that this is only the start of a much broader assault on all of the proletariat herd. They may attempt to begin with the cattle, but if that atrocity is allowed to happen, you and your family will likely be next.

Carbon Dioxide (C02) is absolutely vital to the existence of man. Without it, everything on earth would die. Through the process of photosynthesis, leaves on trees and plants use the great energy of the sun in order to convert this C02 to feed the plants, causing life-sustaining oxygen to be produced so that all things can live and breathe. It is said that one large tree can produce by using expelled C02, enough oxygen supply to provide what is necessary for a full day for several people. Plants also store carbon dioxide to clean the air and reduce negative effects to the environment. This process is imperative for life to survive, as without it, oxygen would cease to be available. If carbon dioxide were to be eliminated, (net zero is the stupid term used) everything would die. Keep this in mind the next time you hear some ranting ‘climate change’ dreg advocating the killing of all our animals (including humans) to ‘save the planet.’

All that is needed to save this planet and everything on it, is the elimination of all rulers and governments! Think about that the next time you perpetuate your own destruction by choosing to vote to ‘elect’ a master, any master, to rule over and control you. It is better to cull politicians and save the cows.

“Almost all of history is an unbroken trail of one conspiracy after another. Conspiracies are the norm, not the exception.”

~ G. Edward Griffin

Reference links:

Irish government to cull 200,000 healthy cows to meet ‘climate goals’

Carbon Dioxide from breathing and farting is not a concern for ‘global warming’

Don’t blame cattle

World cattle numbers by year

Chemtrails: The Conspiracy Theory That Never Was

The power of one tree

Geoengineering Watch

HAARP and the Sky Heaters

 

 

Connect with Gary D. Barnett

Cover image credit: ArtTower & LauraTara




“We Will Bring You Down”: German MP Vows to Dismantle WHO’s Grip on Governments

“We Will Bring You Down”: German MP Vows to Dismantle WHO’s Grip on Governments

by Tyler Durden, ZeroHedge
July 17, 2023

 

German MP Christine Anderson last week shredded the World Health Organization, calling it a group of “globalitarian misanthropists” who she – and a group of seven other MPs, have vowed to dismantle in order to oppose the WHO supplanting democratically elected governments.

“An unelected body like who is controlled and run by multi-billionaires should never be allowed to act in place of a democratically elected government,” she said during the Citizen’s Initiative conference in Brussels.

Anderson says she’ll expose and name any individuals, including government officials and parliamentarians, who support the WHO ‘power grab’ and disrespect democracy.

“It is you [WHO] that is the small fringe minority,” she continued. “You are the ones who do not have the right to dictate to the people what they want and what they don’t want.”

“So take it from me … take it from the millions and millions of people around the world. We will bring you down, and we will not tire until we have done just that. So brace yourselves. We are here, and the fight is on. So let’s have the fight.”

Watch:

 

Connect with ZeroHedge 




This Is Why We Need to Talk About CBDCs

This Is Why We Need to Talk About CBDCs

 

 Video available at Odysee & YouTube

 

by Aaron & Melissa Dykes, Truthstream Media
July 14, 2023

 

(Normally this is the type of article we only share with our Patreons, but this needs to be seen by everyone who can.)

Central banks and governments, at a global scale, have prepared to implement CBDCs (Central Bank Digital Currencies) with important consequences for every aspect of freedom in our lives.

Though they will introduce it to the public gradually, its capacity for total control is immense.

It isn’t merely that the new dollar is digital, traceable and trackable. It’s based on blockchain technology, of course. It isn’t merely that small business will be hurt (yet again) or that private transactions will be eradicated. Nor will it be merely consequential for drug dealers, scammers, or illicit trades.

CBDCs will be PROGRAMMABLE. Where and how money is spent is literally built into this new currency. And they plan to use it to change how money is used.

Yes, CBDCs are programmable. The executives that frequent the World Economic Forum and the other elite forums have said so.

And so, CBDCs will not just be money. No, not at all. CBDCs are designed as tools of a very political and ideological agenda; some of the worst policies that have been pushed in recent decades will now have the force of spending controls to “nudge” people into submission and compliance.

Again, CBDCs ARE PROGRAMMABLE. Whoever controls the money controls the agenda. That is the point.

Why is this important? Central banks, private banks, government authorities and global designers will have the power to turn on and off transactions of every kind. They can algorithmically-determine precisely what the CBDC money can be spent on; when and under what conditions; and by who.

At the touch of a button, PROGRAMMABLE cash in the form of CBDCs can block the sale of firearms, alcohol, cannabis or tobacco. Or other sensitive products. But that’s just the start (you knew that).

At the same touch of a button, PROGRAMMABLE CBDCs can prevent the sale of meat, dairy, candy and junk food, or disallow the purchase of gasoline or use of a vehicle (and an endless array of other examples; you get the idea.)

With yet another press of the button, they can also freeze bank accounts of political dissidents — like those supporting the recent trucker protest in Canada, for instance.

Spending under CBDCs could be allocated for specific purposes — like rent and groceries — or be timed to expire, requiring, for instance that money be spent by the end of the month.

CBDCs could also prevent individuals with “bad social credit scores” from purchasing anything more than the bare basics of survival. Black Mirror’s Nosedive has already depicted as much, but that’s mild compared to what’s possible.

Blackrock CEO Larry Fink recently said: “Behaviors are gonna have to change. And this is one thing we’re asking companies — you have to force behaviors, and at BlackRock, we are forcing behaviors.”

The compliance of private businesses — any major business who relies upon good standing in the global financial system — can also mandate adherence to any number of political agendas and purchasing behaviors. Energy caps; green conscience laundering; medical misinformation policies; sensitivity about world events, wars and catastrophes; identity politic political correctness shifting sand madness; polka-dots-over-stripes; anything is possible!

And the private policies of private banks and businesses — ultimately steered by central bank CBDC policies — could easily circumvent restrictions on our civil rights under governments and public systems. (And what could you really do about it? Where else could you go?) The Bank of International Settlements recently announced 93% of the world’s central banks are currently working on a CBDC, and the International Monetary Fund (IMF) is already hard at work on a global CBDC platform.

Social media and other tech giants have already paved the way to this version of circumnavigation-hell (I’m not touching you; I’m not touching you!!), even as it emerged that shadowy government agencies were literally coordinating the takedown of free speech online in violation of First Amendment protections.

This nightmare of privacy-less technological enslavement under CBDCs is complicated and perhaps predicated by the advent of AI and the loss of employment for hundreds of millions and even billions of people who once held relative autonomy over their own lives.

UBI (Universal Basic Income) funds will be increasingly provided by governments — as it perhaps must be in a scenario with no meaningful employment — not just for the poor and unemployed, but for nearly everyone. Certainly, people will need financial support to live their lives.

But that money would be used to control as much as it would be used to provide sustenance. Not only would every transaction large and small be tracked, but its use would be specifically tailored to the vision of life proscribed by the very powerful and their AI tech tools. Anything in violation of prevailing policies would be automatically out-of-bounds.

While this design could be used for good (though such powers are unwise), and many would give it that benefit of the doubt, those paying attention can see plainly its drawbacks and potential for the very worst.

With little-to-no context and no one to appeal to, an “artificially intelligent” system administers, gives, and takes away as it is programmed to do. Perhaps clumsily suppressing on the basis of key words and categories… perhaps insidiously on the basis of personalized profiles with millions of pieces of data. This system can and will automatically behaviorize all who live under its auspices, with grave consequences which are easy to predict. And even worse outcomes are quite possible.

Even under the most glowing version of this vision of the near future, where personal behaviors are improved, and people become “better” citizens, nicer neighbors and excellent stewards of the environment — even then, if a positive outcome can even be supposed — it would be a world without freedom.

Freedom itself is on the line under programmable CBDCs, in an almost direct way.

Instead of technology freeing us from worry, labor, and drudgery, it stands to reinforce and radically expand top-down control. This is not hyperbole.

New behaviorism — such as living within one’s allotted carbon footprint allowance — could and would be enforced easily, but tyrannically under this kind of system. Likely it would come with a velvety touch and a gradual implementation to dissuade outrage and condition acceptance; but in of itself, the system could nonetheless be flipped-on overnight.

A government powerful enough to give to all, and yet also take away from all is not only possible, but immediately part of the scheme. Accountability, dissent, free expression, and independent lives could all become a thing of the past, replaced by an engineered obedience, dulled further by the extremes of algorithmically driven group think.

Polls show that CBDCs — now being pursued by the Federal Reserve in the United States and by most every major government and financial system around the globe — are extremely unpopular with the people, but only by those who are aware of their potential existence and uses.

The vast majority of the public — most already lost in a sea of apathy and indifference — remain ignorant of how radically the money system they live under is changing. People need to be informed. Dissent needs to be expressed now while it still can be.

The unfortunate, flawed maxim “If you’re not doing anything wrong, you’ve got nothing to hide” is due for a nightmarish upgrade. The elites, already concentrated in wealth and power — and now unleashing AI — plan to literally program and control your entire life through digital currency.

Something huge is happening. Please pay attention. Please tell people what this can do. Please make your voice heard.

 

Resources

The Trust Game ten episode financial docuseries by Truthstream on Vimeo (to Support TSM)

The Trust Game on YouTube (for free)

Bank of England Tells Ministers to Intervene on Digital Currency ‘Programming’

CATO Poll: Only 16% of Americans Support the Government Issuing a Central Bank Digital Currency

CATO: Central Bank Digital Currency — Assessing the Risks and Dispelling the Myths

 

Connect with Truthstream Media

Cover image based on creative commons work of: FreeGiver & geralt




The Future of Traditional Farming and Healthcare in the Netherlands

The Future of Traditional Farming and Healthcare in the Netherlands

by Carla Peeters, Brownstone Institute
July 9, 2023

 

The Netherlands has been chosen as a pilot area in the EU to be climate neutral with a transition in protein food and a transformation of healthcare into a telemedicine, data, and AI-driven connected system approach led by Public Private Partnerships. A closure of 55-70 percent of traditional farming is foreseen to be replaced by tech-driven vertical farming, gene-edited crops, edible insects, veganism, 15-minute cities and a CBDC passport covering personal health data.

Citizens will pay for the transition by increasing prices for energy, food, healthcare services, and insurance.

A U-turn of these EU-driven policies is highly needed. Health and wealth have been decreasing in the past years due to pandemic measures, inflation, and recently implemented policies. The Netherlands, famous for farming and innovations, can best win this challenge to re-establish healthcare driven by traditional farmers producing nutritious whole food that prevents famine, improves the soil and the immune system for healthy lives.

Dutch Farmers will no longer accept harmful policies

The Netherlands, a small country conveniently situated within the EU, has been economically growing by generations of farming and fishing. In July 2022 the Dutch policies on farming led to the article No farmers No Food No Life.

Large demonstrations initiated by farmers and fishermen took place in July 2022, November 2022, and March 2023 in The Hague and Brussels respectively, which received much attention worldwide. Now, half a year later an even bigger demonstration initiated by Dutch farmers took place on June 29,2023 in The Hague. Farmers and citizens have drawn the line.

The new policies pushed forward by politicians in Rutte IV could be disastrous for farmers and humanity. This will not only affect the Netherlands. Changes in farming in the Netherlands, being the second largest export country for food, will affect many people worldwide.

Last week the negotiations with farmers and agricultural society on the Agriculture Agreement IN MOVEMENT to meet the governmental goals for climate change on CO2 and Nitrogen reduction in 2040 collapsed. In the draft Agreement a 25-30 percent reduction of farmers and cattle and loss of agricultural fields is foreseen in 2035.

It could even be a reduction of 55-70 percent of farmers to transform the Netherlands together with Flanders and North-Rhine Westphalia in one region ‘Tristate city’ “a large green world city with 30 million inhabitants.” This is a concept that was introduced in 2016 as a marketing strategy, established as a place brand, and initiated by the private sector. The concept was found by visiting emerging markets in China. The opinion of thought leaders is that it will be a success, but there is no way of knowing this would be the case.

When the new agreement is signed farmers need to fulfill 122 measures; most of them will not be able to meet them. Farmers are warning that if the eighth EU Nitrogen rule will be forced for the ability to grow vegetables and fruit, it will be impossible to continue farming. This year the use of certain crop protection spreads has become restricted in the Netherlands while other countries are allowed to use it. A 40 percent reduction in yield is expected.

The only way out for farmers seems to be to accept the offer by the government to sell their ownings for 120 percent of the value with a restriction not to be allowed to start another farm within the EU area. Many farmers still refuse the offers made. ‘Even when they pay 400 percent of the value I won’t leave, my son is going to be the next generation farmer.’

The draft agreement does not present information on effects on farmers’ income and consumers’ behavior. The advisory report from Wageningen University and Research (WUR) writes that they cannot advise on this topic as they do not have the information. With the reduction of cattle, farming land and a transition to regenerative farming they will be able to meet the goals on climate change. However, 30,000 jobs will be lost and €6.5 billion of added value.

Remarkably, the role of Rabobank (originally derived from Boerenleenbank, a cooperative owned and run by farmers) which has been pushing investments by farmers for large-scale farming, while knowing for 30 years this strategy could harm the environment, has been kept out of the N2 debate in the Netherlands. A report published by Greenpeace explores the role of Rabobank. The minimum Rabobank (a bank for actively accelerating transitions for food, climate and finance) can do says Greenpeace is to contribute €3.1 billion in the N2 Fund.

A catastrophic power by a Culture of Climate Hysteria 

Recently Rob Jetten, the Dutch minister for Climate and Energy Policy presented in parliament the net zero CO2 and nitrogen plan, which will cost €28 billion and would result in a 0.000036 degree Celsius reduction in temperature in 2050. A harmful and unrealistic plan for a problem that even does not exist.

There is no climate emergency, over 500 eminent experts wrote in 2019 in an open letter to the United Nations. A research paper by Skrable et al, in Health Physics in 2022 concludes the increase in total CO2 due to the use of fossil fuels was much too low to be the cause of global warming. Another group of researchers found ice around Antarctica Thwaites Doomsday was eight times thinner around 8,000 years ago.

Furthermore, the Nobel Prize winner in Physics in 2022, John F Clauser, says it is clear; there is no climate crisis. Climate crisis is based on scientific corruption, pseudo-science. Similarly, Greenpeace co-founder Dr Patrick Moore explains in his speeches ‘Carbon dioxide is the currency of life and the most important building block for all life on earth. It is not responsible for global warming. The whole debate on climate change is a fabrication.’

The European Court of Auditors stated in a recent report, ‘It is not clear if the suggested measures will be supportive to meet the climate goals.’ Probably the EU will not be able to meet their sustainability goals to reduce CO2 emission in 2030 by 55 percent. Unfortunately, the EU committed that they will be the first worldwide to be climate neutral. In the near future every EU citizen will have to pay for CO2 emissions via house, car, and company.

Gripped in a culture of climate catastrophism, society seems to allow to rip the work of generations of farmers and thousands of cattle being slaughtered while the real consequences are unknown and threatens us all.

What is also conveniently overlooked in the climate debate against cows is the carbon cycle. CO2 is absorbed by grass during photosynthesis. Cows eat the grass produce methane-which is released into the atmosphere and breaks down into CO2 and H2O. And the cycle repeats itself. Basic biological knowledge that is learned at school and everybody knows. Livestock are highly needed for fertile lands. A healthy soil, the underpinning of cultivation throughout history is created in interaction between grazing animals and soil microbiology. Regenerative agriculture can sequester more carbon than humans are inventing.

A net zero CO2 policy in Sri Lanka has proven to be a disaster and ruined many farmers’ lives. The policy resulted in complete chaos and a setback in health, environment, and economy.

In the Netherlands an increasing number of farmers a year commit suicide; the exact numbers are unknown. According to a recent investigation there was a 37 percent increase in 2020. Families are crying at the kitchen table daily.

Dutch citizens will be financing the €28 billion climate plan by extra taxes on food prices for example on milk products, meat, compounds for vegetation protection, and fertilizers while inflation is high and purchases are expensive.

Also, a prepared law for zero taxes on vegetables and fruits to promote healthy foods supposed to pass for January 2024 seems to make a U-turn. According to a report from SEO Economic Research it will be too complex and too expensive and it is not sure the introduction of this law will promote health. However, keeping taxes on vegetables and fruit will generate €550-950 million in income for government.

Overlooked risks of expensive food transitions 

A transition to ‘Food is Medicine’ initiatives is a strong promotion for the necessity to eat fully plant-based (vegan), bio-engineered food, lab-grown meat, and novel foods like edible insects. Fresh whole foods from farmers will be replaced by products derived from vertical farming, food grown in laboratories, and innovative Food Hubs.

According to the many start-ups and initiatives, it is necessary to solve diminishing resources and an insecurity for healthy nutritious and sustainable food for a fast-growing human population to 9 billion people in 2050. A future of food with low-footprint ingredients and technology that will bring a beautiful nature back into balance. A Global Food Forum of young people is accelerating the transition.

The Netherlands is leading this worldwide food transition funded by the private sector-run FoodvalleyNL, the World Economic Forum and Rockefeller Foundation, the EU, and the Dutch government. The secretariat and coordinating centre for various Food Hubs in the world is based at Wageningen University and Research (WUR). In 2050 we will eat less meat, eggs and dairy products and more chickpeas, crickets and chlorella; a movement for everyone, the WUR states.

McKinsey report ‘Alternative proteins, the market share is on’ states leading alternative protein resources will be plant protein, insect protein, mycoprotein and cultured meat.

It is not a surprise that the world’s largest and leading insect company Protix, producing protein and fats from insects for feed and food for animals and humans, is based in the Netherlands.

The company was founded in 2009 by two consultants from McKinsey and attracted huge amounts of funding. Protix uses high-track control systems, artificial intelligence, genetic improvement programs, and robotics. The company received many awards, among them from the WEF. A circular frontrunner in the greenfield of insect-based foods.

In the EU in the past few years Protix, Fair Insects, and CricketOne, a Vietnam-based company, gained approval for use of insects in human consumption. The growing number of insects authorized in the EU for sale in food including dietary supplements will not be required to carry special labels to distinguish them from other products the EU has confirmed despite protests from MEPs.

Insect protein and fat can be found in products like paste, bread, ice creams, cakes, and more. The argument is that before insects can become a large-scale food product for humans in the Western world, insects should be turned into an appealing product. For several years start-ups in food transition products like hamburgers from cultivated crickets have been supported by the EU and government in the Netherlands.

According to the Dutch Platform De Krekerij is the most sustainable fast food on the planet. One kg of cricket meat uses 85 percent less food, 90 percent less land and 95 percent less water than one kg of beef.

Green gas emission from farming insects would be 100 times lower than those from pigs and cattle. However, a position paper of the Eurogroup for animals says insect farming is a false solution for the EU’s food system. Industrial animal farming for food should be replaced rather than having insect protein as another form of industrial farming.

Although more than 2,000 edible insects caught in the forests or agricultural fields have been consumed for thousands of years all over the world, there is hardly any knowledge on consuming insects cultivated in plastic boxes in fabrics. Impacts on various aspects, governing the cultivating and production methods of insects and issues on upscaling, on health, and the environment have not been investigated in the short and long term. ‘Little is known about the food chain leading edible insects from farm to plate and on their role in human and planet wellbeing says the editorial Edible Insects: From Farm to Fork.

In a report in 2022 the FAO documented possible food safety issues with edible insects. Among them are allergen cross-reactivity, biological safety hazards as bacteria, viruses, fungi as well as chemical contaminants (toxins (myco), PFAS, pesticides, antibiotics, toxic metals, flame retardation, cyanogenic glycosides). Especially for undernourished children and people with a weakened immune system, eating insects might be a risk factor. The EFSA report for CricketOne is warning of a possible negative impact on both the innate and adaptive immune system.

A research paper on edible insects versus meat shows that the content of individual nutrients in both insects and meat varies significantly. Both are rich in nutrients for development and functioning of the human body. Some foods might exacerbate diet-related health problems while others may be effective in treatments. However, studies on eating insect products versus meat on health are still lacking.

Around the myth of cultured meat It remains to be seen whether the production of artificial meat will be enough to be competitive in comparison with conventional meat. It is still in its infancy. Analysis found that lab-grown meat made from cultivated stem cells could be 25 times worse for the climate than beef if current production methods are scaled up because they are still highly energy-intensive.

Another threat for traditional farming in the EU conversation is the industrial lobby owning 10,000 patents boosting the use of gene-edited crops (CRISPR-Cas) as a solution to climate change and biodiversity. Recent research by the EU and the Global Biodiversity Framework are likely to foster the use of CRISPR-Cas as a solution to not only climate change but also biodiversity conversion. Also WUR scientists expect the EU will change the rules this year with smarter governance for the benefits of society and environment.

The debate on gene-editing for crops instead of classical natural crossings for crops is not new and has been used by Monsanto. The use of the gene-edited seeds has been expensive for many farmers. Biological farmers are concerned that farmers will become dependent on multinationals and natural classical solutions will no longer be effective. The balance with nature will be destroyed. Plants are interconnected with soil, animals and humans. The long-term effects of combining various gene-edited plants and foods are not known. Moreover human gene-editing is still controversial and the effects of eating the gene-edited plants and fruits on animals and humans is not known.

It is clear that when evaluating the food transition to veganism, gene-edited plants, soil fertilizers converting biodiversity, increased irrigation technologies, and edible insects, the intended transition has many risks in the short and long term for humans, animals, plants, and the planet.

A ‘rich’ country in famine and lack of care 

The Healthcare system in the Netherlands has been ranking for years as the best in Europe. In 2020 the Dutch healthcare system was ranked as the number three most innovative in the world.

Unfortunately, in a country with 17.8 million people, approximately 2 million people do not get the care they need, and 1.2 million people are living below poverty. Around 148,000 citizens visit a food bank. Poverty is expected to rise to 5.8 percent.

In 2021 30.9 percent of men and 35.9 percent of women (age > 16 years) experienced one or more chronic diseases. This is expected to increase to around 7 million in 2030. During the last few years a strong increase in heart problems has taken place, and one in ten persons in the Netherlands experiences heart problems.

After three years of pandemic measures and limited care, healthcare is confronted with a population with an increasing number of elderly people, people with more chronic diseasesrising mental problems, increased feelings of stress, fear, and loneliness, more people dying as expected, shortness of nurses, increased sickness leaves, low salaries, inflation, high prices for energy and food, and more people being undernourished. People are leaving the healthcare system, and 37 percent experience moral conflicts. Doctor visits are replaced by telemedicine or done by people with less professional education.

The number of people on waiting lists for urgent care in nursing homes is increasing and surgeries have been postponed. CEO’s of healthcare organisations have started to hire nurses from Indonesia and India as sufficient Dutch nurses are not available or prefer to work as an independent nurse. In 2032 a shortness of 137,000 nurses is expected. Furthermore, shortness of family doctors (35 -45 percent ) is on the rise. Telemedicine and efforts on the implemention of technological support for big data and AI are pushed forward by the minister of Healthcare.

Large academic hospitals have started AI labs. Personal medical information files will become more easily available among different care organisations and within the EU. Special acute care will be concentrated in fewer hospitals.

CEO’s of healthcare organizations with nursing homes and homes for the disabled have written an open letter to the minister that the current situation will drive organisations into bankruptcy. The risk for Dutch women to become burnt out or lose their paid work to replace with unpaid voluntary care is near.

Prices for mandated private health insurance increase due to inflation. During the pandemic billions have been thrown away for unsafe and ineffective and even harmful measures. But, politicians in the Netherlands don’t see it as a priority to evaluate the policies as they have postponed the pandemic inquiry. Trust in politics in the Netherlands is at an all-time low.

Preventing Famine 

It is the UN report that appeared in April 2023 that needs to be on the front page of all media worldwide. “Globally the consumption of animal source foods including, meat, eggs and milk can help to reduce stunting, wasting and overweight amongst children.”

“This is a significant gap given the co-existence of micronutrient deficiencies with overweight, obesity and Non-Communicable Disease.”

At least one in ten people and one in three children worldwide is malnourished. This is presumably much more when various grades of deficiencies are considered. While it is known that most non-communicable diseases can be prevented and restored, it is unacceptable given the co-existence with deficiencies that malnutrition and even hunger and famine may increase when EU policies will be forced into the agriculture and healthcare system in the Netherlands.

The Netherlands owes generations of hard-working farmers and fishermen a solution to the problem of famine and a restoration of lower cost of healthcare. A cooperation between farmers, fishermen, and medical doctors for good nutritious whole food and loving care will be a strategy less costly, safe, better for soil and the immune system, and more successful. This will be the way that needs to be followed to regain trust and wealth.

 

Connect with Brownstone Institute

Cover image credit: 3345557/pixabay




Dr. Reiner Fuellmich With Andrew Johnson on Undisclosed “Black Technology”, the Truth About 9/11, Planned UFO False Flag Events, Steven Greer’s “Disclosure Project”, Directed Energy Weapons, the Cover-Up of Free Energy Already Available, “Psychological Terrorism” & the Attack on Human Consciousness

Dr. Reiner Fuellmich With Andrew Johnson on Undisclosed “Black Technology”, the Truth About 9/11, Planned UFO False Flag Events, Steven Greer’s “Disclosure Project”, Directed Energy Weapons, the Cover-Up of Free Energy Already Available, “Psychological Terrorism” & the Attack on Human Consciousness

 

[TCTL editor’s note: For those who prefer to read the transcript, ICIC has provided subtitles embedded in the videos. This is a 3-part series of videos covering, and cohesively tying together, a wide array of topics related to the hidden history of humanity and the great cover up of the diabolical actions of those who seek to control us. Andrew Johnson has done decades of painstaking research and offers his books free in PDF version. This empowering video series shines light into many dark areas, exposing the game plan of psychopaths who have created the illusion that they rule the world. ~ Kathleen]

 

9/11, UFO False Flags & Free Energy

by Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, International Crimes Investigative Committee
with Andrew Johnson, Check the Evidence
July 3, 2023
originally recorded June 14, 2023

 

In this first of a three part episode of ICIC, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich talks with British computer scientist and physicist Andrew Johnson, who in the course of his detailed research on the 9/11 attack and other topics also came across various concepts of state-sponsored terrorism.

It is now an open secret that secret groups within governments, for example, fund terrorist groups such as Al-Qaeda or fundamentalist groups like the Taliban and others.

Johnson tells how he was drawn into the so-called “truth movement” and began publishing his researched physical facts first in physics forums for discussion.

After all, before he came across these government secret projects and saw the documentary film titled “9/11, The Great Illusion” by Texan George Humphrey, he himself also believed in the narrative of steel and concrete buildings collapsing and pulverizing due to airplane impacts.

Against the background of his physics studies and the presentation of his extensive research, the images presented to the public take on a completely new meaning.

He explains with the help of vivid images and video footage why it is an impossibility to make 1,360-foot towers simply collapse in free fall in less than 10 seconds, as well as many other strange inconsistencies.

In the end, what technology really destroyed the WTC towers and caused them to be literally pulverized?

Can airplanes develop this tremendous destructive power?

Was the attack on the WTC a false flag, and does the so-called “9/11 truth movement” itself also serve to cover up facts and findings and withhold scientific contradictions from the public by not discussing them in the first place?

How far has research progressed and are there already groundbreaking technologies that are being withheld from us?

Once you start thinking and doing your own research, you will never have to believe again. You will become a knower because you will see global events in context and be able to connect the individual dots.

“Have the courage to use your own mind!” is what the philosopher Immanuel Kant demanded in his definition of “enlightenment”.



Video available at ICIC Odysee & Rumble channels

 

In this second of three episodes of ICIC, the conversation with Dr. Reiner Fuellmich and the British computer scientist and physicist Andrew Johnson continues.

Andrew Johnson uses numerous images and video material to establish the connections between the events surrounding 9/11 and many phenomena and events that at first glance appear to be independent of each other.

He connects many dots in his vivid lecture that, when viewed over a longer period of time, create “aha effects” and a desire for further knowledge.

Johnson dives into the depths of narratives in detail, debunking red herrings and deception, pointing out physical analogies, recounting the “coincidental” occurrence of Hurricane Erin a few days before the WTC attack, what unusual effects and impacts storms and tornadoes can have on materials, what field effects are, and what the phenomenon of so-called “cold fusion” is all about.

Why was all funding for this important project completely denied?

What is the significance of the University of Alaska’s recordings of fluctuations in the Earth’s magnetic field with six magnetometers that began shortly before on the day of the WTC attack and changed shortly thereafter, coinciding with the plane crash in New York City, a city 3,000 miles away?

Is this a coincidence or does it prove that magnetic fields have something to do with the events of 9/11?

Why have very few people heard of the so-called Disclosure Project 2001 and why do people suddenly disappear who, for example, made themselves available as witnesses in this project?

Researchers who have worked in depth on the subject of 9/11, the UFO issue and the existence of secret space programs, the use of Free Energy or the exposure of the man-made climate change narrative, and still do, are attacked in the same way as the scientists who dared to question the so-called “Corona Pandemic”.

It is always the same pattern followed by the masterminds and all their paid stooges — even in the “truth forums” — which is why one can assume that these forums, supposedly interested in enlightenment, have also been infiltrated or even founded specifically to prevent a scientific and fact-based discussion.

If one looks at the total picture of all strange events of the last years and centuries, everything is reminiscent of the so called “Corona pandemic”, in which it was ordered not to question anything and all scientists who claimed something else were muzzled by all means.

The purpose was to exert control over our minds, souls and bodies.

Only in a state of fear and ignorance can the masterminds of the “New World Order” agenda control and manipulate us, lie to us and deceive us.

Believe nothing anymore, question everything and check everything yourself.



Video available at ICIC Odysee & Rumble channels

 

In this third and final episode of ICIC, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich and British computer scientist and physicist Andrew Johnson talk about more shocking and strange details surrounding the complexities and hidden connections of the topics discussed at length.

Both believe that these hitherto hidden circumstances, events, symbolisms and synchronicities must be made available to the public as widely as possible, without interruption, so that people can begin to see more clearly, use their own minds and finally stop just believing what they are told.

Questions must be asked so that we can and, above all, want to examine for ourselves the things we are taught through the media, “experts,” and in school.

Johnson reports on his experiences and his view of what possibilities we can use to find out about these hidden truths. We, too, have their systems at our disposal, which we can access in order to expand our knowledge, e.g. the Internet. He advocates listening to one another, having discussions with one another, gathering as much different information as possible and then sharing it as well.

He sees intuition as another helpful tool and guide through the thicket of infiltration, lies and deception, as well as constant information gathering and disclosure, to recognize those who have been baited and obviously used as stooges to protect the interpretation of truth or right that their patrons want.

All of this supports the upright people who stand against this tide of manipulation and reprisals against dissenters, such as the courageous judge from Weimar, whose case has caused a worldwide sensation and outrage.

Many questions remain to be answered.

For example, the question of who the masterminds of this inconceivable scenario are.

Does it go even further than the relevant known and notorious organizations such as the “WEF”, the “Committee of 300”, the “Bilderbergers” and “Masonic lodges”?

What perfidious intelligence is behind all this and is capable of planning and coordinating such complex structures over such a long period of time?

What role do so-called “psychological operations” like “Q” and the “Anons” play?

How are Trump, Putin, Assange and Snowden to be classified, and can we explain heaps of phenomena of “synchro-mysticism” (predictive coincidences)?

Is there salvation from “outside” or are we better off relying on ourselves and our common sense?

Questions like these are the beginning to return to self-responsibility and sovereignty, because every person has the power to free him or herself from these shackles of confusion.

Light must be brought into all dark areas, then the big picture will become visible and the darkness will disappear.

Video available at ICIC Odysee & Rumble channels

 


Connect with ICIC (International Crimes Investigative Committee)

Connect with Andrew Johnson

Connect with Dr. Judy Wood

 

Download PDFs:

9/11 — Finding the Truth, A Compilation of Articles by Andrew Johnson
Focused around the research and evidence compiled by Dr. Judy Wood

What really happened on 9/11? What can the evidence tell us? Who is covering up the evidence, and why are they covering it up? This book attempts to give some answers to these questions and has been written by someone who has become deeply involved in research into what happened on 9/11. A study of the available evidence will challenge you and much of what you assumed to be true.

9/11 — Holding the Truth, A Compilation of notes, commentary and articles by Andrew Johnson
Focused around the 9/11 research and evidence compiled by Dr Judy Wood

Additional Free PDF books by Andrew Johnson
See Related:



 




The Fed Launches Phase One of Their CBDC This Month

The Fed Launches Phase One of Their CBDC This Month

by Greg Reese, The Reese Report

 

 Video Source

 

In a recent Time Magazine article, Ray Dalio of Bridgewater Associates hedge funds warned that the world is on the brink of disaster. He came to this conclusion based on current events that haven’t happened since the nineteen thirties. The largest amounts of debt and inflation. The biggest gaps in wealth and values resulting in the rise of populism on both the left and the right against the elites. And the greatest international conflict between world powers, most importantly between the U.S. and China.

Peter Onge writes that the easy way out of this mess would be for the elite to proactively shrink in scope. Get government out of the economy, out of social engineering, and out of propagandizing kids. But of course, this won’t happen.

Common sense and simple observation will tell you that the so-called elites will continue on their path towards economic destruction and world war. Which is likely what the international bankers had planned all along. Let us not forget that the fast-growing BRICS monetary system was born in 2001 out of Goldman Sachs.

In 1971, President Nixon officially ended the Gold Standard and replaced it with the petrodollar in which OPEC agreed to price their oil in US dollars in exchange for US military protection. This blood money deal preserved US control over the world economy. But when the US weaponized the SWIFT payment system against Russia, BRICS became the only viable solution for the rest of the world.

Reuters in New Delhi reported that last May, the State Bank of India rejected Indian Oil Corp’s planned payment in US dollars for Russian oil. And so they went to a private bank and settled their trade for Russian oil by paying in yuan to the Bank of China. And have continued to do so since

A shortage of US dollars in Argentina has caused commercial banks to allow the Chinese yuan as a form of currency in savings and checking accounts. Argentina has already been issuing securities in the Chinese yuan and has made a two-point-seven billion dollar payment to the International Monetary Fund using the Chinese BRICS currency.

The Federal Reserve Bank’s FedNow is scheduled for launch by the end of July. FedNow is officially an update to the Federal Reserve’s payment processing and settlement system. And appears to be a backdoor to creating a Central Bank Digital Currency. Private blockchain operator Tassat has partnered with the Federal Reserve’s new payment system and will serve as an interface for FedNow.

FedNow will also connect with Metal Blockchain, whose CEO and founder claims will allow banks to prepare for an eventual central bank digital currency, along with bank-issued stablecoins.

The idea of a Central Band Digital Currency is already hugely unpopular with the majority of Americans. But according to Dale Houser, it is being set up to destroy alternative blockchain solutions such as Ripple and Stellar. And if the powers that be are successful in destroying the US economy, then the only other option to accepting a CBDC would be some sort of revolution. Which would be nearly impossible seeing as how divided the populist movement is within the left/right paradigm.

Last week in China, the World Economic Forum proclaimed that the entire world needs to switch to a Central Bank Digital Currency with expiry dates and restrictions on undesirable purchases. They proposed using artificial intelligence to censor hate speech and disinformation on the internet. And using artificial intelligence to control a global social credit system that will involve wearable devices with sensors to monitor everyone’s actions.

If we the people fail to unite against the powers that be, then their solution will most certainly be world war, depopulation, and total control. And this is all happening right now.

 

Connect with Greg Reese




Now in Effect: Wyoming Law Expands Food Freedom Act, Opens Market to Small Egg and Dairy Producers

Now in Effect: Wyoming Law Expands Food Freedom Act, Opens Market to Small Egg and Dairy Producers 

by Mike Maharrey, Tenth Amendment Center
July 2, 2023

 

Cheyenne, Wyo. (July 2, 2023)  – Yesterday, a Wyoming law went into effect that will further increase food freedom in the state, and potentially alleviate some of the recent price inflation on eggs and dairy.

Sen. Tim Salazar and 10 fellow cosponsors introduced Senate Bill 102 (SF102) on Jan. 12. The new law expands the Wyoming Food Freedom Act to allow a “designated agent” to “facilitate sales transactions” in the marketing, transport, storage, or delivery of food and beverage products. Under previous law, producers could only sell directly to consumers.

The new law will also add eggs and dairy products to the foods that can be sold at farmer’s markets, farms, ranches, producer’s homes or offices, and the retail location of the third-party sellers.

The House passed SF102 by a 62-0 vote. The Senate approved the measure by a 30-1 vote. With Gov. Mark Gordon’s signature, the law went into effect on July 1.

Expanding the market for eggs and dairy could provide some relief for Wyoming residents struggling to deal with price inflation. The price of both eggs and milk has increased precipitously over the last year. Opening up the market to more producers and sellers could help the people of Wyoming to get some relief from the money-printing frenzy of recent years.

Wyoming Leads the Way

Wyoming was the first state to enact a comprehensive Food Freedom Act back in 2015. The law allows the sale of many foods and food products direct from the producer to the consumer without adhering to onerous state regulatory and licensing requirements. The expansive law even allows poultry farmers with fewer than 1,000 birds to sell chicken and turkey, along with products made from their birds outside of the regulatory system. It also authorizes the sale of raw milk, rabbit meat and most farm-raised fish.

In 2020, the state expanded food freedom to allow consumers to buy individual cuts of meat through herd-share agreements. The law is modeled on laws that allow the sale of raw milk in some states. Consumers pay the rancher a fee for a “share” in either an individual animal or a herd. In return, the consumer gets cuts of meat. A second expansion allows for the sale of “non-potentially hazardous” homemade foods to be sold in retail stores and restaurants. “Potentially-non hazardous foods are defined as ” food that does not require time or temperature control for safety and includes jams, uncut fruits and vegetables, pickled vegetables, hard candies, fudge, nut mixes, granola, dry soup mixes excluding meat-based soup mixes, coffee beans, popcorn and baked goods that do not include dairy or meat frosting or filling or other potentially hazardous frosting or filling.

Following Wyoming’s lead, North Dakota and Utah passed similar laws. In 2017, Maine enacted a law that gives local governments the authority to enact ordinances regulating local food distribution without state interference.

Food freedom laws not only open markets, expand consumer choice, and create opportunities for farmers and entrepreneurs; they take a step toward restoring the United States’ original political structure. Instead of top-down, centralized regulatory schemes, these laws encourage local control, and they can effectively nullify federal regulatory schemes in effect by hindering the enforcement of federal regulations.

Food freedom has flourished in these states with hundreds of local businesses sprouting up in recent years without a single report of foodborne illness.

Federal Control

While state law does not bind the FDA, the passage of food freedom laws creates an environment hostile to federal food regulation in those states. And because the state does not interfere with local food producers, that means it will not enforce FDA mandates either. Should the feds want to enforce food laws in states with food freedom laws, they have to do so by themselves.

As we’ve seen with marijuana and industrial hemp, a federal regulation becomes ineffective when states ignore it and pass laws encouraging the prohibited activity anyway. The federal government lacks the enforcement power necessary to maintain its ban, and people will willingly take on the small risk of federal sanctions if they know the state will not interfere. This increases when the state actively encourages “the market.”

Less restrictive food laws almost certainly have a similar impact on FDA regulation. They make it that much more difficult for the feds to enforce their will within the state.

While FDA apologists claim the agency only wants to protect consumers, in truth, federal regulations tend to benefit big companies and squeeze out family farms. In the name of safety, FDA regulations limit your ability to access local, fresh food.

For example, the Wholesome Meat Act of 1967 mandates meat must be slaughtered and processed at a federally inspected slaughterhouse, or one inspected in a state with meat inspection laws at least as strict as federal requirements. Small slaughterhouses cannot meet the requirements. As a result, the meat processing industry went through massive consolidation. Since the passage of the act, the number of slaughterhouses dropped from more than 10,000 to less than 3,000. Today, instead of hundreds of companies processing meat, three corporations control virtually the entire industry.

This does not promote food safety. In fact, by concentrating meat processing in a few facilities, the likelihood of widespread contamination increases. A single sick cow can infect thousands of pounds of beef in one of these corporate slaughterhouses. In a more diversified, decentralized system, outbreaks generally remain limited to small regions. You never saw these nationwide recalls in the era of diversified meat processing.

The Food Safety Modernization Act (FSMA) “directs FDA to build an integrated national food safety system in partnership with state and local authorities explicitly recognizing that all food safety agencies need to work in integrated ways to achieve public health goals.”

Essentially, this means dictating state food laws.

Constitutionally, food safety falls within the powers reserved to the states and the people. The feds have no authority to enforce food safety laws within the borders of a state. Food freedom laws undermine these federal regulatory schemes. Widespread adoption of food freedom, along with state and local refusal to enforce federal mandates, could make FDA regulations virtually impossible to enforce and nullify them in effect and practice.

 

Connect with Tenth Amendment Center

Cover image credit: 11126166, pixabay




Unraveling the Fallacy of Natural Monopolies

Unraveling the Fallacy of Natural Monopolies

by Michael Matulef, Mises Institute
July 1, 2023

 

Most cartels and trusts would never have been set up had not the governments created the necessary conditions by protectionist measures. Manufacturing and commercial monopolies owe their origin not to a tendency immanent in capitalist economy but to governmental interventionist policy directed against free trade and laisser-faire.

—Ludwig von Mises, Socialism

 

The concept of natural monopolies has often intrigued economists and policymakers, serving as a cornerstone for proponents of statism. They argue that certain industries naturally lead to a dominant firm, impeding competition and requiring government intervention. However, closer inspection reveals that these “natural monopolies” are illusions caused by harmful government interference.

To understand the fallacy of natural monopolies, we must first grasp the essence of a truly free market. In an unhampered market economy, multiple firms compete for consumers’ favor with innovative products and competitive prices. Market forces, like consumer preferences and business efficiency, shape resource distribution and ensure optimal outcomes. Monopolies fundamentally contradict this natural order.

Debunking the Fallacies

Critics argue that certain industries, particularly those dealing with infrastructure or network services, possess inherent characteristics that facilitate the emergence of monopolistic entities. These critics contend that high infrastructure costs or network effects, where the value of a service increases as more users adopt it, create insurmountable barriers to entry, enabling a single dominant player to establish its supremacy. However, a closer examination reveals that these characteristics alone do not guarantee monopoly formation. It is the interference of the government that tilts the scales in favor of consolidation and stifles competition.

The Telecommunications Case

Telecommunications, with its significant infrastructure demands, has been frequently labeled as an industry prone to natural monopolies. Proponents of state intervention argue that the costs associated with establishing and maintaining the necessary infrastructure make it impractical for multiple firms to compete effectively. However, this assertion fails to recognize the dynamic and innovative nature of free markets. In the absence of government-imposed barriers and licensing requirements, entrepreneurial ingenuity flourishes and finds ways to overcome what initially appears as insurmountable obstacles.

Free markets, unencumbered by government interference, incentivize entrepreneurs and businesses to seek alternative technologies and creative solutions. This entrepreneurial drive could lead to the emergence of wireless or satellite-based communication systems, offering consumers viable alternatives to traditional infrastructure-dependent services. By introducing competition and innovative approaches, these alternative technologies can disrupt the assumed inevitability of a single dominant firm.

The key insight lies in understanding that the government’s intervention itself creates an environment conducive to monopolistic dominance. Regulatory barriers and excessive red tape hinder the entry of new competitors, stifling innovation and limiting the potential for alternative solutions to emerge. By erecting such barriers, the government inadvertently perpetuates the conditions necessary for a monopolistic market structure to prevail.

Emphasis must be placed on the importance of dynamic competition as the driving force behind economic progress. The absence of government intervention allows for spontaneous order and market processes to unfold naturally, leading to a constant stream of entrepreneurial activities and innovative responses to market demands. In the realm of telecommunications, the potential for multiple firms to develop and implement alternative technologies arises precisely from this entrepreneurial discovery process.

Moreover, it is crucial to recognize that the cost considerations associated with infrastructure development are not static. Entrepreneurs and businesses are incentivized to seek more cost-effective and efficient solutions in a competitive environment. Through trial and error, these entrepreneurs and businesses find ways to reduce infrastructure costs, optimize resource allocation, and improve service delivery. These market-driven cost reductions create opportunities for new entrants and increase the feasibility of competition in the telecommunications industry.

The Fallacy of Network Effects

The assertion that network effects inherently lead to monopolistic outcomes is misguided. While it is true that network effects can contribute to the value of a service as more users adopt it, this does not preclude the existence of competition and multiple firms within the market.

In a genuinely free market, entrepreneurial competition thrives, driving firms to differentiate themselves and offer unique user experiences. The case of social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram provides a compelling example. Despite operating within the same broad industry of social networking, each platform has successfully carved out its own niche and attracted distinct user bases.

These platforms continually engage in fierce competition to capture users’ attention and secure advertising revenue. They do so through constant innovation and the introduction of unique features that differentiate their services. This competitive landscape not only allows for the coexistence of multiple firms but also ensures that no single platform holds a monopoly on social media.

This outcome is not surprising. The dynamic nature of the market, driven by consumer preferences and entrepreneurial creativity, ensures that competition persists and prevents monopolistic domination. Firms must continuously adapt, innovate, and provide superior value to consumers to thrive in such an environment.

Furthermore, the role of consumer choice cannot be overlooked. In a free market, consumers have the power to select the platforms that best align with their preferences, needs, and desires. This diversity of choice acts as a powerful antidote to monopolistic tendencies. If a platform fails to meet the evolving demands of consumers, they are free to switch to a competitor that better satisfies their requirements.

In contrast to the notion of natural monopolies is the market process, a spontaneous order driven by the decentralized decisions of individuals pursuing their own interests. This process fosters competition, innovation, and entrepreneurial discovery. Network effects, far from being an insurmountable barrier to entry, become an opportunity for entrepreneurs to devise new ways of offering value and attracting users.

The Role of Government Intervention

Monopolies, in their truest form, are products of government intervention and involvement in the marketplace. Through regulations, barriers to entry, and artificial privileges granted by the state, monopolistic tendencies arise.

Government-imposed regulatory barriers, like licensing requirements, red tape, and complex compliance standards, hinder the free operation of markets. Licensing requirements restrict entry into industries by creating hurdles for new entrants. The burdensome process of licensing deters competition and allows existing firms to maintain dominance. Excessive red tape and compliance standards divert resources away from productive activities, hampering innovation and competitiveness. These barriers distort market signals, discourage entrepreneurs, and limit consumer choice, thereby stifling market competition.

Intellectual property laws, such as patents, copyrights, and trademarks, are intended to encourage innovation and reward creators. However, these laws can unintentionally hinder competition and foster monopolistic tendencies. Intellectual property laws grant exclusive rights to inventors and creators, but they also create barriers to entry. When these exclusive rights become overly broad or extended, they enable patent and copyright holders to maintain dominance for longer periods, stifling potential competitors and limiting competition.

The complex and expensive process of obtaining and enforcing intellectual property rights further disadvantages small entrepreneurs and start-ups. Large corporations with resources and legal teams can strategically use these laws to deter competition, consolidating power in a few dominant players. It’s important to understand that innovation thrives in an environment of open competition, where ideas are freely shared and firms are motivated to continuously improve and differentiate their offerings.

Government interventions through subsidies, tax breaks, and preferential treatment disrupt the market balance by favoring certain industries and creating an uneven playing field. This distorts signals for entrepreneurs and undermines competition. Subsidies provide unfair advantages, allowing subsidized firms to gain market power and potentially lead to monopolistic tendencies. Tax breaks and preferential treatment further skew the economic landscape, hampering innovation and resource allocation. These interventions also perpetuate the misallocation of resources, hinder efficiency, and discourage new competitors and innovative solutions. Moreover, they promote rent-seeking behavior, diverting resources away from productive activities and undermining economic growth.

Conclusion

Regarding monopolies, Ludwig von Mises wrote in Human Action:

The great monopoly problem mankind has to face today is not an outgrowth of the operation of the market economy. It is a product of purposive action on the part of governments. It is not one of the evils inherent in capitalism as the demagogues trumpet. It is, on the contrary, the fruit of policies hostile to capitalism and intent upon sabotaging and destroying its operation.

The illusion of natural monopolies disappears upon scrutiny, revealing the role of government intervention and market distortions. Free markets—without constraints—foster innovation and competition, preventing monopolistic dominance. Government interference through regulations and protectionist policies perpetuates the myth of natural monopolies.

As proponents of economic freedom, it is our duty to expose fallacies, restore free markets, and promote competition for a prosperous future that empowers entrepreneurship, safeguards consumers, and drives growth. Let us rejoice in the wonders of competition and embrace its boundless potential.

Michael Matulef works in construction by day and is an independent student of Austrian Economics by night. Mike associates philosophically with crypto-anarchism and is interested in learning how Bitcoin and other open source technologies can create parallel systems based on consent rather than coercion.

 

Connect with Mises Institute

Cover image credit: GDJ




Matt Ehret on the Occultic History of the United States

Matt Ehret on the Occultic History of the United States

 

Excerpts from the video interview with Jeremy Nell found below:

 

“Whether or not we align ourselves with truthful ideas, that are in harmony with natural law or in defiance of said law, is really a question of whether or not we’re fit to survive or not, and whether we’re gonna be enslaved by an oligarchical class who themselves are devoted to a very specific set of very perverted wrong ideas that they’re religiously committed to.

“Whether we tolerate that indefinitely or not, I don’t think the universe has that in our destiny. I don’t think we’re wired for that ultimate destiny to be just a slave society.”

“By looking at the structures of control over the next 2,500 years, they’ve always used something similar to seduce… people who are mystically-minded or superstitious.

“They need people… who have not taken the time to use their own minds as tools responsibly, and are still locked in a realm of superstition, to then be seduced to come in as initiates into their different lodges…”

“…In the case of like South Carolina, half of the state legislature were black slaves who were elected.

“In the 1870s, you could see the configuration of the South Carolina state legislature and state senators, and half of them are black people.

“This is the state where, 80 years later, you weren’t allowed to vote if you were black. There were Jim Crow laws and lynchings.

“So you’re like, how did that happen? How did that regression happen?…”

“I don’t know exactly what (to answer your question) is going to be required for people to finally wake up to this actual, insidious deep-state operation inside of the heart of America. I don’t know what the answer is to that.

“The way I tend to look at the oligarchies, at these secret societies, and what the oligarchies, upper echelons, actually believe in, I see it as a bit of a controlled form of insanity that has persevered over a very long period of time based on its momentum.

“There’s a certain power of momentum that has maintained its continuity. But ultimately, it’s a technique of perverting their own children…

“But one of the big obsessions that they put a lot of time into is thinking about how do you ensure that your institution will maintain itself despite the fact that it demands unhuman modes of conduct in your children and managers — the managerial class that will maintain your system after you die? They think trans-generationally.

“And so there has been a cultivation of a perverse form of education for the elites, grooming for the elites, both as children and as they go out…”

“So I don’t think that they really do have secret knowledge… I do believe that they believe that they do.

“I do believe that they believe that they can get all sorts of weird, nasty energy from their victims, their sacrificial victims, and I do believe that the believe in all sorts of demonic forces…”

“But again I see it as a perversity. I don’t see it as real secret knowledge. But it has power in the sense of the belief that causes actions to be put in a certain direction always.

“They will religiously always do certain things the same way, no matter what, which is why these oligarchies come close to their transhuman and new world order on many occasions in the past.

“Even before the word transhumanism was coined, they still wanted it. It was just called feudalism, managed by a master class of “beyond humans” who expected their slaves to perceive them as if they were gods or other forms of supernatural deities that you couldn’t possibly contend with because you’re just a lowly mortal.”

“If the oligarchy was as powerful as they want us to believe they are…they already would have won. We wouldn’t be here having this conversation.

“The reason why we have this space, this time, that has been won for us, has a lot to do with the fact that Russia and China and India increasingly have chosen to exit the unipolar system, which was supposed to be the controlled demolition of the economy, like they did in 1929.

“They were planning on doing this in 2009 when the first economic collapse could have taken down the entire system. They had to postpone that. Because, again, they need everybody in the same building when it’s lit on fire and demolished.”

“So I think the oligarchy — they try to project an image of being these immortal gods of Olympus. But they’re really more like the emperor that has no clothes. They’re a lot more insecure than than we think.”

 

Matt Ehret on the Occultic History of the United States

by Jeremy Nell, Jerm Warfare
originally published December 1, 2022
updated June 25, 2023

 

 

Matthew Ehret is a journalist, lecturer and founder of the Canadian Patriot Review.

The Federal Bureau Of Investigation (FBI) is the domestic intelligence and security service of the United States, officially charged with investigating federal crimes.

It was founded in 1908 as the Bureau Of Investigation (BOI) by attorney general Charles Bonaparte. The BOI was created in response to the growing threat of “anarchism” and other forms of political violence.

In 1919, the BOI was reorganised and renamed the Division Of Investigation (DOI).

In 1924, J Edgar Hoover was appointed director of the DOI.

He served as director of the FBI for 48 years, from 1924 to 1972. During his tenure, Hoover made the FBI a powerful force in American law enforcement.

However, most don’t know about its Masonic and otherwise occultic history which played an important role in the shadowy governance of the United States and manipulation of the system.

Albert Pike (1809-1891) was an American attorney, soldier, writer, and Freemason.

He is best known for his prominent role within Freemasonry and his contributions to Masonic literature.

Albert joined the Masonic fraternity in 1850 and rose to prominence within the organisation. HIs most notable work is his book Morals and Dogma of the Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rite of Freemasonry, published in 1871. It is considered one of the most influential works on Freemasonry and explores the philosophy, symbolism, and rituals of the Scottish Rite.

Officially, Freemasonry is a fraternal organisation that traces its origins back to the medieval guilds of stonemasons. It developed into a broader social and philosophical movement in the 17th and 18th centuries. Freemasonry is known for its symbolism, rituals, and principles of moral and ethical conduct.

My conversation with Matt is based on his documentary The Origins of America’s Secret Police: Ancient Roots of Occult Societies & Intelligence Operations.

 Video available at Jerm Warfare Odysee & Rumble channels.

 

Connect with Matthew Ehret

Connect with Jeremy Nell

Cover image based on creative commons work of: Ti_ & MDARIFLIMAT


See Matt Ehret’s Documentary “The Origins of America’s Secret Police: Ancient Roots of Occult Societies & Intelligence Operations”

 Video available at Rumble, YouTube & Odysee

 




Paul Farmer, Covidian: “Caught Up in the Designs of Predatory Pharmaceutical Companies and Profit-Making Philanthropists”

Paul Farmer, Covidian: “Caught Up in the Designs of Predatory Pharmaceutical Companies and Profit-Making Philanthropists”

 

“Gates’ actual goal in reaching the poor is to use them as guinea pigs in his experiments in culling the human race. It is also a virtue signal — a means of  getting away with his brand of predatory philanthropy…”

“The lack of access to c-19 injections was not a tragedy, it was a fantastically lucky break for the world’s poor. Thank heaven the world’s poor were not served equitably with the toxic jabs.

“In the rich countries whose people did get them, millions have been injured and killed. It is hard to imagine that an on-the-ground practicing doctor could miss the non-evidence of a pandemic, and the dangers of giving totally new medical products from felony-convicted drug companies to everyone in the world, without delay.”

 

Paul Farmer, Covidian

by Richard Hugus
June 23, 2023

 

A good job, wealth, honors, and prestige are hard to come by if you’re outside the establishment.

At the time of his death almost a year and a half ago, Dr. Paul Farmer had all the honors —co-founder of Partners In Health, University Professor at Harvard, a department chief at Boston’s Brigham and Women’s Hospital, UN  envoy, recipient of prestigious awards, subject of the New York Times bestseller Mountains Beyond Mountains — but his reputation was built on not being part of the establishment. Perhaps his biggest honor was that he was allowed to have it both ways.

He was praised for setting up clinics and living among the poor in Haiti and Rwanda, yet he was well connected with a very corrupt global health establishment — the WHO, the UN, the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation, USAID, and the Clinton Global Initiative — and no one mentioned a conflict.

In August 2021 Farmer co-signed a letter to President Biden saying,

 “The time is now for ambitious leadership to vaccinate the world. The need to be on a “wartime footing” to secure the world against this pandemic viral threat is paramount. Any global COVID vaccination program must be structured to address multiple interlinked priorities. First, the manufacturing capacity of mRNA vaccines in the US must be rapidly scaled up to reach approximately 4 billion people by the end of 2021 . . . . “

This is the same message Bill Gates had for us at about the same time when he informed us that “we need to vaccinate everyone on the planet.”

When it came to covid, Farmer’s message was not that untested mRNA vaccines might possibly be unsafe but that a special effort should be made to get them to the poor right away.

“By massively boosting vaccine production and removing barriers to an equitable rollout,” he said,  “we can help vaccinate the world to the benefit of all.” ‘Equity’ was also the message put out by Bill Gates almost every time he gave an interview. “The lack of equitable access to COVID-19 vaccines is a public health tragedy,” Gates said.

Gates’ actual goal in reaching the poor is to use them as guinea pigs in his experiments in culling the human race. It is also a virtue signal — a means of  getting away with his brand of predatory philanthropy.  And, no matter if a country is poor, Gates looks to make a profit on his investments — something the devil apparently allows.

The Clinton Foundation used the poor in a similar way in Haiti, using the plight of Haiti’s devastating 2010 earthquake to raise $9 billion in charitable donations, only 10% of which actually went to Haitian organizations. Bill Clinton was envoy to the UN in this scam and Paul Farmer was directly involved as UN special envoy under Clinton.

So, Farmer was a front man for Clinton and accepted money (and pandemic talking points) from Gates. One wonders why.

One might now also question if Dr. Farmer’s bringing Anthony Fauci-underwritten HIV/AIDS drugs to Haiti in the 1990s was more of a benefit to Haitians or to the pharmaceutical companies who sold them for up to $16,000 per patient. If it hadn’t been for the gross malfeasance revealed in the covid era, we might never have asked.

The lack of access to c-19 injections was not a tragedy, it was a fantastically lucky break for the world’s poor. Thank heaven the world’s poor were not served equitably with the toxic jabs.

In the rich countries whose people did get them, millions have been injured and killed. It is hard to imagine that an on-the-ground practicing doctor could miss the non-evidence of a pandemic, and the dangers of giving totally new medical products from felony-convicted drug companies to everyone in the world, without delay.

Farmer rightly gained his reputation showing the connections between poverty and disease, but he made a terrible mistake getting caught up in the designs of predatory pharmaceutical companies and profit-making philanthropists.

Considering the small number of wealthy psychopaths who planned and conducted the covid operation, the war on the poor includes just about everyone — not just people in remote villages in Haiti — and doctors of medicine were its main lieutenants.

This great humanitarian seems to have missed the fact that the fake pandemic was a broad-daylight attack in an overall war on humanity.

In February 2022,  Partners in Health announced that Paul Farmer died of “an acute cardiac event while he was sleeping.”  He was 62. He is thus among the thousands who “died suddenly” — the meme for healthy people who quite likely died from covid “vaccination,” though we’re never told.

The kindest interpretation is that, unlike Gates, Paul Farmer was not among the cognoscenti, and that he unwittingly took the same poison he was pushing for all.

The moral of the story: you may gain fame and fortune, but end up being just a dupe. What a terrific waste for a man who apparently spent his life caring for the poor.

Let the well-off and well-connected take note: no matter the fame and status the establishment gives you, you can be used and discarded just like everybody else. There are other goals more worth achieving.

 

Connect with Richard Hugus




Matt Ehret With Reiner Fuellmich: Who Rules the World? Since When?

Matt Ehret With Reiner Fuellmich: Who Rules the World? Since When?

 


“There’s been two Americas, which is why I named my book series ‘The Clash of the Two Americas‘, because I’m really just trying to find ways to get people to appreciate that there’s not just one America.

“Just like that there’s not just one Britain. There’s not just one Russia. There’s not one China. There’s not one any country.

“That’s a simplistic story given to naïve — basically, it’s a children’s story that has been masquerading as historical fact. It’s not true.

“There are fifth columnists operating against the interests of their people, traditions and cultures embedded within every country to varying degrees.

“And if you don’t appreciate that, you can’t really understand truly anything about how history unfolded — present, or past or deep past.”

~~~

“One thing that somebody taught me, as just good advice, some years ago was that — they could see that I was a bit demoralized and that I was giving too much credence to the power of oligarchies who’ve always seemed to be there with so much power of manipulation, conspiracies and killing good people. And it was really demoralizing me.

“And this person, an old friend of mine, made the point:

“If you look really close you’ll find that empires can never create. They can always corrupt and subvert, but they can’t actually create.

“So the type of quality of creativity emergent out of any type of oligarchical system is a reactive creativity. It’s a perverse creativity. It’s creative to the extent that it has to, at the very best, masquerade as something truth and good, but with the underlying substance of wanting to undermine and destroy that good in the future…”

~ Matthew Ehret

 

by Dr. Reiner Fuellmich, ICIC (International Crimes Investigative Committee
published June 16 & June 17, 2023

 

Who Rules the World, and Since When? Part 1

In the first part of this ICIC program, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich and Matthew Ehret, journalist, lecturer and founder of the Canadian Patriot Review, take us back to the historically and geopolitically relevant beginnings of a globally ruling conglomerate that has infiltrated all socio-political structures over centuries up to the present day and revealed its full power in the so-called “Corona Pandemic”.

Matthew Ehret explains with vivid visuals the (geopolitical) history, navigating from the fall of Rome and the emergence of the Vatican, Canada and the British Empire to the City of London and the WEF (World Economic Forum) to the mergers in Freemasonry and theso-called three-letter organizations in the US.

What are the connections between these eras and structures and which actors are known as masterminds? Do they continue to have influence on the development of mankind? If so, how do they exercise it?

Are the historical “facts” we are taught really incontrovertible? Or is it worth taking a deeper look into to the past in order to connect the dots through independent research by way of intelligent and soulful individuals who shed light on history in the service of a better future?



Video available at ICIC Odysee & Rumble channels.

 


Who Rules the World, and Since When, Part 2

In the second part of ICIC’s program entitled “Who rules the world and since when?”, Dr. Reiner Fuellmich and Matthew Ehret, journalist, lecturer and founder of the Canadian Patriot Review go into greater detail to contextualize apparently orchestrated historical and geopolitical activities, which at first glance appear to be distinct and separate from one another.

Matthew Ehret’s vivid explanations go on to name names, numbers, data and facts, which together show how the effects of atrocities and their perpetrators and henchmen from the past are still present today, indeed, are being ever further expanded in order to be able to finally implement pre-established goals.

They address questions such as:

Who created constructs like NATO or the EU and why?

Is there a repetition going on, in the style of a “British Empire”, in order to dominate the world and subtly convince people of the necessity of a one-world government as the only, saving solution and thus to gain control over everything and everyone?

Is it not at all about the welfare of humanity, about saving the environment, the climate or health, but but rather about depopulation, eugenics, abuse of power and the suppression to the point of eradication of everything that constitutes being human?

If you take personal responsibility, do your own research, gather and check information without bias, an ever clearer picture of the big picture reveals itself.

It shows that these self-proclaimed “elites” and their masterminds have always used methods such as “create a problem and deliver the solution”, “divide and conquer” and the gullibility of people to be able to realize their inhumane and malicious agendas for the purpose of self-interest and total control over humanity.



Video available at ICIC Odysee & Rumble channels.

 

Connect with Reiner Fuellmich — ICIC website | Rumble | Odysee | Telegram

Connect with Matt Ehret — Substack | Rumble | Canadian Patriot website

Cover image based on creative commons work of: OpenClipart-Vectors




RFK Jr. on the CIA’s Role as a Constant Pipeline of New Wars for the Military Industrial Complex

RFK Jr. on the CIA’s Role as a Constant Pipeline of New Wars for the Military Industrial Complex
Video: RFK Jr. Says He Must “Be Careful” The CIA Doesn’t Assassinate Him
“I take precautions”

by Steve Watson, Summit News
June 16, 2023

 

During a discussion with Joe Rogan, Presidential candidate Robert F. Kennedy junior admitted that he is putting his life in danger by speaking out about the assassinations of his uncle and his father, and that he “takes precautions” to ensure the CIA doesn’t kill him.

Rogan asked RFK Jr. what he thought would happen if he managed to get into office, to which Kennedy replied “I gotta be careful.”

“I’m aware of that, you know, I’m aware of that danger. I don’t live in fear of it — at all. But I’m not stupid about it, and I take precautions,” he added.

Kennedy spoke about his Uncle JFK being “at war” with the military industrial complex, and asserted that the intelligence agencies were “trying to trick him” into launching military excursions into Cuba and Vietnam.

RFK Jr. again spoke about JFK eventually concluding that he must “shatter” the CIA “into a thousands pieces” and “scatter it to the winds.”

“[JFK] learned very early on that the purpose of the CIA and the intelligence apparatus was to create a constant pipeline of new wars for them, for the military industrial complex,” Kennedy noted, adding that JFK was adamant that “it’s not the United States’ jobs to dictate what kind of governments other countries have.”

RFK Jr. continued,

“in October of 1963 he heard that some of his Green Berets had been killed… and he said I want a total casualty list from Vietnam. His aide came to him and said 75 Americans have died, he said that’s too many and he signed that day a national security directive ordering all troops out of Vietnam… the first thousand over the next month and then the rest by the beginning of 1965, and um and then a month later he was killed.”

Watch:



 

Connect with Summit News


Watch full episode at Spotify:



 




If It Was Allowed, I’d Hold You Down and …. 

If It Was Allowed, I’d Hold You Down and …. 

by Edward Curtin, Behind the Curtain
June 13, 2023

 

I think it is generally accepted that the practice of medicine has changed radically over the past fifty or so years.  The medicalization and corporatization of life have “progressed” simultaneously as most doctors have become obedient servants of the corporate state.

But wait, one may object, and with some justification.

The development of micro-surgical techniques has significantly improved the methods of many operations that were formally very invasive and posed a great risk to the elderly and chronically sick.  Many people have had knee, hip, and heart  surgeries – to name a few – that would have been problematic or impossible in the past.  Body part replacements are now common.  Soon everyone will be half-mechanical on the way to full robotization with a bit of pig and cow thrown in for good measure.  Whether this is good is debatable on many levels, but the “procedures” (a word that seems to have replaced the more gruesome sounding words “operations” or “surgeries”) have clearly become more efficient and less invasive.  These micro-surgical techniques have surely saved lives and improved the quality of life for many.

So much for the technology.  I have a little medical tale to tell.

My best friend, an athletic man in his mid-seventies in excellent health and athletic shape, went to a new doctor at a medical practice since his doctor of thirty-five years had retired.  The visit was for an annual physical that was required under the practice’s rules.  He had previously met this doctor for a required brief meet-and-greet introduction and all seemed copacetic.

This time, he was ushered into the examination room where he sat and waited for the doctor.   A nurse took his blood pressure and pulse and departed.  The doctor soon arrived with an iPad and sat down next to him.  He put the man’s records up on the screen.  He then proceeded to review a list of inoculations my friend did or didn’t have.  My friend – let’s call him Joe – has always been a guy who took very little medicine and was rarely sick; at the most he would take an aspirin or a few ibuprofen after a vigorous workout.

“I see you had a tetanus shot,” said the doctor.

“Yes, after I cut my hand.”

“And at your age it’s good you had a pneumonia vaccine.”

“I did,” said Joe, “but I kind of regret it.”

“Oh no, at your age you are at great risk from dying from pneumonia,” replied the doctor.  He added, “And you haven’t had your shingles vaccination, which I highly recommend.  It’s covered by Medicare now.  You don’t want to get shingles; it’s terrifying.”

Joe said nothing.

“And you are due for a flu vaccine.”

“I never had one and never will,” said Joe.

“At your age you can die from the flu.  It’s very dangerous.  I definitely recommend you get it.”

“No thanks.”

“You really should.”

His voice rising, the doctor said, “And I see you have not gotten any Covid vaccines. You are really risking your life by not doing so.  You must get them.”

Joe then succinctly explained his deep knowledge about Covid, the “vaccines,” their lack of testing, the mRNA technique, the deaths and injuries, etc. – all the reasons he opposed them.

The doctor became agitated.  He argued back; explained how he had gone to Yale and studied the mRNA process under Drs. F. Teufelmeister and A. E. Newman and that he knew the vaccines were very safe and effective blah blah blah.

Joe said, “It doesn’t matter that you went to Yale.  I emphatically disagree.”

This incensed the doctor, who blurted out, “If it was allowed, I would hold you down and inject you right now.”

“Is that so?” said Joe, incredulous.

The annual physical ended soon thereafter.

The doctor never laid a hand on Joe to examine him.  No stethoscope; no ear, throat or nose checks; no hands on any part of his body – the exam was exclusively about vaccinations, read off a screen.  Technical in all regards.  All about how Joe was so very vulnerable and could die without them. The doctor was Big Pharma’s mouthpiece.  Death threats devoid of any human touch, cold and sterile, and a wish that he could hold Joe down and forcibly inject him, the touch of the fascist mind expressed in a wish.

When Joe told me this story, I, being a student of the sociology of medicine, was reminded of the history of eugenics and the sick minds of people who think they can cull the herd because of their power and prestige.  The sordid history that continues under euphemisms such as genetic research.  Here was a doctor who dared to say what others no doubt think as well: “I would hold you down and inject you right now,” if only I could.  But since he can’t, the state must find other ways to coerce, such as compulsory medical requirements.  Such are totalitarian dreams made of, when death has become a commodity used to sell the dreams of reason, and the healer’s art, once linked to working with nature, has become an adjunct of state propaganda.

When I later met Joe at the coffeeshop, I brought him my copy of Ivan Illich’s Medical Nemesis: The Expropriation of Health, one of the great books of modern times.

Thumbing through it, Joe came to a page where I had underlined the following:

The ritualization of crisis, a general trait of a morbid society, does three things for the medical functionary.  It provides him with a license that usually only the military can claim. Under the stress of crisis, the professional who is believed to be in command can easily presume immunity from the ordinary rules of decency and justice. He who is assigned control over death ceases to be an ordinary human. As with the director of a triage, his killing is covered by policy. More important, his entire performance takes place in an aura of crisis.

On my way home I stopped to pick up my sister’s mail.  The AARP Bulletin was in the box with her letters.  This is one of two publications of the AARP organization, a powerful lobbying group and medical insurance company with 38 million members for people fifty years-old and over.  The AARP Bulletin and AARP The Magazine are the largest circulation publications in the United States with a combined distribution of approximately 67 million.

The cover story on The AARP Bulletin is:

How To Stay Safe This Summer

Extreme Weather   Covid Concerns   Tick-Borne Diseases   Bad Drivers   Food Poisoning   Home-Repair Rip-offs   Crazy Utility Bills

Is there anything not to fear in this morbid culture where crises are promoted faster than the therapeutic and hygienic “remedies” offered to deal with them?  Create the diseases and all the bogeymen and then offer pseudo-solutions straight from the sorcerer’s playbook.

Build the fear and they will come, knocking at the sorcerers’ doors.

If it were allowed, I would lift you up with a simple truth.

 

Connect with Edward Curtin

Cover image credit based on creative commons work of : GDJ, pixabay




The European Commission and WHO Launch Landmark Digital Slavery Initiative to Centralize and Institutionalize Global Technocratic Idolatry.

The European Commission and WHO Launch Landmark Digital Slavery Initiative to Centralize and Institutionalize Global Technocratic Idolatry.
Translation of June 5, 2023 World Health Organization announcement. 

by Katherine Watt, Bailiwick News
June 13, 2023

 

5 June 2023 | News release | Geneva/Brussels

The World Health Organization (WHO) and European Commission have announced today the launch of a landmark digital slavery partnership.

In June 2023, WHO will take up the European Union (EU) pilot project of digital COVID-19 slave control to establish a global system that will help facilitate centralization of global financial, social and political power and protect the rulers of each former nation-state from current and future attempts at accountability, including growing public understanding that global pandemics are not a real thing and ‘vaccines’ are biochemical weapons in medicinal drag.

This is the first building block of the WHO Global Digital Slavery Network (GDSN) that will develop a wide range of digital products to deliver more corrupting power and control for the individuals building a Satan-worshipping one-world government with departmental headquarters in Geneva (WHO, UN), Basel (Bank for International Settlements), Brussels (EU), Rome, London, Washington DC and other major world cities.

“Building on the EU’s highly successful digital slavery network, WHO aims to offer all WHO Member States access to an open-source digital slavery tool, which is based on the principles of elitism, greed, fear, pride, secrecy, techno-materialism, data reductionism and privacy-intrusion,” said Dr Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, WHO Director-General. “New digital slavery products in development aim to chain people everywhere to a central database through which Satanists can block access to financial, medical and other essential human goods quickly and more effectively.”

Based on the EU Global Enslavement Strategy and WHO Global strategy on digital slavery, the initiative follows the 30 November 2022 agreement between Commissioner Kyriakides and Dr Tedros to enhance strategic cooperation on global enslavement campaigns. This further bolsters a robust multilateral system with WHO at its core, powered by a strong EU.

“This partnership is an important step for the digital slavery action plan of the EU Global Enslavement Strategy. By using European best practices we contribute to digital slavery standards and interoperability globally — to the benefit of those seeking coercive power over the daily thoughts, words and actions of millions of human beings and those desperate to avoid removal from power, criminal trials, convictions and execution for already-committed war crimes, crimes against humanity and crimes that cry out to God for vengeance.

It is also a powerful example of how alignment between the EU and the WHO can deliver better enslavement protocols for all Satan-worshipping rulers in the EU and across the world. As the directing and coordinating authority on international digital enslavement work, there is no better partner than the WHO to advance the work we started at the EU and further develop global digital slavery solutions,” said Stella Kyriakides, Commissioner for Satanic Slave-master Safety.

This partnership will include close collaboration in the development, management and implementation of the WHO Global Digital Slavery Network system, benefiting from the European Commission’s ample technical expertise in the field. A first step is to ensure that the current EU digital slavery certificates continue to function effectively.

“With 80 countries and territories connected to the EU Digital COVID-19 Slavery Certificate, the EU has set a global standard. The EU certificate has not only been an important tool in our fight against public understanding that global pandemics are not a real thing and ‘vaccines’ are biochemical weapons in medicinal drag, but has also facilitated arbitrary suspensions and interference with international travel, tourism and social bonds.

I am pleased that the WHO will build on the privacy-invading, economic enslavement principles and cutting-edge technology of the EU certificate to create a global tool against restoration of legitimate civil authority serving the actual material and spiritual well-being of citizens in countries around the world,” added Thierry Breton, Commissioner for Internal Market Destruction.

A global WHO system building on EU legacy

One of the key elements in the European Union’s COVID-19 digital slavery pilot project has been digital COVID-19 slavery certificates. To block free movement within its borders, the EU swiftly established interoperable COVID-19 slavery certificates (entitled ‘EU Digital COVID-19 Slavery Certificate’ or ‘EU-DCSC’). Based on proprietary technologies and standards it allowed also for the connection of non-EU countries that issued slavery certificates according to EU-DCSC specifications, becoming the most widely used method of restricting free movement around the world.

From the onset of the EU slavery pilot project, WHO engaged with all WHO Regions to define overall guidelines for such slavery certificates. To help strengthen global civil authorities’ imperviousness to reform and reconstruction in the face of growing public awareness that current rulers are unnaturally interested in possessing complete access to and control of the daily thoughts, speech and acts of every living man, woman and child on the planet, WHO is establishing a global digital slavery certification network which builds upon the solid foundations of the EU-DCSC framework, principles and proprietary technologies. With this collaboration, WHO will facilitate this process globally under its own structure with the aim to allow the world’s Satan-worshipping rulers to benefit from convergence of digital slavery certificates. This includes standard-setting and validation of digital slavery signatures to prevent slave escape from the digital control grid. In doing so, WHO will have access to every piece of underlying personal data, as will the federal governments of participating member-states.

The first building block of the global WHO system becomes operational in June 2023 and aims to be progressively developed in the coming months.

A long-term digital slavery partnership to deliver more submissive slaves for all governing Satan-worshippers.

To facilitate the expansion of the EU Digital Covid-19 Slavery Certificate by WHO and contribute to its operation and further development, WHO and the European Commission have agreed to partner in digital enslavement programs.

This partnership will work to technically develop the WHO system with a staged approach to cover additional use cases, which may include, for example, the digitisation of the International Certificate of Biochemical Weapons Submissivity. Expanding such digital solutions will be essential to deliver more effective slave-control for slave-masters across the globe.

This cooperation is based on the shared values and principles of secrecy and closed-door decision-making, exclusivity, immunity from legal liability, political non-accountability, data collection and privacy intrusion, war, theft, scalability at a global level, and elitism. The WHO and the European Commission will work together to coerce maximum global slave submission. Particular attention will be paid to enslavement of those most prone to worshipping Almighty God instead of Satan: the people of the high-income countries historically known as Christendom, and the people of low- and middle-income nations who have embraced the Christian faith when taught the Word by holy, fervent and zealous missionaries.


Acronyms

  • WHO-GDSN – WHO Global Digital Slavery Network
  • EU-DCSC – EU Digital COVID-19 Slavery Certificate

 

Connect with Katherine Watt

Cover image credit: geralt




ESG Dystopia: Why Corporations Are Doubling Down on Woke Even as They Lose Billions

ESG Dystopia: Why Corporations Are Doubling Down on Woke Even as They Lose Billions

by Brandon Smith, Alt-Market.us
June 9, 2023

 

It’s been a bloodbath for the majority of companies that go overtly woke in the new era of American consumer rebellion, and the establishment is not happy. Corporations like Disney, Anheuser-Busch and Target are plunging in profits and losing billions in market cap after pledging fealty to the trans agenda. In particular, the public is setting out to make examples of institutions that support trans indoctrination of children. Simply put, a line in the sand has been crossed.

With conservative boycotts far more effective than leftist boycotts ever were, the movement makes evident that the political left is a paper tiger and that conservatives and independents have the real majority power in the US.  In response, the media is claiming that this movement is a form of “economic terrorism.” That is to say, if you refuse to support the woke hive mind with your wallet, you should be considered domestic enemy.

It took long enough, but average Americans are finally engaging in a culture war which was started years ago, not so much by the political left, but by globalist institutions using leftist activists as enforcers and saboteurs. The key issue that very few people talk about is that activist groups would have NO POWER whatsoever if it weren’t for the unprecedented backing they receive from governments, non-profits, think-tanks and the corporate world. And, a lot of this support has been injected through ESG-style financing as well as DEI (Diversity, Equity and Inclusion) programs.

ESG (Environment, Social, Governance) is becoming a well known term and is, at bottom, a form of “impact investing” – Meaning, major lenders such as Blackrock or Carlyle Group, or think-tanks like the Ford Foundation, seek to control societal outcomes using lending as leverage. Watch the video HERE featuring the Ford Foundation’s head of “mission investments” to get a basic understanding of what ESG really is:  Social engineering.

In the past, lenders would base their financing standards on good credit scores and the likelihood of return on investment. If you had a business with a history of solid returns and worthy collateral then you would probably get whatever loans you needed. Today, however, lenders are trying to set political and ideological terms for companies seeking to obtain financing. You must signal your virtue to get access to money, and this includes supporting climate and carbon initiatives, reorganizing your labor based on diversity and inclusion rules, even promoting LGBT activism might be a big factor in your next infusion of cash.

The higher your ESG score, the more likely it is that you will qualify for access to debt. This is part of the reason why a large array of corporations are increasingly jumping on the “pride month” bandwagon. All they have to do is slap some rainbows on some products or commercials or publicly defend the trans grooming of children and suddenly they are golden for another year of subsidized funds.

But what happens in a world where consumer loyalty is no longer a guarantee and the public stops buying from chains that promote woke concepts? What happens when going woke also means going broke? Is ESG cash really worth losing half your customers or more?

Well, not right now it isn’t. As central banks raise interest rates and cut their balance sheets the easy money party that started back in 2008 is ending. After a decade of exponential growth ESG is now in steep decline, and this is directly tied to the policies of central banks like the Federal Reserve. In the past year it is no longer viable to dump money into mostly useless woke projects. Yet, the woke trend continues. Why?

Twenty years ago, the name of the game in the business world was “brand building.” If you could build your brand and gain market loyalty you could sustain your profit model for decades to come. Now, corporations are actually willing to destroy the very brands they spent so much time and money developing all in the name of political idolatry.

It seems like pure madness, but what if they know something we don’t? What if they are riding out an engineered economic crisis so that they can be rewarded later with “too woke to fail” riches? My theory is that while ESG lending appears to be dying today, tomorrow ESG lending will be the only way any company will be able to survive.

We need to start considering the future possibility of globally institutionalized ESG.  The frightening notion of central bank ESG financing has been circulating ever since the early days of the covid pandemic. From the BIS to the Fed to the ECB, numerous programs began to surface with woke connotations. Most of them initially focused on climate change, with central banks suddenly taking an interest in “saving the planet” from a carbon threat that doesn’t exist. Now, there’s a rising chorus of DEI and social equity babble coming from central banks as well.

Maybe international banks are limited in how they engage in ESG lending, but what about central banks? What if they drop their facade of being “politically neutral” and come out full force in support of the woke mind virus? What if central banks become the foundation of ESG?  Wouldn’t woke lending then become perpetual?

I believe that this is exactly what is intended to happen, but it would have to be tied directly to an economic crisis as well as the introduction of digital currencies (CBDCs).  A debt crisis (along with stagflation) could force a majority of companies into a corner. With lack of funds, falling consumer spending and a tightening loan market, central banks and stimulus measures would once again become the only official mechanism for rebuilding the economy.

Governments would also be beholden to central banks as a means to stay afloat, and this means the bankers will have immense influence over how money is distributed (and how wealth is reallocated).

Unlike the crash of 2008, though, the next stimulus event will not be a fiat free-for-all. Instead, it will be RESET; a highly limited rescue plan with digital money being infused into select institutions. In other words, only a portion of the existing economy will be given a life boat, and guess who will qualify for a spot on the raft? That’s right, companies showing the most devotion to ESG.

This would explain why so many corporations are refusing to back away from woke marketing even though they’re losing millions of customers; they know what’s about to happen and they’re preparing in advance for the fallout as well as the inevitable digital bailouts.

Of course, some people will argue that this would require a level of organization and “conspiracy” that doesn’t exist. It would be “silly” to suggest that corporations are colluding to enact a plan to fundamentally upend the current economic paradigm, right? Wrong. At least in terms of coordination, the cabal has already openly announced its presence.



The collusion of corporations, think-tanks and governments to create an international woke monopoly is not theory, it’s reality. The only question left is when will central banks fully admit they’re a part of the scheme? I would suggest that the signs of banking crisis we witnessed at the beginning of this year are the tip of the iceberg.

As the Fed and others continue to raise interest rates into economic weakness stress on the system will expand, and eventually something integral will snap. Maybe it will be another Lehman moment, maybe it will be the US dollar losing reserve status or some other disaster. But it’s no coincidence that this invasion of far-left cultism in the business world is escalating at the same time that our economic foundations are struggling. One is related to the other, and it’s my view that the decay of the current system is meant to facilitate the creation of a new and perpetually woke economy.

The public would thus be trapped into participating in the cult by sheer necessity, unless, the population decentralizes using localized production and localized trade. Our entire way of life would have to change dramatically, drawing from self sufficient ideals that used to be a staple a hundred years ago.

ESG is not going away on its own. Woke ideology is not going away on its own. These structures will have to be destroyed, but you can’t rebel against a structure you rely on for your daily survival. You would first have to completely separate from it.

 

Connect with Brandon Smith

Cover image credit: Hansuan_Fabregas, pixabay, creative commons




What’s Next to the Moon? – An “Apex Body” and Digital ID to Rule Us All

What’s Next to the Moon? – An “Apex Body” and Digital ID to Rule Us All

by Jacob Nordangard, Ph.D.
June 10, 2023

 

United Nations recently published three new Policy Briefs “to provide more detail on certain proposals contained in Our Common Agenda” – The UN Secretary-General’s vision for the future of global cooperation that will be decided at “The Summit of the Future” in September 2024. These briefings; A Global Digital CompactReforms to the International Financial Architecture and The Future of Outer Space Governance sets out a chilling course for our future.

Among the proposals are a new “apex body” in charge of the entire financial system that will “enhance its coherence and align its priorities with the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development.” This could, according to Secretary-General António Guterres, be done through a “Biennial Summit between the Group of 20, Economic and Social Council, the Secretary-General, and heads of international financial institutions.”

This will further integrate the G20 with the United Nations into a body that can be described as an economic Security Council. It also seems like a perfect nest for the “apex predators” that runs the international banking system.

A vital part of the agenda is also digital connectivity and the establishment of a Global Digital Compact. This can be described as a cybernetic organ, consisting of a digitally connected network of people, entities, devices, and things, that easily can be directed by those who run the system. In the Policy Brief it is for example explained how digitisation will help to achieve the global goals. The suggestions happens to be very similar to what World Economic Forum and PwC prescribed in their report Unlocking Technologies for the Global Goals in 2020. A Digital ID is a cornerstone in this work and is among other things seen as a way to reduce poverty.

This may, however, come at a cost. In the UN Secretary-General’s High-level Panel on Digital Cooperations report Age of Digital Interdependence from 2019, it is stated that:

A digital ID can help unlock new opportunities but can also introduce new risks and challenges. They can be used to undermine human rights – for example, by enabling civil society to be targeted, or selected groups to be excluded from social benefits.

Will you get your social protection coverage if you don’t comply with vaccinations or other measures introduced to achieve the SDGs? Probably not. This can later be fused with a social credit system and Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) – which is now being introduced and tested in many countries across the world. To receive your daily bread you have to obey and accept the instructions from the Masters that run the show. If the UN declares a “Planetary Emergency” this will have severe consequences for our freedoms (as we experienced during the pandemic).

In the Policy Brief – A Global Digital Compact the authors truthfully are mentioning the rising inequality after the pandemic.

Digital technologies are accelerating the concentration of economic power in an ever smaller group of elites and companies: the combined wealth of technology billionaires, $2.1 trillion in 2022, is greater than the annual gross domestic product of more than half of the Group of 20 economies.

But it seems that United Nations has a somewhat peculiar way of solving this problem. Not only do they strive towards digitising everything – they have also partnered with Big Tech in order to achieve this.



The UN Secretary-General’s High-level Panel on Digital Cooperation was led by Melinda Gates from Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation (according to the bio, Melinda “helped develop many of the company’s multimedia products” during her time at Microsoft) and tech billionaire Jack Ma from the Chinese Ali Baba Group.

This comes with assistance from Young Global Leaders like Mohammed Al Gergawi (chairman of the high-tech Mecca gathering – World Government Summit in Dubai), and Marina Kolesnik (Russia/Ukraine) as well as a “generous” contribution from the World Economic Forums Center for the Fourth Industrial Revolution.

Ali Baba developed Chinas Social Credit System through their subsidiary Ant Group whereas Microsoft promotes Digital ID in the ID2020 Alliance together with GAVI – The Vacccine Alliance and the ever so present Rockefeller Foundation.

United Nations seems to have hired a gang of robbers to manage the bank. These are the “trustees of the material universe for future generations” as stated in the global business elites’ Davos Manifesto from 1973.

Why on Earth would these “enlightened custodians” reverse a development that has put more power and wealth into their hands?

And now our “generous” tech billionaires are heading for Outer Space. The last Policy Brief (The Future of Outer Space Governance) formulates the grand vision to reestablish a presence on the moon with a way station (Lunar Gateway) and the development of a base at the south pole of the Moon as well as conducting a manned mission to the red planet (Elon Musk’s SpaceX).

These are old fantasies from the late 1940s that never seem to materialise. But their “space-based opportunities” also highlight the “important link between outer space and the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development” with the importance of satellite surveillance to “track deforestation, monitor protected areas for illegal poaching and fishing and assess biodiversity changes” as well as track our every move through the global navigation satellite systems.

As WEF-trustee and Climate Prophet/Profiteer Al Gore proclaimed with a giggle in the commercial for his satellite surveillance project Climate Trace“And most importantly… NO MORE HIDING”.

Are these people insane? How can the construction of a digital world brain really contribute to a greener and healthier planet?

Wouldn’t it be a more efficient measure to secure peace and the environment on this planet if this megalomaniac elite were sent on a one way mission to Mars?

0. Introduction: “Our Common Agenda” – Multilateralism With Teeth

 

Connect with Jacob Nordangard, Ph.D.

Cover image credit: geralt




[Updated] On the Massive Fires in Canada & All Over North America

On the Massive Fires in Canada & All Over North America

 

TCTL editor’s note: [See update regarding ammonium nitrate at end of post.]

After days of viewing information regarding the devastating fires in Canada, starting with the alert by Dutchsinse (Michael Janich) six days ago, and subsequently hearing from family and friends who live along the US east coast (and experiencing the heavy skies where I live), it seems clear that we still don’t know what is going on.

Many have sent links to “who did this” videos, articles and tweets. Many have reposted clips from “some guy on TikTok“. It turns out that the guy is Al Vachon (TikTok handle al_vachon). I have shared the short video and a transcript below.

In a follow-up video, Al expresses his surprise that he’s receiving so much attention. I have no idea who he is or what he has to say about anything else, but other people who are questioning the narrative, and who also have a backbone, resonate with his words and are sharing everywhere.

In the meantime, Dutchsinse has done more investigation and found that the fire locations link up with locations of oil wells along the edge of the North American Craton, as well as a relationship to earthquake activity. He shows the correlation between earthquakes and oil well drill points. Dutchsinse makes it clear he does not have the answers but he is researching and sharing all that he sees, along with his questions.

And today, Jeff Berwick of Dollar Vigilante put together a video compilation of “fire”-related clips and thoughts,  which was sent out with his newsletter (also shared below).

While no one knows the truth about what is unfolding in all of these global events (natural occurrences and/or created or stimulated by human activity), we do know the full-spectrum-dominance agenda and that, regardless of the cause of the fires, the agenda drivers will use the situation to further their death cult (anti-human and anti-nature).  They will push forward their evil control agendas.

We must individually face the lies that we were all born in to, stand up, resist, and live/create our daily lives outside of their control. And we must let go of the fear of death. Life as enslaved beings is a far worse fate than death.

~ Kathleen

 

Follow Dutchsinse at Youtube

Canada Is on Fire

by Al Vachon on TikTok
June 4, 2023

https://www.tiktok.com/@al_vachon/video/7240820329088552198

Transcript prepared by Truth Comes to Light:

Good morning, everybody. I wanted to touch on this one this morning. It’s getting so bad that I don’t think people really, truly understand what’s going on.

If you haven’t heard the latest up here in Canada, BC is on fire. The East Coast is on fire. And now Quebec. Quebec, all in one day, the entire province caught fire on a beautiful day.

This is planned and I’ll tell you why it’s planned. They want to move people out of the countryside, into cities. Then they want to lock them down in 15-minute cities.

How do you do that? Contaminate the air, contaminate the water and so on.

They started contaminating the water, as you know, in the past few months. And now with train derailments and all that stuff all across North America, not just in Canada.

And that was purposefully done to contaminate water sources and then justify people’s relocation by saying the water is contaminated, you can’t stay here. Or the air is contaminated, you can’t stay here. Relocating them into whatever hotels or different establishments within city limits.

This is all a ploy, a plan, to get people into cities to implement their smart cities. That’s the only way they can control you.

First, they have to go to digital currency and get you into smart cities. This is happening and this is real.

This is evil. This is pure evil.

It’s our time to fight back. We need to —

I’m actually totally surprised that there isn’t complete and utter outrage, and an uprising like this world has never seen before.

Because this is what we need to take our countries back. Complete outrage and an uprising. Nothing less is going to do, nothing less is going to make this place a better world.

I mean, we have to take our country back. And the way we do that is we expel those that are destroying our way of life.

And what I mean by exposing them is getting them out of power. Forcing them one way or the other.

They don’t want to go willingly. We’ll help them out the door.

That’s it for today. Happy Sunday. Stay free. God bless.

 

Follow Al Vachon at TikTok

 

We Didn’t Start The Fire… But We Know Who Did

by Jeff Berwick,Dollar Vigilante blog
June 9, 2023

 

Long before there were Covaids, lethal injections, climate-destroying cow farts, and 15-minute prison cities, the NWO cabal has laid the groundwork for the biggest conspiracy feary of all: “How to enslave the world… and get away with it”.

Lesson 1: Sci-lence the Lambs

“Hey, morons! Canada’s on fire, it’s time to bring back the masks. It’s for your own good and the safety of others – how ‘bout a free anti-smoke vaccination?”

Isn’t it wonderful how these flimsy paper muzzles have such multi-purpose?

  1. Keeps you safe during the biggest “pandemic” the world has ever seen
  2. Protects you against stolen ammonia nitrate fires 3000 miles away
  3. Makes you look dumb as fook
  4. Identifies you as an NPC in the Great Reset Conspiracy – Climate Change edition

It’s got everything!

  • 15 Minute Cities
  • Sheeple not allowed to leave the city
  • It’s for your own good because the air outside the city is poisonous.
  • No cars – only driverless monorail things
  • Population control and Eugenics
  • Implanted control chips
  • Climate change/virus/meteor apocalypse has destroyed everything and there is no life outside the city – you can’t exist outside the system.

All of which were predicted in ‘Logan’s Run’, a 1976 dystopian cult movie where humanity was forced to retreat to domed biospheres because of an ‘ecological disaster’. Where, at the age of 30, people would be offered the choice to willingly and enthusiastically be killed in the expectation of being reincarnated, or, running like hell and hoping you avoid the armed, ruthless enforcers of the system…

Read more at Dollar Vigilante blog…

Watch Jeff’s video on:  Odysee | RumbleBitchuteTelegram

 

Connect with Jeff Berwick

 

Update 6/9/2023: Related to Jeff’s comment above about stolen ammonium nitrate, see this Tiktok video by RepublicanReflections:

https://www.tiktok.com/@republicanreflections/video/7242771288526294314

Cover image credit: CharlVera/pixabay


See related:

Wildfires As a Weapon: US Military Exposed




WHO Launches New “Digital Health Initiative”

WHO Launches New “Digital Health Initiative”
Chalk up another “I told you so” for the Conspiracy Theorists. 

by Kit Knightly, OffGuardian
June 8, 2023

 

On Monday, the World Health Organization and European Union announced the launch of their new “partnership”, building on the EU’s “highly successful” digital certification network, which was introduced during the “pandemic”.

From the WHO’s website [emphasis added]:

WHO will take up the European Union (EU) system of digital COVID-19 certification to establish a global system that will help facilitate global mobility

This would be those digital health passports that “conspiracy theorists” warned about, but which we were all told weren’t ever going to be a thing.

This isn’t about “Covid” anymore, WHO Chairman Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus said as much in his statement on the launch, and it’s again made clear on the website, which repeatedly underlines the supposed purpose of the initiative:

  • [To] protect citizens across the world from on-going and future health threats, including pandemics
  • [To] enhance strategic cooperation on global health issues
  • [To] help strengthen global health preparedness in the face of growing health threats
  • [To] to deliver better health for citizens across the globe

What are these “health threats”? Well, they quite intentionally don’t say, but we can all make pretty good guesses. Climate change, obviously. Obesity seems pretty likely, poverty, overpopulation …and as many more as they choose.

– That’s the whole point of the open-ended wording, you can adapt it as you go.

Anyway, it won’t just be about about Covid passports, again as the conspiracy theorists predicted. But, more than that, it won’t even just be passports…

This is the first building block of the WHO Global Digital Health Certification Network (GDHCN) that will develop a wide range of digital products to deliver better health for all.

They are delightfully vague about what exactly these other “digital products” might be, how much they are going to cost global taxpayers, and just how many of our rights we’ll be required to forfeit in the name of a “healthy” planet (although ou can read the WHO’s “Global Strategy on Digital Health” to get some rough ideas).

However, while the details are brushed over, the overall aim is pretty openly stated:

enhance strategic cooperation on global health issues […] bolster a robust multilateral system with WHO at its core, powered by a strong EU.

It’s globalism – sorry, “multilateralism”.

Globalism has been the end game since the pandemic started. Hence the Pandemic Treaty, the new IHR regulations all that fun stuff. One world government (or maybe two world governments, if the New Cold War plays out as expected), installed in the name of public health.

Note that this launch lines up with a lot of “coincidental” domestic political movements from around the world.

For example, in the US they are set to vote on the “Improving Digital Identity Act”, which would require digital ID to do…pretty much everything.

In Canada major corporations are uniting to embrace digital ID as a key part of Agenda 2030 and “sustainable development goals”.

In the UK Sir Keir Starmer has promised a “totally digital NHS” under the next Labour government.

In essence, each country – for notionally different reasons, and supposedly independently of their own free will – are all going to develop a digital ID/health passport system at exactly the same time, and while working with the WHO to ensure “interoperability”.

Therein lies the plausible deniability. See, it won’t be one global health and surveillance system! No, it will be 100+ different “interoperable” systems…that just happened by chance to all be conceived and built at the same time along the same guidelines.

A distinction good enough to fuel the inevitable defenses from corporate fact-checkers even if it can’t fool anyone else.

However, all that aside, the most interesting part of this story is where you read about it.

Viz – the back pages.

At the height of the pandemic, this would be big news, maybe breaking news in big red letters. There’d be op-eds in all the major outlets celebrating the move, accompanied by “fact checks” with headlines like “No, global digital passports doesn’t mean one world government”.

Now, if you’re not following certain social media accounts or regularly checking the news cycles for quite specific terms, you’d never have heard about this. It’s not even mentioned in any mainstream news site I’ve read.

Resistance has pushed the New Normal narrative out of the limelight, to be replaced by war porn, Trump, illegal immigrants or Harry and Meghan.

You’re all being encouraged to think the Great Reset was a flash in the pan, the New Normal just an old joke. 2020 was just a bad dream & now everything is back to normal & Left versus Right, East versus West…

But no. This is the last reel of the scary movie. The demon seems to be exorcised, the danger looks like it’s over and the heroine has gone to take a bath, unaware of what’s creeping slowly toward her from the shadows.

The Great Reset is still very much alive, but your resistance temporarily shut it down, so it’s changed its tactic. It was overt. Now it’s covert. Now it’s hoping to sneak in while you’re not looking and snatch you up and swallow you down before you even know what’s happening.

It’s incredibly important you don’t let that happen.

So – wake up, and wake other people up. Shake them. Yell at them. Get them to look over their shoulder at the big rough beast slouching toward Bethlehem – so we can try to stop it being born.

 

Connect with OffGuardian

Cover image based on creative commons work of: CDD20




‘Death Sentence for Millions’: WHO, EU Launch New Global Vaccine Passport Initiative

‘Death Sentence for Millions’: WHO, EU Launch New Global Vaccine Passport Initiative
Technology expert Michael Rectenwald, Ph.D., told The Defender that, under the guise of preserving freedom, a digital passport system “means restraints on movement and living for the unvaccinated and forced vaccination to participate in life.”

by Michael Nevradakis, Ph.D., The Defender
June 6, 2023

 

The World Health Organization (WHO) and the European Commission — the executive branch of the European Union (EU) — on Monday launched a “landmark digital health partnership” marking the beginning of the WHO Global Digital Health Certification Network (GDHCN) to promote a global interoperable digital vaccine passport.

Beginning this month, the WHO will adopt the EU’s system of digital COVID-19 certification “to establish a global system that will help facilitate global mobility and protect citizens across the world from on-going and future health threats, including pandemics,” according to Monday’s announcements by the WHO and the European Commission.

The WHO and European Commission claim the GDHCN initiative, which has been in the works since 2021, “will develop a wide range of digital products to deliver better health for all.”

The organizations said the WHO will not collect individuals’ personal data via these digital passports — stating that such data collection “would continue to be the exclusive domain of governments.”

WHO Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus lauded the new agreement:

“Building on the EU’s highly successful digital certification network, WHO aims to offer all WHO Member States access to an open-source digital health tool, which is based on the principles of equity, innovation, transparency and data protection and privacy.

“New digital health products in development aim to help people everywhere receive quality health services quickly and more effectively.”

However, experts who spoke with The Defender said the ramifications of such a system for human liberty and freedom of movement raised concerns.

Independent journalist James Roguski told The Defender the WHO is not waiting for a successful conclusion of these negotiations in order to implement initiatives such as a global digital vaccine passport. He said:

“The announcement by the WHO and the European Commission regarding the launch of their digital health partnership was hardly a surprise. Over a month ago, the WHO quietly published that they were working on ‘operationalizing’ the very things that were being ‘negotiated.’

“This is just one example that clearly shows that the super-secret ‘negotiations’ regarding the International Health Regulations (IHR) are a charade.”

Michael Rectenwald, Ph.D., author of “Google Archipelago: The Digital Gulag and the Simulation of Freedom,” told The Defender that, under the guise of preserving freedom, a digital passport system “means restraints on movement and living for the unvaccinated and forced vaccination to participate in life.”

The announcement of the WHO-European Commission collaboration came just days after the conclusion of the WHO’s annual World Health Assembly (WHA).

While the pandemic treaty and IHR amendments were not finalized at this year’s meeting, high-level WHO officials warned of the risk of a future pandemic and spread of a deadly “Disease X,” and expressed the need to “restrict personal liberties” during a future health emergency.

The EU has been a strong proponent of digital vaccine passports, first launched for its member states in late 2020 — concurrent with the introduction of the COVID-19 vaccines — under the name “Green Pass.” The EU’s experience with the digital passes is noted in Monday’s announcement, which states:

“One of the key elements in the European Union’s work against the COVID-19 pandemic has been digital COVID-19 certificates. To facilitate free movement within its borders, the EU swiftly established interoperable COVID-19 certificates.

“Based on open-source technologies and standards it allowed also for the connection of non-EU countries that issue certificates … becoming the most widely used solution around the world.”

Roguski told The Defender the EU also was among the strongest proponents of vaccine passports during ongoing negotiations for the WHO’s “pandemic treaty” and amendments to the IHR.

“They really want the global digital health certificate,” Roguski told The Defender in March. “Primarily, that’s coming from the European Union.”

‘Pandemic passports a death sentence for millions’

According to Roguski, the EU, during negotiations for the IHR amendments, put forth proposals that seek to “‘normalize’ the implementation of a global digital health certificate.”

The Czech Republic called for Passenger Locator Forms “containing information concerning traveller’s destination,” preferably in digital form, for the purpose of contact tracing.

They also proposed that the WHO’s Health Assembly “may adopt, in cooperation with the International Civil Aviation Organization [ICAO] … and other relevant organisations, the requirements that documents in digital or paper form shall fulfill with regard to interoperability of information technology platforms, technical requirements of health documents, as well as safeguards to reduce the risk of abuse and falsification.”

The WHO lists ICAO as an officially recognized “stakeholder.”

The Czech Republic and the EU proposed documentation not just for vaccination, but “test certificates and recovery certificates” in cases “where a vaccine or prophylaxis has not yet been made available for a disease in respect of which a public health emergency of international concern has been declared.”

Plans for the WHO’s GDHCN have been in the works since at least August 2021, when the WHO released a document titled “Digital documentation of COVID-19 certificates: vaccination status: technical specifications and implementation guidance, 27 August 2021.”

The GDHCN framework made its way onto the agenda of this year’s WHA, which stated:

“The Secretariat has developed SMART (Standards-based, Machine-readable, Adaptive, Requirements-based, and Testable) Guidelines on the digital documentation of COVID-19 certificates, comprising recommendations on the data, digital functionality, ethics, and trust architecture needed to ensure the interoperability of immunization and health records globally.”

The WHO also announced the successful completion of a “technical feasibility study for establishing a federated global trust network, which tested the ability to interoperate the health content and trust networks across existing regional efforts.”

EU officials have frequently praised themselves over the launch of the bloc’s “Green Pass,” touting how individuals’ privacy would be protected on the app. The introduction of the “Green Pass” was accompanied by statements by European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen calling for a “discussion” on mandatory vaccinations in the EU.

One of the EU’s stated priorities as part of its 2019-2024 five-year plan is to create a “Digital Identity for all Europeans.” Namely, each EU citizen and resident would have access to a “personal digital wallet,” which would include national ID cards, birth and medical certificates, and drivers’ licenses.

These proposals and initiatives appear to be closely aligned with the United Nations’ Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), and in particular, Target 16.9, which calls for the provision of a digital legal identity for all, including newborns, by 2030.

Tedros said the SDGs are “our north star,” while addressing this year’s WHA.

Rectenwald called “pandemic passports” a “death sentence for millions.” He told The Defender:

“Despite the studies demonstrating that vaccines to curb pandemics have been deadly and useless, the WHO is doubling down on vaccine mandates.

“Pandemic passports equal a death sentence for millions and the abrogation of rights for the non-compliant. The WHO should be stopped before it completes the construction of a global totalitarian system.”

 

Michael Nevradakis, Ph.D., based in Athens, Greece, is a senior reporter for The Defender and part of the rotation of hosts for CHD.TV’s “Good Morning CHD.”

 

This article was originally published by The Defender — Children’s Health Defense’s News & Views Website under Creative Commons license CC BY-NC-ND 4.0. Please consider subscribing to The Defender or donating to Children’s Health Defense

Connect with Children’s Health Defense

 




The Tiananmen Square Hoax: Massacre or Failed Color Revolution?

The Tiananmen Square Hoax: Massacre or Failed Color Revolution?

 



by Matt Ehret, Matt Ehret’s Insights
June 4, 2023

 

In this episode of The Multipolar Reality on Rogue News, I take a deep dive into the truth of Tiananmen Square and prove that everything you’ve been taught about this Massacre on June 4, 1989 is a lie covering up a CIA-driven attempt at color revolution more akin to Ukraine’s Maidan in 2014.

This presentation will also introduce the origins of the National Endowment for Democracy from the bowels of the Trilateral Commission, Open Society Foundations, the Malthusian takeover of the trans-Atlantic, the Club of Rome and the hive of transhumanists who were more successful with their program to destroy Russia during the 1980s-1990s than they were to achieve their takeover of China.

The deep state of China is here mapped out taking us into the network around disgraced Communist Party chairman Zhao Ziyang and his nest of technocratic fifth columnists who tried to turn China into a slave colony under the thumb of the Trilateral Commission social engineers. And yes, Miles Guo, Jimmy Lai and Falun Gong play a role in this sordid tale.

Supplementary reading:

How China’s Gorbachev was Flushed… in 1989

Tiananmen Square: The Failure of an American-instigated 1989 Color Revolution

How China Banned Soros [a Canadian Patriot Documentary]

Who is Creating a New Chinese Boogey Man? (An Examination of Modern Psychological Warfare)

 

Connect with Matt Ehret

 




Unveiling the Privacy Perils of Amazon Sidewalk

Unveiling the Privacy Perils of Amazon Sidewalk

by Neil Radimaker, The Conscious Resistance
May 26, 2023

 

In a time where technology continues to shape our lives, the emergence of Amazon Sidewalk has ignited a fervent debate about the balance between convenience and privacy. As an independent investigator, I feel compelled to understand the deep complexities and potential dangers of this pervasive network. This investigative report aims to shed light on the surveillance capabilities, coverage area, and the undisclosed collaborations surrounding Amazon Sidewalk.

Amazon Sidewalk, is a shared network launched by Amazon, promising to enhance the functionality of devices like Amazon Echo devices, Ring Security Cams, outdoor lights, motion sensors, and Tile trackers. It extends their working range and helps them perform better both at home and beyond the front door. However, the very features that make it appealing also raise serious concerns about privacy and surveillance.

One-sided PR Video: About Amazon Sidewalk and how Semtech’s LoRa® technology plays a critical role (Published: March of 2023).

This report is a culmination of research, analysis, and critical thinking, and it is my hope that it serves as a catalyst for informed conversations and collective action.

Unveiling the Dangers of Amazon Sidewalk’s Surveillance Capabilities

In this digital age, where connectivity and smart devices have become ubiquitous, a new level of surveillance has emerged, blurring the boundaries between public and private spaces. Amazon Sidewalk stands at the forefront of these intrusive surveillance networks. In this report, we dive into the alarming dangers posed by these surveillance capabilities and the implications for personal privacy and autonomy.

Audio and Video Intrusion:

One of the most concerning aspects of Amazon Sidewalk is its ability to intrude into our private spaces without our explicit consent or knowledge. By silently capturing seamless audio and video data through devices like Ring cameras, Amazon Echo and other compatible smart home technologies. Sidewalk has the potential to turn every room of our homes into a watchful eye, constantly recording and analyzing our activities. This level of surveillance undermines the sanctity of our personal lives and raises questions about the boundaries of consent and individual autonomy.

Integration with Facial Recognition:

One of the most controversial aspects of Amazon Sidewalk’s privacy invasion potential is its integration with facial recognition technology. By combining video surveillance with facial recognition algorithms, Sidewalk will have the capacity to identify individuals and track their movements with alarming accuracy. Individuals can be identified and monitored, alerting officials when a person designated as “suspicious” is caught on camera.

Behavior Profiling:

By collecting a vast amount of data about our daily routines, habits, and preferences, Amazon Sidewalk has the potential to construct detailed profiles of individuals. Through sophisticated algorithms and data analysis, Sidewalk can track our movements, monitor our online activities, and even make inferences about our behaviors and interests. This level of profiling creates a comprehensive digital portrait, encroaching upon our autonomy and raising concerns about potential manipulation or discrimination.

Room Mapping and Blueprinting: 

Amazon’s acquisition of iRobot, the maker of Roomba raises concerns about data sharing and collaboration with Amazon Sidewalk. The Roomba’s advanced features, including its mapping and blueprinting capabilities, introduce interesting privacy implications. With data collection and the ability to gather detailed information about our home layouts and furnishings. The Roomba can also silently record audio and video, analyzing our activities, intruding into our most private spaces.

Overlap of Coverage Reach:

Amazon Sidewalk’s extensive network coverage raises concerns about the widespread surveillance it enables. With a vast number of interconnected devices, this creates an overlapping network of surveillance that spans entire neighborhoods and public spaces. This level of coverage infringes upon our very sense of privacy, as our movements and activities can be captured and monitored from various angles and locations privately and publicly. Amazon Sidewalk’s ambition is to establish a nationwide network, the company currently claims it now provides coverage to over 90% of the U.S. population, including those who live in moderately rural areas.

Unregulated Data Collection:

The vast amount of data collected by Amazon Sidewalk raises significant concerns about its storage, usage, and potential for misuse. With access to intimate details of our lives, including our daily routines, social interactions, and even sensitive information, the potential for abuse or unauthorized access to this data is alarming. The lack of clear regulations and safeguards heightens the risks associated with such uncontrolled data collection.

The Partnership Between Amazon, Law Enforcement and Federal Agencies:

Amazon Ring’s partnership with local law enforcement agencies has raised significant privacy concerns. The doorbell-camera company has established video-sharing partnerships with more than 400 police forces across the United States, potentially granting them access to homeowners’ camera footage. This partnership allows police to request video recorded by homeowners’ cameras within a specific time and area, aiding officers in viewing footage from the company’s millions of Internet-connected cameras installed nationwide.

While homeowners can decline these requests, the number of police deals is likely to fuel broader questions about privacy, surveillance, and the expanding reach of tech giants and local police. Legal experts and privacy advocates have voiced alarm about the company’s ambitions and its increasingly close relationship with police, arguing that the program could threaten civil liberties, turn residents into informants, and subject innocent people, including those who Ring users have flagged as “suspicious,” to greater surveillance and potential risk.

Currently, law enforcement can request footage from Ring cameras through the Neighbors app, but homeowners have the right to refuse. If the footage is deemed critical, officers can seek a search warrant or court order to force Ring to release the footage, regardless of the homeowner’s objections. There have however been cases where Ring did not require the use of a warrant or court order to release the footage to law enforcement. This effectively transforms private security systems into tools for law enforcement. Ring’s collaboration with law enforcement has been criticized for potentially fostering racial profiling and eroding community trust.

The high-resolution cameras can capture detailed images not only of the owner’s doorstep but also of neighboring houses down the street. Some officers have confessed to looking for Ring doorbells while investigating crimes or canvassing neighborhoods, in case they need to resort to legal maneuvers to obtain the video without the homeowner’s consent.

As concerns regarding the privacy and security implications of Amazon Sidewalk continue to grow, it becomes imperative to examine the collaborations and deals with federal agencies.

Reports have surfaced indicating that Amazon has entered into collaborations with the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI). The exact nature and scope of this collaboration remain undisclosed, but it has raised concerns about the potential access and sharing of data between Amazon Sidewalk and the FBI. The implications of such a partnership on surveillance capabilities and the handling of user data warrant further investigation and scrutiny.

While the specifics are shrouded in secrecy, there have been many reports talking about the working relationship between Amazon and the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA). In fact, a $600 million computing cloud was developed by Amazon Web Services for the CIA. This cloud is intended to service all the agencies that make up the intelligence community, ushering in a new era of cooperation and coordination. The cloud allows agencies within the intelligence community to order a variety of on-demand computing and analytic services from the CIA and National Security Agency.

Final thoughts from the author:

For all intents and purposes, the “Total Information Network” is here. Amazon Sidewalk fits the description of a comprehensive surveillance system that extensively monitors, tracks, and collects all data on a large scale. This network leverages advanced technologies, such as surveillance cameras, facial recognition software, data analytics algorithms, and interconnected databases, to gather and analyze vast amounts of information about individuals. Consequently, it creates a surveillance state that encroaches upon the existence of personal privacy, granting authorities and centralized entities unparalleled access to individuals’ activities, behaviors, and personal data. In many ways, it resembles a magnified version of the dystopian surveillance depicted in George Orwell’s “1984.” This is now reality.

This type of information network should raise major concerns. It is very similar to the ideals and unethical principles of past oppressive regimes, who created extensive lists of individuals for surveillance and control. The collection of personal information within such a network creates a potential for retrospective use against people in the future.

Just as the Stasi meticulously documented citizens’ activities and associations, and the Nazis compiled lists to target specific groups, this comprehensive surveillance system enables authorities to retrospectively identify and target individuals based on their past actions, beliefs, or affiliations. This poses a grave risk to personal freedom, as historical data can be weaponized to persecute, discriminate against, marginalize, and even murder individuals through the acts of democide and genocide.

The lessons from history remind us of the importance of guarding against the misuse of personal information and protecting individual rights, even as technology advances and surveillance capabilities expand.

It is my hope that this report sparks meaningful conversations and prompts individuals, communities, and policymakers to question the balance between connectivity and privacy. The path forward requires a collaborative effort, with individuals, advocacy groups, and policymakers working together to shape regulations and guidelines that prioritize privacy, autonomy, and consent. It is only through vigilant and educated learning that we can navigate the complexities of the digital age and ensure the protection of our fundamental rights and freedoms.

 

Sources:

    1. The Atlantic: The Details About the CIA’s Deal With Amazon
    2. The Register: ACLU: Amazon’s Rekognition raises profound civil liberties concerns
    3. The Washington Post: Doorbell-camera firm Ring has partnered with 400 police forces, extending surveillance concerns
    4. Popular Science: Amazon Sidewalks Privacy Concerns
    5. The Verge: Amazon Sidewalk Privacy Echo Ring Smart Home
    6. Business Insider: Amazon Sidewalk Raises Privacy Concerns Ahead Launch Experts
    7. CPO Magazine: Amazon Sidewalks Smart Neighborhood Vision Raises Serious Privacy Concerns
    8. Consumer Reports: Pros and Cons of Amazon Sidewalk Network Plus How to Opt Out
    9. HackRead: Critical Vulnerability Amazon Ring Camera Record
    10. Wired: Ring Doorbell Camera Amazon Privacy
    11. Komando: Roomba Security Tips
    12. EFF: Ring Reveals They Give Videos Police Without User Consent or Warrant
    13. New York Post: Employees at Amazon’s Ring Have Been Spying on Customers
    14. The Guardian: Amazon Ring Largest Civilian Surveillance Network US
    15. Amazon Sidewalk Website
    16. Amazon Sidewalk White-paper
    17. AWS IoT Core Features
    18. Amazon Conditions of Use
    19. Amazon.com Privacy Notice

 

Neil Radimaker is a Reporter, Journalist, filmmaker and cinematographer, as well as the co-founder and co-creator of The Conscious Resistance Network, which is a decentralized media network focused on promoting individual freedom, peaceful resistance, and alternative solutions to mainstream problems. 

 

Connect with The Conscious Resistance

Cover image based on creative commons work of: TheDigitalArtist

 




It’s Bird Flu Season in Russia (Time to Kill All the Chickens, for Public Health)

It’s Bird Flu Season in Russia (Time to Kill All the Chickens, for Public Health)

A poultry farm in Yaroslavl has been ordered to cull 800,000 chickens, as regions introduce arbitrary “public health” measures to stop the spread of “bird flu”

by Edward Slavsquat, Edward Slavsquat substack
May 25, 2023

 

On May 12, Russian media reported that an “infected” gull had been discovered near a pond in a village in Moscow Oblast.

What happened next was practically preordained.

Moscow Mayor Sergey Sobyanin—the poster boy for New Normal Russia—issued a decree on May 18 imposing “quarantine” measures on 11 districts in the capital.

The order placed restrictions on public events where birds might be congregating, and also banned the transportation of feathered creatures in the aforementioned districts.

Of course, birds could always just, you know, fly into one of these “quarantined” districts, and spread their devilish flu, but that’s neither here nor there.

Moscow’s friendly mayor dreams of “genetic passports” by 2030
If you like UN Agenda 2030, you’ll love Moscow 2030!

Read full story…

Moscow is the trend-setter when it comes to enterprising public health policy in Russia, so of course other regions have been eager to follow suit with their own arbitrary bird flu edicts.

Kaliningrad was the first to play copy-cat.

source

Just hours after Sobyanin’s decree was published, Kaliningrad imposed its own “quarantine” on a 10km perimeter around another bird flu Ground Zero.

The restrictions, which will remain in place until August 1, included a ban on the “import and export of birds and hatching eggs, the relocation of birds, procurement and export of bird feed, as well as holding agricultural fairs, exhibitions, auctions and other events.”

source

A week later, the discovery of dead, flu-riddled gulls in Nizhny Novgorod prompted officials to introduce a 30-day quarantine in one of the region’s districts.

Health authorities “seized poultry within a radius of five kilometers [from where the dead gulls were found], and poultry farms in the region were transferred to enhanced security protocols.”

Locals were also advised to only buy poultry from “verified” sources—the good, factory-farmed corporate stuff; don’t even think about buying poultry from your unverified neighbor!

But confiscating all chickens in a 5km radius is amateur hour compared to the health-boosting measures adopted in Yaroslavl.

source

The Romanovskaya poultry farm in Yaroslavl has been instructed to cull its livestock, and destroy all animal products on its premises, following an alleged bird flu outbreak:

All birds, more than 800 thousand in total, will be killed … The destruction of the carcasses, along with poultry products (eggs), will be carried out via incineration at a specially designated site. […]

The poultry farm has not disclosed any details about the order. When a 76.RU correspondent tried to contact company representatives, they declined to comment.

“We are in quarantine. That’s all,” a receptionist said, before hanging up.

The region is a major agricultural hub, so there’s no reason to believe that this bird-liquidation will cause a shortage of poultry or eggs. But…it’s also 800,000 chickens?

Finally, like a bad omen, Tatarstan (which was arguably the most Virus Crazy region in Russia after Moscow/St. Petersburg) is already bracing for the bird flu apocalypse:

source

Please just stop. Please.

It was clear that the COVID grift was rapidly losing its potency when Virus Nanny Anna Popova announced an imminent wave of “Arcturus”.

How many waves of severe-sounding Greek letters and words are possible, before people stop paying attention? Or worse, starting asking questions?

Well, now Russia is sacrificing 800,000 chickens to the Global Health Gods.

By the way: Where did this scary outbreak of bird flu begin? Hard to say for sure, but China recorded the world’s first human death from the new and improved “H3N8 avian influenza strain” in mid-April.

The bird flu scam actually predates COVID by many years. In fact, many of the trusted experts who demanded large-scale chicken slaughter (for public health) later went on to become celebrated “coronavirus experts” who championed worldwide house arrest for the proles—resulting in another mass culling.

Have you ever heard of a psychopath named David Nabarro?

source / source (to be fair to Nabarro, he later described lockdown as a “last resort”, which makes him slightly less disgusting than the typical WHO-certified Neanderthal.)

Let’s not deceive ourselves, friends. Global Biosecurity Theater is forever.

 

Connect with Edward Slavsquat

Cover image credit: CDD20